■' %

To face lille page.

130

(ifhJtfiSan

130

— I—

188

MAP

showing the Country

between

W & MACKENZIE WVE31S

hnn latest official Aources

StauiLf Mile*

OtiMurvtf^ riMr* art i inhmttd -

THE ROUTES

AND

MINERAL RESOURCES

NORTH WESTEKN CANADA.

E. JEROME DYER, P.R.G.S.

Honorary Secretary of the Incorporated London Chamber of Mines, London.

Publwhed untUr the Atupicea of
THE INCORPOBATED LONDON CHAMBER OF MINES
Hwith which are affiliated the Auatralaaiati and Canadiari Chambers of Mines, London).

LONDON :

GEORGE PHILIP & SON, 82, FLEET STREET, E.G.
LIVERPOOL : — Philip, Son & Nephew, 45—51, Sooth Castle Stbbit.

1898.

Mil rights rtserved.)

'fUzfiiStn^XneuSt LonUun.

r/v

PREFACE.

In my capacity as Honorary Secretary of the
Incorporated London Chamber of Mines (with which is
affiliated the Canadian Chamber), I have had continuous
occasion to remark the need of an abridged hand-book
upon the mineral resources of North- Western Canada.

The gold discoveries in the Upper Yukon Country
have made this want even more keenly felt, for it is
believed that throughout the vast expanse of the
Northern Dominion there are innumerable openings for
the intrepid mineral explorer with the fascinating
possibility of many " Klondikes " awaiting the pick and
pan of the adventurous pioneer. Meanwhile millions of
many nations that have heard the name and news of
" Klondike " are eager for more information of the Great
Territory of which this newest marvel in goldfields is but
a spot.

Shaping my efforts by the numerous enquiries that
have come before me, I have endeavoured to compile a
work to meet the demand, and have embodied other
necessary information that I think will interest those
concerned.

The chief consideration, after ascertaining the
existence and locality of payable minerals, is how to
reach them. A considerable proportion, therefore, of
this book is devoted to the question of routes. On this
subject, for obvious reasons, I write from the point of
view of a resident in England and show that there are
many routes into the N. W. Territories and the Yukon
from the East and South East which are, perhaps,
superior to those from the Pacific Coast. This
question, together with Mining Fields being developed
and those prospective, is dealt with in Part I.

Special attention is drawn to the Mackenzie Biver and
Bay, for the discovery of an evidently immense tract of
gold-bearing Country in the Mackenzie- Yukon lends a
deeper interest to the value of Mackenzie Bay by
making it a means of opening up a Commercial route to
the Bay by way of Beh'ring Straits and the Arctic Ocean.
Its superiority over the Yukon River Boute is also

iv.

pointed out. Dr. Dawson's views — that Mackenzie Bay
will one day serve British North America as the White
Bea serves Russia will, doubtless, soon become fact*
The inimitably rich resources of this huge territory
reached by the Mackenzie, Peel and other rivers flowing
into Mackenzie Bay are indicated, as also are the
advantages of a direct route from Hudson's Bay through
Chesterfield Inlet, or from some other point leading from
this great arm of the sea.

Fart II. and the Appendix consist wholly of a

classified digest of the chief works of reference, books of
travel and exploration, recent reports and other publica-
tions of the N. W. Territories together with extracts from
various official reports, leading newspapers and expert
authorities upon the resources, chief waterways, routes
and distances around and throughout the far Northern
Dominion, and more particularly of the Yukon-Mackenzie
Country and the means of access to that region.

I would direct special notice to the accompanying
map which is based upon the most recent information
and discoveries, and has received the best attention of
the Publishers.

Whether this book fulfils the object with which it is

written or not, I shall be quite satisfied if it directs

some attention to the splendid work of the Geological

Survey of Canada under the brilliant directorship of

Dr. G. M. Dawson, to whom I must acknowledge my

chief indebtedness. Nor can the name of Mr. Wm.

Ogilvie be omitted in any present day work on Canada's

Mining Industries : a name, practically, synonymoua

with the World's greatest goldfields, whom the "Times"

(London) describes as a man of indomitable courage and

sterling integrity, whom the " Toronto Globe " names

" The Modem Cato," to whom thousands of Miners will

owe more than they can ever repay and to whom this

Book's greatest attraction is due. The many others to

whom I am indebted are mentioned below along with

such publications and special reports as I have quoted

in Part II. and the Appendix, and to some extent in

Part I.

E. JEROME DYER.

▼.

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.

List of Authorities consulted in tlie preparation of

tliis Worlc.

Report of the Select Committee of the Senate appointed in 1888
to enquire into the Resources of the Great Mackenzie Basin
(many of the names mentioned below — indicated by an
asterisk — gave evidence at this Committee).

British Columbia Year Book (Gosnell's) for 1896—97. Victoria

(B. C), 1897.
Exploratory Surveys in 1887—88 by Mr. Wm. Ogilvie (Ottawa,

1890), and Mr. R. G. McConnell (Montreal, 1890), and by Dr.

G. M. Dawson (Ottawa, 1890).

Annual Reports of the Geological Survey of Canada for the years
1886 to '95, inclusive.

Official Handbook of the Dominion of Canada, published August,

1897.
Reports on the Yukon and adjacent country by Mr. Wm. Ogilvie

during 1895, '96 and '97 (Ottawa, 1897).

Summary Report of the Geological Survey Department of
Canada for 1896.

Annual Reports of the Minister of Mines for Canada for 1894 — 96.

The 12th Annual Report of the U. S. Geological Survey referring

to Mr. Frederick Schwatka's exploratory tour through the

Yukon Valley in 1891.
Canadian Pacific Railway publications for 1880, and also for

1896, '97. '98.
Chartered Hudson's Bay and Pacific Railway publications, com*

piled by Col. J. Harris, F.R.G.S., F.R.C. Inst., London, 1897.

Journals of the Royal Geographical Society of Great Britain

(numbers referred to where quoted).
" The Early Chartered Companies," by Geo. Cawston, Barrister-

at-Law, and A. H. Keane, F.R.G.S., London, 1896.

" On Snow Shoes to the Barren Grounds," by Caspar Whitney.
London, 1896.

♦' The Barren Grounds of Northern Canada," by Warburton Pike.
London, 1892.

*' Through the Sub-Arctic Forest," by Warburton Pike. London,
1896.

*• History of the North-West" (3 vols.), by Alexander Begg.
Toronto, 1884.

" Tho Great Lone Land," by Major W. P. Butler, C.B., P.R.G.S.

London, 1874.
"The Wild North Land," by Captain W. P. Butlor. P.R.G.S.

Montreal, 1874.

"The Great Fur Land (Sketches of Life in the Hudson's Bay
Territory)," by H. M. Robinson, New Yorlt.

" Our North Land," by Chas. R. Tuttle, of the Hudson's Bay
Expedition of 1884. Toronto, 1885.

"Life and Labours in the Far North West," by W. Henry
Barnaby. London, 1884.

"History of Canada" (8 vols.), by Wm. Kingsford. London,

1887—96.
"By Track and Trail through Canada," by Edward Roper.

London, 1891.

" Manitoba and the Great North- West," by John Macoun, M.A.,

Dominion Government Explorer of tho North-West. London,

1883.
" British North America " (Stanford's). London, 1897.
British Columbia Development Association's publication.

London, 1897.
Bulletin de la Soci6t6 de Geographic, Paris, 1875.
Narrative of Discovery and Adventure in the Polar Seas and

Regions, by Professurs Leslie, Jameson and Hugh Murray.

Edinburgh, 1830.

Geology of the Mackenzie River, by G. P. B. Meek, Chicago
Academy of Science, 1868.

Reports by Dr. R. Bell on the Geology of Canada, 1882—84.

Boat Voyage through Rupert's Land and the Arctic Seas, by Sir

J. Richardson, London, 1851.
A Voyage of discovery, for the purpose of exploring Baffin's Bay,

&c., by Sir John Ross, in 1818, London, 1819. Geological

Appendix by Dr. McCulloch.
Narrative of a Journey to the Shores of the Polar Sea in the

years 1819—22, by Captain J. Franklin, London, 1823.

Appendix 1, by J. Richardson, M.D.
Journal of a Second Voyage for the Discovery of a North-West

Passage, &o., 1821—23, by Captain Parry, London, 1824.

Journal of a Third Voyage for the Discovery of a North-West
Passage, &c., by Captain W. E. Parry, London, 1826. Appendix
by Prof. Jameson on Geology of Coimtries discovered during
Captain Parry's Second and Third Expeditions.

Narrative of a Second Expedition to the Shores of the Polar Sea
in the years 1825—27, by Captain J. Franklin, London, 1828.
Appendix 1, by J. Richardson.

vu.

Narrative of a Second Voyage in search of a North-West Passage,
&G., 1820—33, by Sir John Robs, London, 1836. Appendix on
Geology by Sir J. Boss.

Narrative of the Arctic Land Expedition, &o., 1838—35, by Capt.
Back, London, 1836. (See also Journal Royal Geographical
Society, vol. iv., 1886).

Narrative of an Expedition in H.M.S. "Terror," 1S3C-37, by
Captain Bacic, London, 1888.

Narrative of the Discoveries on the North Coast of America, &o.,
1836—39, by Thomas Simpson, London, 1848.

Some account ot Peel River, North America, by A. K. Isbister,
Journal Royal Geographical Soc, London, vol. zv., 1845, p. 332.

Narrative of an Expedition to the Shores of the Arctic Sea in
1846—47, by Dr. John Rae, London, 1850.

Journey from Great Bear Lake to WoUaston Land, and Explora-
tions along the South and East Coasts of Victoria Land, by
Dr. J. Rae, Journal Royal Geographical Soc, vol, xxii., 1852.

Journal of a Voyage in Baffin's Bay and Barrow Straits in
1850—51, by P. C. Sutherland, M.D., London, 1852. Geological
Appendix by J. W. Salter.

On the Geological and Glacial Phenomena of the Coasts of Davis'
Strait and Baffiu s Bay, by P. C. Sutherland, M.D., Quarterly
Journal Geological Society, vol. ix., 1853, p. 296.

A Summer Search for Sir J. Franklin, by Captain Inglefield, 1853,
Contains a Geological Appendix. " Arctic Manual " of 1875.

Tha Last of the Arctic Voyages, &c., 1852—64, by Sir E. Belcher
London, 1855.

On some additions to the Geology of the Arctic Regions, by
J. W. Salter. Report of the British Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science, 1855.

Further Papers relative to the recent Arctic Expeditions in Search
of Sir John Franklin, &c. London, Government, 1855.

On the Geology of the Hudson's Bay Territories and of Portions
of the Arctic and North-Western Regions of America, by
A. K. Isbister, Quarterly Journal Geologicol Society, vol. xi.
(Also reprinted, without map, in American Journal Science
and Arts, second series, vol. xxi., 1856, p. 313).

The Discovery of a North- West Passage by H.M.S. " Investi-
gator," Capt. R. McClure, 1850—54. London, 1857. Geological
Appendix by Sir R. Murchison.

A Personal Narrative of the Discovery of the North-West Passage,
by A. Armstrong, M.D., late Surgeon and Naturalist to H.M.S.
"Investigator." London, 1857.

Arctic Explorations by Dr. E. K. Kane, American Journal Science
and Arts, second series, vol. xxiv., 1867, p. 235.

Vlll.

Report from the Select Committco on the Uudson's Bay Coiupaiiy,
&o. London, Government, 1857.

A Narrative of the Discovery of the Fate of Sir John Franklin, by
Captain McClintock. London, edition of 1859. Geological
Appendix by Professor Samuel Haughton.

Report of the Assiniboine and Saskatchewan Exploring Expedi-
tion, by H. Y. Hind, Tofonto, 1859.

The Polar Regions, by Sir John Richardson, Edinburgh, 1861.
(Reprinted from Encyclopedia Britannica, Eighth edition,
1860).

Scientific Results of the " Polaris " Arctic Expedition. Nature,
vol. ix., 1874, p. 404,

A Whaling Cruise to BafiBn's Bay, &o., by A. H. Markham,
London, 1874. Appendix C, List of Geological Specimens, by
R. Etheridge.

Manual of the Natural History, Geology and Physics of Green-
land and Neighbouring Regions, &c.. Edited by Professor
T. R. Jones, London, 1875.

G4ographi4 de I'Athabaskaw-Mackenzie et des Grands Lacs du
Bassin Arctique, par I'Abb^ E. Pet' tot. Bulletin de la Soci^t6
de G6ographi6, Paris, tome X., 1875. •.•t .

L'Expedition Polaire Americain^, sous lea ordres du Capitaine
Hall. Letter by Dr. E. Bessels. Bui. Soc. G6og., Paris,
vol. ix., 1875, p. 297.

Narrative of a Voyage to the Polar Sea during 1875—76, &c., by
Captain Sir G. S. Nares, London, 1878, Appendix xv., Geology,
by C. E. De Ranee and H. W. Fielden. "

Geology of the Coasts of the Arctic Lands visited by the late
British Exdedition under Captain Sir George Nares, &c., by
Captain H. W. Fielden and C. E. De Ranee, Quarterly Journal
Geological Society, vol. xxxiv., 1878, p. 656.

Narrative of the Second Arctic Expedition made by C. F. Hall.
Washington, Government 1879. Appendix iii., by Prof.
B. K. Emerson.

Encyclopedia Britannica, Greenland, by Robert Brown. Polar
Regions, by 0. R. Markham. (Geological sketches appended
to both these Articles.)

Three Years of Arctic Service, an account of the Lady Franklin
Bay Expedition, by Lieut. A. W. Greely, New York, 1886.

Reports of the Royal Commission on the Mineral Resources of
Ontario. Toronto, 1890.

Notes to accompany a Geological Map of the Northern portion of
the Dominion of Canada. East of the Rocky Mountains, by
Geo. M. Dawson, D.S., P.G.S., Montreal, 1887.

is.

Descriptive Sketch of the Physical Geography and Oeiology of the

Dominion of Canada. By Alfred R. 0. Selwyn and G. M.

Dawson, Montreal, 1881.
"Canada— A Geographical, Agricultural and Mineralogical

Sketch," by T. Sterry Hunt. Quebec, 1863.
Beport on the Climate and Agricultural Value, General Geological

Features and Minerals of Economic Importance of part of the

Northern Portion of British Columbia and of the Peace River

Country. By Geo. M. Dawson, 1880.
Lecture by Mr. Wra. Ogilvie, delivered Victoria (B. C.) on

November 5th, 1897. Government Printer, Victoria (B. C),

1897.
Annual Reports of the Governor of Alaska for each year, from

1884—95 inclusive. Washington, U.S.

The 6th Annual Report of the Ontario Bureau of Mines (1897).
The 18th Annual Report of the British Columbia Board of Trade

for 1896-97.
*Jan:es Anderson, Explorer, Franklin Search Expedition (quoted
by his son before the Committee of the Senate, Ottawa, 1883).
•His Lordship Bishop W. C. Bompas, N.W. Territories.

Archibald Blue, Director Bureau of Mines, Ontario. (Summary
of Geological Survey of Canada for 1896.)

F. G. Hinde Bowker, N.W. Territories. (Literview, Pall Mall
Gazette, London, October 28th, 1897.)

Inspector Constantine, Cooomandant Yukon Police Division.

(Reports of the Commissioner of the N.W. Mounted Police

for 1895 and 1896.
*Hon. Wm. Christie, Lute Chief Inspecting Factor, Hudson's Bay

Company.
*His Lordship Bishop Clut, Mackenzie River District, N.W.

Territories.
tDr. G. M. Dawson, C.M.G., F.G.S., Director of the Geological

Survey of Canada.
Thomas Deasy, Chief of Fire Department, Viofioria, B. C.

(Extracts from Letters to Commander Wells, R.N., London,

August 27th. 1897.)

Russell L. Dunn, M.E., London. {London Mining Journal,

October 2nd, 1897.)
fProf. J. B. Hurlbert, Geological Survey of Canada.

W. A. K. Isbister, Explorer N.W. Territories, 1844 (men!iioned
elsewhere).

Joseph Ladue, Yukon Pioneer, Dawson City. (McClore's Maga-
zine, September, 1897.)

Sir J. H. Lefroy, President Geological Beotion British Association,
1880.

A *

fProf. Maooun, (Geological Burvoy of Canada.

B. G. McConnell, B.A., Oeological Survey of Canada (mentioned
elsewhere).

Hon. H. G. Macintosh, Lieut.-Govemor of N.W. Territories.
(Interview, Palt Mall Gazette, 16th September, 1897.)

*Donald Mclvor, Manitoba. .,■.: , -

•Wm. J. McLean, Chief Trader, Hudson's Bay Co. . ' f

'Malcolm MoLeod, Q.O., Ex- Judge, Ottawa. A

•Stuart D. Mulkin. N.W. Territories. ' ' "^

Wm. Ogilvie, F.B.G.8., Survey Department of Canada (mentioned
elsewhere). -v. -...>•-,. -

•Prank Oliver, Editor, Edmonton, N.W. Territories.
Roger Pocook, Journalist, London (for many years in the N.W.
Territories, and Special Correspondent Lloyd's Weekly,
London, October and November, 1897).

•His Lordship Dr. Beeves, Bishop, Mackenzie Biver District.

Hon. Lindsay Bussell, Surveyor General for Canada, 1881.

Hon. John Schultz, lat^ Lieut.-Governor of Manitoba. (27th
Annual Beport of the Department of Marine and Fisheries of
Canada for 1884.

Inspector Strickland, Yukon Police Division. ic:'K~< >
A. E. Ironmonger Sola, Klondike Pioneer, and Author of
" Klondyke, Truth and Facts." London, 1897.

J. Burr Tyrrell, B.A., Geological Survey of Canada (Chesterfield
Inlet Expedition of 1893. Ottawa, 1897).

J. W. Tyrrell, C.E., D.L.S., Geological Survey of Canada (Chester-
field Inlet Expedition of 1893. Ottawa, 1897).

, H. de Windt, Explorer (Strand Magazine, London, October, 1897,
and London Times, July 23rd, 1897).

Professor N. S. Shaler, Harvard University, U.S.A. -^^-

Dr. W. H. Dael, Smithsonian Institute, Washington, U.S.A.

Professor Geo. P. Wright, Professor of Geology, Obcrlin College,
U.S.A.

Wm. Van Slooten, M.E., U.S.A.

J. Edward Spurr, Geological Survey, Washington, U.S.A.

Dr. Geo. F. Becker, Geological Survey, Washington, U.S.A.

And others, together with the many reports, publications and
newspapers mentioned along with their respective extracts.

* Gave eyldence before the Committee of the Senate, 1880, mentioned
at the beginning of this Lint.

t Also gare eridence before the 1896 Committee, and am identified
with several works quoted separately.

SI.

INDEX TO PART I.-ARGUMENT.

Introductory Chapter

What has hitherto prevented Mining developnaent

The first and following Mining developments ...

A matter of the highest importance to commercial men

The Colonizing power of gold discovery

■ ^Present wealth and future piospeota of the N.W
Territories ... ... ... ... ••• •••

The great future of the region

The question of access

The great keynote — gold

A splendid future of mineral developments

Mining Fields now being Developed

British Columbia

First discovery of gold and subsequent work

Vancouver Island ; gold and coal

iVOOvODfty ••• ••• ••■ ••• ••• •••

■''•'■ Gold output and characteristics of the country ...

'•' Other minerals

.. n. —'<':. Classification of B.C. ores

. . Government mining grants

' Mining wages

Dr. Dawson's opinion of B.C. mining prospects

Ontflrio >•• ..• ••• ••. ••• .i. ••*

Free grant lands

^ 1CK61 ••• ■•• *•• ••• ••• #•« •••

. ,, V ■,.•-,. The new value of nickel

The minerals and metals of East Ontario

Petroleum nprings and salt wells

The oldest mining district

Lake of the Woods district

Lake of the Woods gold output

A new goldfield

Northern Ali>erta

Gold on the Saskatchewan River

The Yulcon Country

Befetenoe to Part IL and Appendix

Xll.

... . , INDEX — continued.

Mining Fields awaiting Development ... ... ... 12

Important Extracts from a notable report 12

- Extent of auriferous ooantry in the N. W. Territories ... 12

Location of various mineral deposits 18

An immense petroleum area ... 18

Bich fields beyond the Klondike district ... 18

The new gold discoveries at Michipicoton 14

The Canadian Chamber of Mines, London 14

Professor Wilmott's Report on Michipicoton 14

Position of the new field 15

Boutes to the Michipicoton country .. 15

Gold-bearing country north of Lake Winnipeg 16

A New Mining Field 16

' Boutes to the field 17

Numerous quartz veins 19

Promising field for prospectors 20

Soil and climate ... 20

Extracts from Geological Notes on the North-western
Territories by Geo. M. Dawson, C.M.O., D.5., F.Q.5.,

Director of the Geological Survey of Canada 20

Slave Biver, petroleiun deposits 20

Salt springs ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 21

Great Slave Lake 22

West end of the Lake — Bitumen 22

Geological definition 22

Mackenzie River, from Great Slave Lake to Bear Lake

i\i T cr ••• ••• ••• ■•• •■• ••• ••* ••• Av

Geological formation 28

Bituminous shale 28

Liard Biver 28

Graphite and iron ore 24

Beds of lignite ... ... ... ... ... ... 24

Great Bear Lake and vicinity 25

Bitumen, alum, shale and brown coal . , 25

Limestone rocks, saturated with petroleum 25

Oftlu. ••• ••• ••• •«• ••• ••• ••• ••• MV

Mackenzie River and vicinity, below Bear Lake River ... 26

Peel Biver ... • 26

XIU.

INDEX — contimied.

PAGE.

Country between Great Slave Lake and the Mouth of

Coppermine River 26

The copper mountains .. 2^

a'' V Mode of occurrence of the copper 29

. . Country North of Copper Mountains 80

Chromic iron * ... 80

Arctic Coast, West of the Maclcenzle River 80

Continental Coast, from Maclcenzie River to Boothia

Peninsula 31

Boothian and Melville Peninsulas, and vicinity 84

Melville Peninsula 84

Northern Continental Shore East of Hudson Bay, with

Baffin Land ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 85

Copper and iron ores ... 86

Coal formations 87

Coal outcrops 88

Routes to the Yukon and Far N.W. Territories of Canada ... 89

Routes to the Yukon from the West Coast 89

•• ■^ Railways from the West Coast 40

Objections to short costly railways . 40

■'■ Railways from a dividend-paying poiui, of view 40

"^ ' ' ' Good waggon roads V. short railways 40

Travellers and Traffic v. Railway Shareholders 41

• ■ . White Pass and Stikeen routes 41

" „ The White Pass route 42

The Stikeen route 42

'"" ' ^ Ugly features of the St. Michael's Chilkoot and Taku

• • . River routes 42

The St. Michael's Route 48

' - " The Chilkoot Pass Route 48

The Taku Pass Route 43

Chief object of these pages 48

Routes and approaches from the East and South East ... 43

Overland from Edmonton 48

A bad feature in the railway question ... 44

Liard and Peace River routes 44

The Mackenzie River route 44

Route from Hudson's Bay to the Yukon 46

The Route of the future 45

Hudson's Bay 46

XIV. , V '

INDEX — continued. ,

FAOZ.

Safety of navigation in Hudson's Bay 46

Resources of the Hudson's Bay country 47

The route '.fter lea^-ing Chesterfield Inlet 47

A water«ray between the Inlet and Great Slave Lake ... 47

The Great Slave Lake section of the route 43

The Mackenzie Biver section 4d

Navigation of the Mackenzie 48

Country tapped by a Hudson's Bay route 49

The navigable area of the Mackenzie and its resources ... 49

The Peace Biver 49

Tlie Liard Biver 49

The Peel Biver 50

Serviceable tributaries of the Mackenzie ... 50

A report of great value 50

Summer route firom the Mouth of the Mackenzie to

tll6 JL UKOH ••• ••• ••• ••• ••» ••• ••• OX

Winter route from the Mouth of the Mackenzie to

the Yukon ... ... ... ... ... . > ... 51

Valuable discoveries on this route 51

The through Peel Biver route 52

Mr. Ogilvie on the through Peel Biver route to the

headwaters of the Stewart Biver 52

The Up-Porcupine route via Tatonduc Biver 62

Navigation of rivers by the Mackenzie Mouth Boute ... 58

Proximity of Yukon and Mackenzie navigable waters ... 53

Official particulars which establish important facts ... 53

Route via Behrlng 5trait and Mouth of Mackenzie ... 54

The Arctic Ocean route ; important points 54

A noteworthy extract bearing upon the navigation of

Canadian Arctic seas 55

An important adjunct; Arctic Sea Fisheries 55

. Whaling in Mackenzie Bay 65

Taking machinery, etc., to headwaters of the Peel,

Stewart, and MacmUlan Bivers 55

American whalers in Mackenzie Bay 56

An attractive opening for British enterprise 56

The Archangel of North America 57

Comparisons with Arctic seaports in Northern Europe

and Asia ... ... ... ... ... ... a., oi

The Canadian Dominion's future 67

XV.

INDEX TO PAKT II -AUTHOKITIES.

SBOnON PAOB.

1. Untold wealth of Alluvial Gold in the Country 59

The Yukon Goldfielda 60

The Elondyke Biver and District ... 64

1888 Committee's Beport and Evidence of Bishop Glut ... 67

Mr. W. Ogilvie'« 1887 Beport 67

Important and Beliftble Newspaper Bepoits, commencing at

Beport of Inspectors Constanttae and Strickland 76

The Stupendous richness of Klondyke 77

New Gold Discoveries of great richness 80

A Quartz Beef on the White Pass 61

A Stupendous Output of Gold predicted for 1898 ..v ... 81

The Great •• Bush " of 1898 82

Klondyke's Marvels, by a Yukon Pioneer 83

A Miner's Life on the Elondyke 84

A New Field in Alaska ;. ... 84

An Interview with an Alaskan Pioneer 84

Interview with a Elondyke Miner ... 87

Ontario Mining 87

The Biohest Man in the World... 88

Mr. Wm. Ogilvie on the Yukon Goldfields 88-

Value of Yukon Gold 89

2. Quartz Reefs in the Mountains and at the Headwaters of

xne riivers ... >>• ... ... ... ... ... ... 90

Wm. Ogilvie's 1896-97 Report on Quartz Beefs .,. ... 90

Inspector Constantine's Beport 91

Interview with Dr. Dawson 92

3. The Source of the Klondyke Placer Gold 93

Quartz Beefs in the Bockies towards the Mackenzie Biver ... 94

Quartz Beefs on Stewart Biver and Headwaters 94

Formation of the Yukon Goldfields 95

4. Other Minerals 97

Beports of 1888 Committee and Expei-ts, commencing page.. 97

Mineral Besources of the N. W. Territories 99

Evidence of McConnoU and Prof. Bell 99

Evidence of Anderson, the Explorer, and Dr. Dawson ... 101
Evidence of Wm. Christie and J. Burr Tyrrell ... ...102

Discoveries of Gold, Iron and Copper; Chesterfield Inlet

and Lake Athabasca

... 102

XVI.

INDEX — continued.

SECTION PA0JI

Petroleum Fields of Immense Value 103

Ironstone and Copper, West of Chesterfield ialet 103

5. Coal for Visiting Steamships, Manufactures and Mining

inuusiries ••• #•• ••• ••• •■• ••• ••* ••• ^v%

Evidence of Professor Macoun and Dr. Hurlbert 104

Evidence of Wm. Ogilvie and M. McLeod, Q.C 105

Coal near the Mouth of the Mackenzie 106

A Fore-runner of Great Coal Discoveries 106

Coal on the Yukon ... 106

6. Hydrauiio and Placer Mining 107

Report by Mr. Wm. Ogilvie 107

Gold in the Stewart Kiver (R. G. McConnell) 107

Placer Mining in the Klondyke Country i08

Prospecting with " Rocker " and Pan 112

7. Furs, Ivory, Ac lis

Evidence of Experts 113

London Sales of Hudson's Bay Company's Furs, etc. ... . 118
Large and Excepj'onally Fine Specimens of Ivory found ... 114
An Alaskan Plain strewn with Ivory Tusks 115

8. Steam Navigation from Vancouver via Behring Straits to

Mackenzie bay and tlirough to Mackenzie River 116

The only Navigable Channel ; a Safe Harbour 119

^. Whaling and Sealinf" off the Mouth of Mackenzie River;

Splendid prospects 120

Valuable Ivory Deposits 122

Whaling Statistics 123

Inspector Constantine's Bf^port on Mackenzie Bay and the
Whaling there 124

Whaling Profits and Particulars 125

Whaling in the Arctic Ocean via Mackenzie River 126

10. Navigability, <&c., of the Country's Seas, Rivers and Lakes 126

a. Distance between Mackenzie and Yukon Rivers 128

The Mackenzie River and Tributaries 128

b. The Porcupine, Rat and Bell Rivers 129

Bell and Rat Rivers, and McDougal's Pass 181

c. The Peel River 188

d. The Yukon River 184

A Trip np the Yukon 184

XVll.

INDEX — continued.

SECTION

e. The Klondike Biver

/. The Tatondiic, Porcupine and Peel Rivers

g. The Stewart River

h. MacMillan River

The Porcupine Mackenzie Route

*. The Pelly River

j. The Lewes River

h. The Liard, Francis and Dease Rivers; also Dease and

Francis Lakes...

The Liard River

; Dangers of the Liard Route

From the Liard to the Pelly

Gold on the Liard and Francis Rivers

Francis Lake ... ... ... ...

Road from Francis Lake to Pelly Banks

i. X/Case Xvive?* ... ... ... ... .*• .*

m. The Peace River

Coal on the Peace River

Distances and description of the Peace River

Agriculture on the Peace River

n. Old Stikine Route

The New Stikine Route

The Stikine Route Railway

The C.P.R. and the proposed Stikine Railway

Gold on the Stikine :

0. The Tes-lin-too (Hootalinqua) River

p. The Big Salmon River

q. The Tahl-Tan River

r. The Chilkoot (Taiya) Pass

A Railway Line from Chilcoot Inlet to Fort Selkirk ..

a. The Chilkat Pass

t. The White Pass

V. The Taiya Pass Route

w. Taku Route to Lake Teslin-too ... ..

A Significant Incident

X. Taku and Windy Arms

y. Large Rivers Flowing into Hudson's Bay

11. Distances of Chief River, Sea, Lalte and Overland Routes

Routes from Liverpool to the Yukon Goldfields

W. Ogilvie's Distances, 1896

P&OB

.. 186

.. 18G

.. 189

.. 141

.. 142

142
.. 148
.. 144
.. 144
.. 145
.. 145
.. 145
.. 146
.. 146
.. 146
.. 146
.. 148
.. 148
.. 150
.. 152
.. 162
.. 153
.. 168
.. 158
.. 154
.. 154
.. 154
.. 155
.. 155
.. 156
.. 156
.. 157
., 158
.. 158

.. 160
.. 160
161

XVUl.

INDEX — continued.

SECTION

PAOB

161
168
168

Goverument Map MeasurementB

The Upper Felly

Dawson's Distances from Fort Selkirk to Taiya Inlet

Distances from Head of Chilkoot Inlet to the Boundary Line
on the Yukon River between N. W. Territories and Alaska 165

Distances from Fort Macpherson to Fort Chipewan 166

Distances to points on Peace River from Fort Chippewyan on
Athabasca Lake ••• ... ... ... ... ... ... 168

Athabasca Landing to Great Slave Lake ... 168

Lengths of some of the Chief Lakes 169

Route from Athabasca Landing to the Peace River 169

12. Ice on Rivers and Lakes

Ice on Mackenzie and Tributaries

Ice on Great Slave Lake

Ice on the Stikine

Ice on Dease Lake

Ice on the Liard

Ice on the Peace

Ice on the Lewes

Ice on the Yukon

Ice on Lake Bennett

Ice on the Churchill River

174
174

13. Restrictions to large Foreign Joint-Stocl< Companies on

the British Yulton 172

14. Climate

Daylight in the N.W. Territories (Actual Sunlight) ..

Mean Temperature at Fort Franklin, Great Bear Lake,

Lat. 66° 12' 175

Small Snowfall on the Mackenzie 175

The Open Sea at the Mouth of the Mackenzie 176

Important Changes in the Climate 176

16. Indians and Esquimaux 177

Employment of Indians : their numbers 177

Trading with the Indians 178

16. Fish (freshwater) and Game ..:... 178

17. Corn, Vegetables and Pasturage 180

18. Difficulties of Routes from the South 182

169
169
170
170
171
171
171
171
171
172
172

XIX.

INDEX — conLinued.

SECTION

19. Sub-Apctio Winter Travelling; Reindeer, Dogs, etc.

Dog-Trains for the Yukon

Prices and Particulars of Dogs

River Travel in Winter

Reindeer Transport

River Travelling on the Yukon

20. Population of the Future

The " Rush " of '98 to alter the face of the Country...
New Comers must go fur Afield

21. Present and Prospective Routes to the Gold Fields...

St. Michael's Route

The Chilcoot Pass Route ... ... ... ... •••

The Chilcat Pass Route ... ... ... ...

The Taiya Pass Route

The White Pass Route

Behring Strait to Mouth of Mackenzie River

The Mackenzie River Route

Edmonton Route via the Mackenzie River

The Peace River Route

The Liard River Route

The Stikine River Route via Teslin Lake

The Taku River Route via Teslin Lake

Bound's Overland Route

Dalton's Overland Route

The Edmonton Routes

All Canadian Routes .. ...

The Most Likely Route from Edmonton to the Yukon

The Churchill Route from Hudson's Bay

The Old Hudson Bay Route from York Factory at the
Mouth of the Nelson, Hudson Ba^', to the Mackenzie

xtlVGr ••• ••• ••* ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• £\Jij

U. S. America v. British Routes to the Yukon Goldfields ... 203

The Chesterfield Inlet and Mackenzie River Route 205

Another Route from Mackenzie River to the Stewart
Headwaters ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 205

^22. The Chesterfield Inlet Route 20C

The shortest Route from Europe to the Yukon Country ... 207

London to Klondyke in a Fortnight 208

The Hudson's Bay to Klondyke scheme 210

Trade Routes from the East to the Yukon 212

PAGB

• • ■

180

• ••

188

• ••

188

• ••

189

• • •

189

• ••

190

at*

190

• ••

192

• • t

192

• ••

198

■ • •

108

• ••

198

• ••

198

• ••

193

• ■ «

198

• ••

198

• ••

194

• ■•

194

• ••

195

• ••

195

• ••

196

• • •

19G

• ••

19G

• • •

196

• .•

196

• • •

199

• •a

200

• ■ •

202

|23. To Chesterfield Inlet from Athabasca Lake

215

zz.

INDEX — continued.

SECTION PAGE

24. The Sub-Arctic Territory of North Canada 217

An Important Un-Mapped Biver 219

Extracts from the Explorer Anderson's Diary 220

Agriculture on the verge of the Barren Grounds 220

The Chesterfield Inlet Coimtry 221

25. Important Comparison with Northern Russia and Asia ... 228

Some Particulars of Archangel 223

Populous Towns in Sub- Arctic Europe and Asia ... ...228

The Possibilities of the Mackenzie-Yukon Country 224

26. Hudson's Bay and its Territory 225

Extent and Besources of the Territory 225

The Hudson's Bay Sea Boute ... 227

Exports and Cost of Transport 227

Hudson's Bay 227

Navigation of the Bay 228

Besources of the Hudson's Bay Territory 229

Minerals in the Hudson's Bay Territory 280

The New Importance of Hudson's Bay 231

I Agricultural Possibilities 232

Advantage in Distance of the Hudson's Bay Boute 282

A Passenger Boute of National Importance 283

No Obstructions to Navigation 234

Period of Open Navigation in the Bay and Bivers 234

Economic Advantages of this Boute to Europe 285

Becord of Wrecks in Hudson's Bay ; only one in 374 Years ... 286
Important Evidence of the Bay's Navigation 286

27. Dangers of the Chilltat, Taiya, Chiil^oot and White Passes... 287

ao. uenerai ... ... ... ... ... ... ..

A Yukon Outfit

Joe Ladue's Food Outfit for Twelve Months

Klondyke Market Prices, July, 1897

Another Table of Prices

A Light-Weight Outfit

A 12 Months' Outfit

Fares and Time from Liverpool to the Klondyke

How a Miner " Pegs-Out " on the Yukon

The British Columbia Boimdary question

Hints to the Mining Novice

Condensed Foods for the Far N. W. Territories

The Table of a Year's Food

The Klondyke Food Pack

Termination of the Hudson Bay Company's Charter
Appoudix ••• «•• ••• ••• ••• •*• ••

242
248
244

244
245
246
246
247
248
248
252
254
257
258
258
239

THE

ROUTES AND MINERAL RESOURCES

N. W. CANADA.

PART I.— ARGUMENT.

Until a few months ago the Canadian Dominion was

chiefly known, written about, and lectured upon as a

country of great and promising agricultural capacity,

excepting that portion west of the Eockies known as the

province of British Columbia, which enjoys such world- ]

wide repute as a country of well-nigh illimitable resource

in its mining, agricultural, pastoral, timber, and fishing

industries, as to need little more than passing reference

ia these pages.

Well-informed people, however, had kept themselves
posted up in the reports of the Dominion's ably con-
ducted Geological Survey, and were aware of the
boundless stores of mineral wealth, only awaiting man's
enterprise and ingenuity to locate it and his energy to
unearth it.

There were, however, many circumstances which hithertourc-
pre vented mineral exploitation, but the most potent development^
hindrances were the inaccessible character of the country
and the want of a prospecting community. Means of
access would soon have been forthcoming had a pressing
demand arisen, but this could only be provided by popu-
lation. The steady growth of an agricultural people
could not supply this want, it required the colonizing
influence of gold discoveries.

The majority of mining men are rovers ; here to-day,
Australia to-morrow — so to speak — and South Africa the
next day. Had it not been for the gold-mining attractions

The first and
following
mining
developments.

A matter of
tho highest
impoirtance to
commercial
men.

of the last-mentionud countries, follovvinj,' those of
California fifty years ago, this roving hand of adventurous
men would long ago have turned their attention to this
most promising land, and hrought it well on to the high
road of mineral development, instead of it being as it is
to-day merely in the groping stage.

On the decline of the Californian diggings tlie miners
gradually scattered and many found their way into
Canada, chiefly along the Columbia and Fraser Eivers,
and in the late fifties tho placer mines of Cariboo
became known. These were followed by the Cassiar
"rush," and ultimately led to the discovery of magni-
ficent gold-bearing quartz in Kootenay, where a large
amount of British capital has been invested during the
last two years.

As the Cassiar placers were worked out miners
drifted further west and north, prospecting on the Dease
and Liard Eivers, and along the Lewes into the Yukon
district. Others sought the snow-bound regions of
Alaska, ultimately finding their way on to the gold-
bearing tributaries of the Yukon Eiver. The wonderful
discoveries on the Klondyke creeks of 1896, and last
year, *97, are the result, and are believed by the highly
qualified ofiicers of the Canadian Geological Survey and
other experts, to be the very probable forerunner of
greater and richer discoveries in that immense gold-
bearing region between the Yukon and Mackenzie Eivers
which Dr. Dawson describes as occupying a total
approximate area of 192,000 square miles. (See Section 1.
Part II.)

The prominence which this vast region will occupy
amongst the gold-bearing countries of the world, and the
important position it will take in the eyes of the world's
commercial centres, may be gauged by the facts that the
above-mentioned area is nearly equal that of France, and
greater than the United Kingdom by 71,000 square
miles, and that almost all supplies must be imported, as
the soil and climate are unsuited for any appreciable
agricultural production.

A considerablo proportion of the North-Western p,|'®o°°K*jS'^
Territories of Canada may be unquestionably termed tiisoovery.
sub-arctic, but in this hitherto shunned region there is
ever}' reason to believe the proud and promising Dominion
will find its greatest source of wealth. But what cares
the gold- seeker for snow-swept plains and ica-locked
streams ? These obstacles may throw him back beaten
and bruised to-day, but the sesame " gold " brings him
back undaunted on the morrow and passes him through.
Countless numbers follow on his track and the history of
a new country, possibly a nation, begins. The story of
California, Australia, and South Africa is again repeated.
Such is the colonising power of gold discovery.

The permanency of this new field will depend upon present wealth
the existence and value of quartz reefs which all experts prospectTof
declai-e must exist to great extent in close proximicy. It toriea". *
is reasonable to believe that the value of these reefs will
be in proportion to that of the adjacent placers, t!i3
extraordinary richness of which is vouched for by the
highest authority on the district — Mr. William Ogilvie,
who has repeatedly declared that out of two Klondyke
creeks alone — the Bonanza and the El Dorado —
£15,000,000 worth of gold will be taken, and that Canada -
has in the Yukon district 100,000 square miles over the
whole of which rich prospects have been found. But
Mr. Ogilvie also reports having tested quartz reefs in the
neighbourhood which yielded gold at the rate of 1,000
dollars worth to the ton. Inspector Constantino, chief
of the police during 1896 also reports the country being
full of quartz ledges more or less valuable, and that the
befct paying streams are those which, rising in the Eocky
Mountains, run into the Yukon from the East. "When
to these official statements is added that of Dr. G. M.
Dawson, the chief of the Geological Survey of Canada —
"the entire range of the Eocky Mountains extending to
the Arctic regions is rich in minerals," and referring to
the rich Klondyke placers — *' where such large deposits
of heavy placer gold have been found there must have
been at some time large quantities of gold in quartz at no

The great
f utnre of the
regioa.

The questica
of access.

The great key
note— geld.

very great distance and these quartz veins still exist,"
(see Section 2. Part II.), one's eyes are opened to a
long and widening vista of future possibilities for the
North-West Territories.

It must, consequently, be taken for granted that the
Western side of these sub-Arctic mountains — on the
tributaries and at the headwaters of the Lewes, Yukon,
Pelly, Macmillan, Stewart, Peel, Porcupine and other
rivers — will be the scene of great activity in years to
come, when the glens and mountain passes of this wild
region will resound with the whirr and thud of mining
machinery and the strident march of civilisation.

It is quite reasonable to suppose that the Eastern
side of these far Northern ranges may also be found
equally rich as is the case further South in the neigh-
bourhood of the Liard and other aujacent rivers, and
still further South in the States. And in the pursuit of the
yellow metal are there not in this region vast stores of
other concomitant products such as coal and iron which
may open up such a field of industry in this far North-
West Territory as not even the most sanguine has
dared to forecast ?

The question of access, as has already been pointed
out, has been one of the obstacles to mineral exploitation
of North- West Canada in the past. But the solution of
this matter only awaited the striking of a note in a
certain key and all difficulties surrounding the question
became mere details to be summarily swept aside
before The Great Purpose. This key note was struck
in California fifty years ago when similar difficulties
were dealt with as drift before a cyclone. One of these
difficulties was a 2,000 mile waggon journey through
an unknown country that was not only heartbreaking in
its trials, but was infested with robbers and hostile
Indians who ravaged, murdered and despoiled in a
manner sufficient to terrify the most courageous, ex-
cepting those lured by the keynote — gold. "

This keynote was next struck in Australia, and
18,000 miles of what was then considered a desperate and

perilous voyage was undertaken by scores of thousands
without a moment's hesitation. New Zealand, Mexico,
Columbia, South Africa, West AustraUa — all countries
where trials had to be endured — each struck this irresis-
tible keynote, and a new era of prosperous development
set in for each. Great cities arose, costly railways were
built, manufactories were established and splendid
fortunes were made ; the countries were developed. The
richer and more permanent the fields the greater the
development, and the more magnificent the cities and
industries.

"With these examples before us there is every reason a spicnaia
to anticipate a splendid future of mineral development inincrai
for the Canadian North- West Territories, now that the
magical keynote has been struck in the Yukon, and with
this a development of trade, manufacturing and agricul-
tural production which will not only bring wealth to the
Dominion, but will give this great British possession a
position in the world which will qualify it to play no
unimportant part in those questions which concern the
world's welfare.

(levclopmeiit.

Mining Fields now being Developed.

Before dealing with the important question of means
of access to the Yukon and other far distant portions of
the North- West Territories, a brief reference might be
made to the mining fields of the Dominion now being
worked, and those that might be termed prospective.

British Columbia.

(See, also, Appendix).

Gold was first discovered in this province early in First discovery
the fifties, following the great Californian rush of 1849. subfiwt
At first, and for many years, it was nearly all placer or
alluvial mining in valleys on the banks of rivers or along
old creek beds. Splendid returns were made on many
occasions and there were several " rushes " to different
parts of the country. In the year 1863 gold to the value

work.

Vanconver
Island; gold
and coal.

Eootenay.

of £800,000 was taken out of British Columbia placers,
but from about that time returns declined until in 1893
the annual output was valued at only about £70,000.
About 1890, however, quartz mining, under modern
methods, v^as introduced and a new era in the industry
set in for the province. The Cassiar and Cariboo fields
have not yet been exploited for quartz and are still being
successfully worked for placer gold.*

It is said that from the time the traveller enters
British Columbia through Hell's-gate Pass till he reaches
salt water, or the extreme west of Vancouver Island, he
cannot get away from minerals. At Alberni and Barclay
on this island miners claim to have had assays running
£2 to the ton, while the placers on China Creek are said
to be miniature El Dorados. Gold mining on Vancouver
Island is not done on a very extensive scale, though
prospects appear promising enough, but the coal mines
are big enough to supply the world. Since these mines
were first worked in 1836 they have yielded 11,000,000
tons, woi'th £6,600,000. For the last six years the output
has represented £400,000 per year.

It is on the mainland, however, in the Trail district,
the Slocan, East Kootenay, Boundary Creek, Harrison
Lake, Cariboo and Cassiar, that the great mineral
development, in gold mining chiefly, is looked for.

The great gold-producing district of British Columbia
is the Kootenay, which is by far the most important
mining sub-division of the province. Its richest part
is that known as Trail Creek on either side of the
Columbia Eiver. Its chief centre is Eossland, a town
with a population of 5,000.

This district is by no means a new one. It was
first discovered in 1824 by H. B. Coy voyageurs and
further exploited by miners travelling into Canada from
California along the Colimibia river. A "rush" to the
district took place in the early sixties, but the difficulties of
mining the low grade surface ores in the district, the want
of means of communication and gold rushes elsewhere

(*Se0 Apj^endix—" Another ^ew Gold Field in British Columbia.")

drove (or drew) the miners away, and it was not until the
last six or seven years that systematic efforts were made to
open up the fields. The results have been most encouraging.
In 1896 £773,000 worth of gold and silver was
produced in the Kootenay and last year (1897) it is
expected there will be a large Increase ; £2,000,000
worth of gold being the estimate, though five years ago
the lode-gold production was practically nil. :

British Columbia's record in gold production up to a,fd^oharacter-
date is the very respectable total of nearly £12,000,000, ^^o*^\g*^®
while the total value of the output of mineral wealth is
set down at £20,000,000. This is not brilliant compared
with some of the Australasian colonies, but it must be
remembered that gold mining in British Columbia has
scarcely passed beyond the surface-scratching stage.
As showing, however, the rapidity with which develop-
ments are taki'.g place it is recorded that in 1896 upwards
of 112,000 mineral claims were staked out, 8,000 of these
being in West Kootenay. Another point to be borne
in mind is that there is scarcely a square mile of the
province that is not in sight of gold-bearing country.

Mining in British Columbia is not altogether confined other minerals
to gold. Various minerals are worked, the chief of which
are ^ilvor, lead, iron, cinnabar, and copper. Coal is also
found in several localities, especially on Vancouver Island
and in the south-east, in the vicinity of the Crow's Pass. j
Here 20 outcropping seams were recently discovered,
having a total thickness of from 132 to 448 feet. Just
outside the border on the Canadian Pacific Eailway lino
and on Queen Charlotte Islands large seams have been
found. On these islands, also, there are very rich
undeveloped anthracite fields.

The Standard of August 28th gives the following ciassmcatiou
classification of British Columbia ores : — (a) Coarse- Columbia ores,
grained pyrrhoUte, or " iron ore," containing very little
gold ; (6) ore containing iron pyrites, arseno-pyrites, and
other compounds, in which the silver value exceeds the
gold ; (c) typical ore of the principal mining camps,
divided into two classes, the first of which yields on an

Government
mining grants.

Mining wages
in British
Colnmbia.

Dr. Dawson'a
opinion of
British
Columbia
prospects.

Free Graut
LandH.

average 2-6 oz. of gold, 1'8 oz. of silver, and 2-5 per cent,
of copper to the ton, and the second about half the
quantity of each. According to the mining regulations,
a Crown grant is given on completion of £100 worth of
work, while a claim held as a location requires that its
owners each have a free miner's license and do £20
worth of work per annum, or pay £20 into the provincial
treasury. Wages run from 12s, to 20s. a day for shifts
of eight to ten hours.

Dr. Dawson, the recognised and greatest authority
on mineralogy in Canada, states — " Everything that
has been ascertained of the geological character of the
province, as a whole, tends to the belief that, as soon as
means of travel and transport shall be extended to what
are still the most inaccessible districts, they also will be
discovered to be equally rich in minerals, particularly in
precious metals — gold and silver.

Ontario.

{See, also, Aiypendix.)
This province bears the reputation of being the most
beautiful and healthful in America, if not in the world.
It may also truthfully be said to have the most fei'tile
soil, the richest area of mineral country, and the most
liberal land laws.

Its immense area of 222,000 square miles only con-
tains a population 2,114,000, thus providing wide scope
for the industrious immigrant. A word or two for the
intending emigrant bent on agriculture.

Any head of a family, whether male or sole female,
having children under 18 years of age, can obtain a grant
of 200 acres ; and a single man over 18 years of age, or
a married man having no children under 18 residing
with him, can obtain a grant of 100 acres.

Such a person may also purchase an additional 100
acres at 50 cents (28. Id.) per acre, cash.

This province is known to be extremely rich in
minerals throughout its entire extent, which, however,
is practically unexplored ; but enough is known to prove

that the disti-icts north of Lakes Huron and Superior
are enormously rich in gold, iron, silver, copper, nickel
and other minerals.

The nickel deposits ai'e practically of illimitable extent Nickel,
and enormous value. They are situated at Sudbury,
near the north shore of Lake Huron. Their importance,
which was first recognised six or seven years ago, has of^fj"®^!^*^"®
been much enhanced by the recent decision of the
Admiralty to use nickel-steel armour plating for our new
ships of war, as only one other large deposit of the
metal is known to exist — namely, in the French Colony
of New Caledonia, where it is much less accessible than
at Sudbury. The nickel occurs in association with
copper, in the form of pyrrhotite, and it was for copper
that the mines were originally worked. The presence
of nickel was only discovered through metallurgical
difficulties in treating the copper ; but since 1890 the
mines have been worked for both by a Copper Company,
a concern consisting chiefly of American capital. The
ore contains from 2 to 3 per cent, of nickel, and the
deposits have been proved to be very extensive. The
deepest shaft occurs in what is known as the " Copper
Cliff Mine; " it has been sunk to the eleventh level — say
about 700 feet — and the ore shows no sign of giving in.
Other nickel companies have now been formed for ex-
tending the industry, and Canada looks forward with
good reason to developing it into a leading source of
wealth.

In eastern Ontario there have been considerable Ooid, galena,

finds of gold, galena and mica, while the quarrying of anTiii^biefn

apatite, or phosphate of lime, and marble of excellent ^' ^"**'*°"
quality, are both profitable industries.

In the southern district, near Lake Huron, are the Petroleum
famous oil springs, from which petroleum is obtained IStw^ii^"^
in immense quantities. In 1896 the value of the crude
petroleum Vv-as valued at 1,155,616 dollars, and of natural
gas 276,301 dollars. Further to the north, in the same
district, are prolific salt wells, which send forth an
abundant supply of brine ; the salt obtained from which

The oldest
Mining Libtrict
in Ontario.

The Lake of
the Woods
Districts.

The Lake of
thoWoodsGold
Output lias
already trcV>]ed
the total Out-
put of Onto I io.

forms a large item in the commerce of the place ; and
north of Lake Superior, in the Thunder Bay district,
rich ores of silver are found ; while eastward, on the
Grand Eivcr, there are extensive mines of gypsum, or
Plaster of Paris. There are also considerable areas of
peat beds in sever il parts of the province.

The oldest mining district is at Hastings, near the
eastern border of the province. Gold was first found
here in 1866, when the discovery caused considerable
excitement for a time. The ore, however, proved re-
fractory to the processes of that day, and very little gold
was produced ; but within the last year or two a marked
revival has taken place ; there has been a large expendi-
ture on modern plant at several mines in the distiict,
and the prospects are improving. It is at the other end
of the province, however, near the Lake of the Woods
and the Eainy Eiver that most activity prevails. Here
an immense and richly auriferous region has been
opened up quite recently. The area is 250 miles long,
and about half as broad. Gold occurs only in quartz
veins, but unlike the Hastings ore, it is nearly all free
milling. Dr. Coleman, the expert of the Bureau of
Mines at Toronto, has just returned (August, 1837) from
an oPi'icial inspection of the gold fields, and rcporluj very
favourably upon them. The whole thing is still in its
infancy ; the oldest mine has only been worked for three
years, new ones are being started almost from month to
month, and further prospecting is still being carried on
under a Government concession. But already the
results have trebled the gold output of Ontario, and
Dr. Coleman expects a large and rapid increase.
*' There is every prospect," he says, " that a number of
mines will be producing gold in 1897, and that the total
will rapidly increase. The area of the auriferous
country is so enormous, and the ores as a whole so
easily treated, that within a few years a very large
output may be expected." In addition to these two
principal gold fields at opposite ends of the province,
mines are now being worked at various intervening
points near the shore of Lake Superior and at Lake
Wahuapitae.

Perhaps the most important of the many mining fle?d^^°^^'
discoveries made in Ontai'io was that recently made on
the Michipicoten River, near lake Wawa. Mr. Blue,
Director of the Ontario Bureau of Mines, returned in
October, 1897, from inspecting this new find, and
reports the discovery of a vein of quartz then yielding
600 dollars of gold to the ton. (This new field is referred
to at greater length further on, under the heading of
" Mining Fields Awaiting Development.") In short,
great activity prevails throughout Ontario.

Northern Alberta.

This section of the North- Wt^'t Territories of
Canada is the only remaining portion, excepting the
British Yukon, in which gold mining is carried on.
For some years past, since 1863, an average of about
60,000 dollars worth of gold has been washed out of the
bars and banks of the Saskatchewan River. In the
early days 10 to 15 dollars par day was the average
earnings of the miner, but the return now averages very
little over 1^ dollars per day.

New interest has been lately aroused in the possi-
bilities of this industiy, from the fact that soma
Americans, who made tests in 1896, found that only
about ten per cent, of the gold was saved by the hand
" grizzlies " used by the miners.

For many years placer mining has been carried on Gold onitho
along the big Saskatchewan River, chiefly on the north Kiver.
branch, about 200 miles north of Calgary, where fair
wages are now being made every summer; the same
bars being worked year after year and never becoming
exhausted. Last year (1896), says the Calgary Herald of
September 16th: "A small boom was started by dis-
coveries of high gold values in the black sand with Vv'hich
the river abounds. Some 30 mining scows are now at
work taking out the black sand, but for want of sm3lting
facilities and improved methods, little is yet known of the

real value of the diggings There is gold on

the bars of the south branch of the Saskatchewan, as
well as on the north branch, and of the two rivers ; old

placer miners, who have worked on both, give the south
branch the preference. On some of the bars, near the
Hat Eiver, plenty of gold is being taken out. ....
On the famous Livingstone bar there is, this summer
(1897), a gold camp, where we found miners who were
perfectly satisfied with their lot, one making splendid

wages.

The Yukon Country.

Partn ana Under this heading the astounding gold discoveries

^e??m!d to**^ ^° °^ *^® Klondyke tributaries, the Stewart, Indian and
other rivers tributary to the Yukon, as well as further
south on the Lewes, Pelly, Hootalinqua and Big Salmon
rivers, are all fully dealt with in Part IT., under Sections
1, 2 and 10, and throughout the Appendix.

Important
extracts from a
notable report.

Kstent of
auriferous
country in Iho
far N.W.

Mining Fields Awaiting Development.

{See, also, Appciulix — ^^ Another Ncio Gold Field in
British Columbia.")

As Canada's great development, which the world is
looking forward to in high, and in some cases jealous,
expectation, will be the direct outcome of vigorous and
systematic mineral exploitation, a short review of those
richly mineralised fields — many of which, though now
wild forest or desolate waste, will probably be Canada's
busiest and most populous centres — should prove inter-
esting, and, perhaps, helpful to many who contemplate
sharing in the operations which are to bring about this
magnificent expansion of wealth and industry.

Before proceeding with the very cursory survey of
the Dominion's Mining Areas, which only await man's
enterprise and skill to yield up their riches, an important
extract from the report of the Select Committee of the
Senate (Canadian Dominion), appointed to enquire into
the resources of the Great Mackenzie Basin, in 1888,
might be quoted : —

" Of the mines of this vast region little is known of
that part east of the Mackenzie Biver and north of Great
Slave Lake. Of the western effluents of the Mackenzie

enough is known to show that on the headwaters of the
Peace, Liard and Peel Eiverg, there are from 150,000 to
200,000 square miles which may be considered auriferous,
while Canada possesses, west of the Eocky Mountains,
a metalliferous area principally of good yielding rocks,
1,300 miles in length, with an average breadth of 400 to
500 miles, giving an area far greater than that of the
similar mining districts of the neighbouring Republic.

" In addition to these auriferous deposits, gold has ^^^1*"°" °'
been found on the west shore of Hudson's Bay, and "ii»erai

•' ' deposits.

has been said to exist in certain portions of the barren
grounds. Silver on the Upper Liard and Peace Rivers,
copper upon the Coppermine River, which may be con-
nected with on Eastern Arm of Great Bear Lake by a
tramway of 40 miles, iron, graphite, ochre, brick and
pottery clay, mica, gypsum, lime and sandstone, sand
for glass and moulding, and asphaltum, are all known to
exist ; while the petroleum area is so extensive as to An immenso
justify the belief that eventually it will supply the larger ^^ '^eumarea.
part of this continent, and be shipped from Churchill,
or some more northern Hudson's Bay port, to England.

" Salt and sulphur deposits are less extensive, but
the former is found in crystals, equal in purity to the
best rock salt, and in highly saline springs ; while the
latter is found in the form of pyrites, and the fact that
these petroleum and salt deposits occur mainly near the
line of division between deep water navigation and that
fitted for lighter craft, give them a possible great com-
mercial value. The extensive coal and lignite deposits
of the Lower Mackenzie and elsewhere, will be found to
be of great value when the question of reducing its iron
ores, and the transportation of the products of this vast
region, have to be solved by steam sea-going or lighter '
river craft."

No important mention is made in the above extracts of K'*^*^ ^/l?^

\ , bejond the

the regal mmeral which is now creating such a sensation Kiondyke

. . district.

in the Yukon-Mackenzie country, particularly on the
tributaries of the Kiondyke River. But the above report
was handed in years before the marvellous goldfinds of

The new roUI
discoveries at
MicbipkotoD.

The Canadian
Chambei' of
Mines, London

ProfeMor

Willmotfa
Report.

the Bonanza and El Dorado Creeks came to light. The
country between the Yukon and Mackenzie Rivers,
described by both Dr. Dawson and Mr. Wm. Ogilvie,
covering an area of 150,000 square miles of auriferous
country, comprises the largest and most attractive — be-
cause of its fascinating possibilities as evidenced by the
Klondike goldfinds — fields for the gold prospector in the
Canadian Dominion — or, perhaps, in the world. This
region is dealt with at some length in Sections 1 and 2,
Part- II.

The Montreal correspondent of the Standard
(London), of November 12th, 1807, writes that " The
excitement caused by the gold discoveries in the Yukon
country has led to reports of new Klondykes all over this
Continent, most of them with very little foundation.
But in the case of Michipicoton, in Ontario, official
investigation has established the genuineness of the gold
deposits, and given some indication of their probable
extent. Mr. Archibald Blue, Director of the Bureau of
Mines established by the Ontario Government, visited
the new gold fields some weeks ago, but he was not able
to do more than establish a registration office, to prevent
disputes between the prospectors already rushing into
the country. He saw enough, however, to warrant him
in sending Professor Arthur B. Willmott, M.A., B.Sc,
to make a further investigation of the district. Professor
Willmott visited Michipicoton in September, and on his
return prepared a preliminary report, which has been
issued by the Ontario Government as a bulletin of the
Bureau of Mines."

This report runs into many pages, and anyone pro-
posing to visit this promising field should read the whole
publication at the offices of the Canadian Chamber of
Mines, 165, Fenchurch Street, London, or at the High
Commissioner's Office, Westminster.

Professor Willmott sums up as follows : — " From all
that I can learn from prospectors, from the number of
finds of free gold, from the quantity of quartz pebbles in
the lower parts of the streams, and from the great re-

semblance of the country rocks to the Lake of the Woods
region, I think there is every reason to believe that the
Division will well repay careful prospecting, and that in
a few years gold mining will hero be established on as
profitable a basis as in other parts of Ontario."

This field has an advantage over almost all other Position of tbe

« T 11,. 1 1 1 111' • • • T li Michlpicoton

Canadian goldliclds that should bring it into rapid favour field.
— if its prospects are good enough, it is easy of access, it
is situated on the North-East shore of Lake Superior,
between the Lake and the Canadian Pacific Eaihvay,
and may be reached from either. The lake route h pro-
bal)ly the easiest, and was chosen by ^Ir. Blue for his
hurried visit. Michlpicoton is about seventy-five miles
directly North from Sault Ste. Marie by steamer, which
lands passengers about two miles from the mouth
of the river. There is an Indian reserve in the bay, so
that it is not difficult to obtain canoes for the rest of the
journey.

Professor Willmott, having more time at his dis- Routes to the
posal, took the inland route, travelled by the Canadian
Pacific Eailway to Missanabie, and thence with two
Indian guides by canoe. Missanabie is forty-six miles
in a straight line from Lake Superior ; but the prospector
follows a circuitous route, in order to take advantage of
the lakes and streams. There are two routes from
Missanabie, both starting* in a South- Westward direction
through Dog and Manitowick Lakes. Thence one
follows the Michlpicoton Eiver round one-third of a
circle to its outlet, a probable distance of sixty-five miles.
There are on this route six portages, all well travelled,
but some of them very rough. The Big Stony portage
is five-sixths of a mile long, and the Long portage one
mile and two-thirds. The others are short. Below tbo
Long portage the river winds about in a gravel plain for
nearly ten miles, with considerable current, making it
necessary to " pole " in many places when ascending.
For this reason, and because of its shortness, the route
which diverges from the lower end of Manitowick is
usually taken. This ascends a small stream in a South-

flcld.

Gold-beaiinfi
country North
of Lake
WiDDlpeR.

western direction, passes through a number of small
lakes, over the height of land and down Wawa Lake to
its South-Wc3t end. Thenco an old Canadian Pacific
construction road may bo taken to Michipicoton, a
distance of seven miles, or a portage of two miles to the
Magpie River, and a further portage of a quarter of a
mile at the mouth of this stream. At present two teams
are transporting goods across the " tote-road to Wawa
at exhorbitant rates. This route from Missanahie is
very direct — little over fifty miles — and can bo made in
two days by two men travelling in a light canoe. The
portages are numerous but good, except the Big Stony
one. At the time of the construction of the Canadian
Pacific Railway roads were built by the contractors for
the purpose of getting in supplies. Though these roads
are now overgrown with small brush and the bridges
across the creeks have decayed, they afford to the pros-
pector a comparatively easy entrance to the interior.

The following extract from the Summary Report of
the Geological Survey Department for 1896 describes
an exploratory work by Mr. J. B. Tyn'ell, of the Canadian
Geological Survey made last year in the country lying
along the Grass River to the North of Lake Winnipeg.
Grass River is a tributary of Nelson River which flows
into Hudson's Bay : —

A New Field for Mining Enterprise North of
Lake Winnipeg.

Report of a Survey by J. W. TYRRELL, B.A., of the Geological
Survey Department of Canada.

" On the 29th of June (1896), I left Selkirk, Manitoba,
accompanied by two canoemen who had been with me
through two previous seasons, and the following day
reached Selkirk Island, near the mouth of the Saskat-
chewan River. On the morning of the 1st of July we
were taken by a small fishing tug northward to Limestone
Bay, and thence we proceeded by canoe along the north
shore of Lake Winnipeg and through Playgreen Lake to
Norway House.

" Hero two Indians and an extra canoe were hired, ^f^^^^^^.
and we turned westward into the country lying to the "^y^-
west of Nelson River, exploring Goose-gut, Pine and
Wolf Bivers ; returning from the latter stream to Nor-
way House, where the two Indians were paid off.

'• We then descended Nelson Rivor to Cross Lake,
where two other Indians were hired, and the descent of
the Nelson Rivor was continued to the north end of
Sopaywisk Lake, whence we crossed several portages
and small Lakes until we reached Burntwood River, .
which was ascended to Nelson House, where the Cross
Lake Indians were paid off and allowed to return
home. With one canoe, and the two men from Selkirk,
I returned to Paint Lake, and then ascended Grass
River, through Setting, Herb and Reed Lakes to its
source in Cranberry Lake. From the south end of
Cranberry Lake, we crossed the Cranberry Portage to
Athapapuskow Lake, and thence descended Goose River,
through Goose Lake, to Sturgeon River, which was
descended to Cumberland on the Saskatchewan River.

•' From Cumberland we ascended the Saskatchewan
River to Fort h la Come, where the canoe was
stored for the winter, and we drove to Prince Albert,
arriving there on the evening of the 9th of October
three months and eleven days after leaving Selkirk,
having travelled in all about 1,100 miles, largely over
routes previously unexplored.

" From Lake Winnipeg and the Saskatchewan River, Northern
the horizontal Palaeozoic limestone was found to extend PaUeozoio
northward to the south end of Hills Lake, on Pine River, ^^'"^«*°°«
and Herb Lake, on Grass River. Thence, the northern
limit of the limestone extends westward, keeping to the
south side of Grass River, and generally forming an
escarpment from fifty to one hundred feet high. Goose
and Athapapuskow Lakes lie in a deep bay in the face of
this escarpment. West of the latter lake the northern
edge of the limestone is known to extend along the south-
west side of Beaver Lake, and thence onward towards
Lac la Ronge south of Churchill River.

Lanrentian
and Haronian
rooks.

Largest Ha-
ronian area.

"North oi' the limestone escarpment, the country is
underlain by Archaean rocks, which have usually a
gently undulating surface contour. From the Nelson
Eiver westward as far as longitude 99° 30'' they consist
chiefly of gray and reddish-gray Laurentian gneisses and
granites. Along the Nelson River these are cut by
numerous dykes of dark-greon, highly basic traps, and in
the vicinity of Pipestone and Crosrt Lakes they are
associated with an area of micaceous, hornblendic and
sericitic schists, stretched schistose conglomerates and
fine-grained slates of Huronian age.

" On the South side of this area, and near the edge
of the gneiss, is an eruptive mass of light greenish-gray
anorthosite, and a gabbro containing a large quantity of
mispickel, associated with some copper-pyrites.

" On the South side of the Indian Reserve Island in
Cross Lake, the hornblende-schists are cut by wide veins
of coarse, white, pegmatitic granite, containing large
crystals of black and white mica, some of the latter being
nine inches in f^iameter, and very possibly indicating
deposits of commercial value. On account of the evenly
rounded natu'-'=t of the surface, and the want of blasting
materials, n ^ne ot the larger crystals could be taken out,
but some of t.c smaller fragments obtained were clean
and unbroken.

" Thinly foliated green schists, probably of Huronian
age, were again found on another Pipestone Lake, on the
way from Cross Portage to Burntwood River.

"But the most extensive and interesting area of
Huronian rocks was discovered on the upper part of
Grass River. Beginning a short distance east of Herb
Lake it extends almost continuously westward through
Reed, Elbow and Cranberry Lakes, and crossing to the
drainage basin of the Saskatchewan River, underlies parts
of Athapapuskow and Goose Lakes.

" Seven miles east of the north end of Herb Lake,
the Huronian rocks are first encountered, in a hill of
massive or slightly foliated diabase largely altered to

chlorite, and a short distance further west is a ridge of
dark-gray micaceous schist studded with rather large
crystals of staurolite. On the east side of Herb Lake is
a ridge of thinly foliated light-grey micaceous gneiss,
containing a good deal of white mica, and cut by many
veins of white quartz.

** On the west side of the same lake, and extending
south to Wekusko Point, is an eruptive mass of coarse
gabbro, approaching a diabase in texture. South of this
is a considerable area of dark-green, slaty schists. On
the south-west side of the lake these are cut by another
large eruptive mass of a finer grained and more typical
gabbro. The schists are also disturbed and altered by a
large mass of red granite.

" Almost everywhere the schists are cut by larger Numerons
and smaller veins of white quartz. The river above Herb ^
Iiake runs for a considerable distance along the line of
contact of red granite on the west, and Huronian schists
and conglomerates on the east, above which it crosses an
area of coarse, dark-grey gabbro, returning, near the
entrance into Eeed Lake, to the red granite. Near the
contact are many quartz veins, associated with a good
deal of iron-pyrites.

" On Eeed Lake, the Huronian rocks consist chiefly
of fine-grained, green slaty schists, holding much pyrites,
and cut by many stringers of quartz.

" Above Eeed Lake the country becomes more rugged Rocks of Reed
and the hills more precipitous. The river circles round Lakes,
an area of basic igneous rocks, as far as Cranberry Lake,
often occupying a valley along the line of contact of these .;.

rocks with the surrounding granite or gneiss. Near the
contact, the rocks have been much disturbed and are cut
by many veins of quartz, often containing a large
quantity of pyrite.

" On Cranberry Lake the Huronian rocks are of ion
altered to a silvery sericitic scaist. The same schists
extend across the water-shed to Athapapuskow Lake, and
thence continue westward, perhaps beneath the un-
distm'bed Palaeozoic limestones.

Promising
field for pro8«
pectors.

Baperfloial
deposits.

Holland
climate.

*' This area of Huronian rocks, extending about
seventy-five miles from east to west, and an unknown
distance towards the north, presents a good field of
exploration for the prospector for gold and other precious
metals, on account of the number and variety of eruptive
masses that break through it, surrounded by zones of
highly disturbed and fissured rocks.

" From Nelson Eiver westward to longitude lOO*'
30', and from the north end of Lake Winnipeg northward
to beyond latitude 56°, the country is generally covered
with a coating of stratified clay, varying in thickness
from a few feet up to fifty, sixty, or even one hundred
feet. This clay is of much the same character as that of
the Eed Eiver valley, having been, like it, deposited in
the bed of the old post-glacial lake that once occupied
the basin of Lake "Winnipeg. The rivers have, as a rule,
out down through this clay to the underlying rock, but
away from the water-stretches, rock-exposures are not of
very frequent occurrence. The soil is rich and fertile, and
since summer frosts do not seem to be very prevalent,
the country will doubtless produce in abundance all the
hardier roots and cereals grown in the province of
Manitoba, and cattle, sheep and horses could be success-
fully raised. If the country were made accessible by a
railway passing through it to Hudson Bay, it would
certainly support a considerable agricultural popu-
lation."

Mr. Tyrrell returned to Ottawa on October 16th.

Fetroloum
deposits.

Extracts from aeological Notes on the North-Western
Territories by QEORQE M. DAWSON, C.M.G.,
D.5., F.a.5., Director of the Qeological Survey
of Canada.

Slave River.

The district to the south of Athabasca Lake, on the
Athabasca Eiver and its tributary the Clearwater, (not
included by the accompanying map), and also on Peace

Eiver, is characterized by a great abundance of pitch and
petroleum deposits and springs. These are described by
Su- A. Mackenzie, Sir J. Eichardson, Prof. Macoun, Dr.
Bell and others {Cf. Eeports of Progress Geological
Survey, 1875-6, p. 169, 1882-84, p. 32, c c). It is inte-
resting to observe the recurrence of such deposits at
intervals along the Mackenzie valley to the Arctic Sea.

At the " Lightening Place of the Hummock " on Slave
Eiver, thirty miles below Fcrt Chipewyan, the limestone "
beds were noted by Eichardson to contain mineral pitch ,
in fissures (J. B. V., vol. 1, p. 137.)*

About half-way between Athabasca and Great Slave Saitspringi.
lakes. Salt Eiver joins the Slave Eiver. Of this stream,
Eichardson write —"The Salt Eiver flows in from the -
westward, a short >?ay below the portages. We ascended
it for twenty-two miles, including its windings, but not
above half that distance in a straight line, for the purpose
of visiting the salt springs from whence it derives its
taste and name. Seven or eight copious saline springs
issue from the base of a long even ridge about six
hundred feet high, and spreading their waters over an
extensive clayey plain, deposit a considerable quantity
of very pure common salt in large cubical crystals. The
mother water flowing into the Salt Eiver gives it a very
bitter taste, which it retains until near its junction with
the Slave Eiver, when the addition of some fresh water
streams, renders it only slightly brackish. A few patches
of greyish compact gypsum were exposed on the side of
the ridge from whence the springs issue." (Ist
Expedition, p. 518.) *

Captain Back, who accompanied Eichardson, again
visited these salt springs in 1833. He writes : — " There
were no mounds like those seen in 1820 ; but just at the
foot of the hill which bounds the prairie in that quarter,
:here were three springs, varying in diameter from four
to twelve feet, and producing hillocks of salt, from
fourteen to thirty inches in height. The streams were

* Journal of a Boat Voyage through Rupert's Land and the
Arctic Sea, by Bit J. Biohardson, London, 1851.

dry, but the surface of the clayey soil was covered, to
the extent of a few hundred yards toward the plain, with
a white crust of saline particles." (Narrative of the
Arctic Land Expedition, p. 80.) Petitot states that,
according to the Indians, the Caribou Mountains,
between Salt Eiver and the Peace Eiver, contain much
rock salt. (Bui. Soc. G6og., Paris, vol. x, p. 140)

Great Slave Lake.

GreaVsiave Eiohardson describes the west shore of this great body

e, Bitumen ^j ^ater as composed of horizontal strata of limestone,
forming a flat country (2nd Exp., appendix p. xxiv.) In
his Journal of a Boat Voyage (vol. i, p. 152,) he writes :
— "In the vicinity of the westernmost channel of the
delta [of Slave Eiver] and from thence to the efflux of
the Mackenzie, the whole western shore of the lake is
limestone, associated with a bituminous shale, and
belonging, as well as can be ascertained from its fossils,
to the Erie division of the New York system, which
includes the Marcellus shaJes." He also refers to the
limestone as being bituminous, and speaks of fossil shells
of which the cavities are filled with bitumen.

of GreSiiave Capt. Back's description and specimens (Arctic Land
i*ke. Expedition, p. 544, et seq), show that the north side of

Great Slave Lake, from the entrance of the north arm
westward, consists of Laurentian rocks. The hills are
said to be rocky, low, grey and rounded, and gneiss,
porphyry and granite are the prevalent materials. The
large islands and promontory which occupy the centre of
the eastern part of the lake are, on the contrary, •* of the
trap formation " and exhibit long lines of high mural
precipices, sometimes distinctly columnar. Back com-
pares these to those formerly seen by him near the
Coppermine, and refers them to the same formation.
Near the western end of the long island, Peth-the-nu-eh,
he says the Indians obtain greenish-grey 'marl" of
which they make their pipes. The same point is shown
by Petitot, as composed of black serpentine, which he
also notes is used for the manufacture of/pipes, (Bui. Soc.

23 .

G^og., Paris, vol. x., p. 143). Specimens of slaty
magnesian limestone were obtained by Back from the
south side of the long island. Similar limestone is
associated with the series of the Coppermine Eiver, and
there is every reason to believe that the trap formation
here should be referred to the same great Lower Cambrian
series. ,.

Pebbles of a jasper conglomerate, which evidently
exactly resembles the jasper conglomerates of Lake
Huron, were collected near the east end of the lake.
The rock was, however, not seen in place. (Arctic Land
Expedition, p. 547).

Mackenzie River from Great Slave Lake to
Bear Lake River.

In the appendix to Franklin's Second Journey, Devonian and

T,. , T . ,1 1 , . Cretaceous I -,

Richardson writes: — "the only rocks seen m situ rocks. i
between Slave Lake and the Forks [mouth of the Liard] shale,
where a bituminous shale of a brownish-black colour, in
thin slates, and a slate-clay of a pure yellowish -grey
colour, which, as well as the bituminous shale, forms
steep banks," (appendix p. xxiv). In his subsequent
Journal of a Boat Voyage, (vol. i., p. 164), he describes
on the same part of the river, " bituminous shale " and
"greyish-green slate-clay," which weathers into a
tenaceous clay, and adds: — "The whole banks of the
river seem to belong to a shale fo^-mation ; but from the
want of induration of the beds, they have crumbled into
a slope more or less steep." Though TentacuUtes
fissurella is noted as occurring in the bituminous shale,
it appears probable that the general surface of the
country in this vicinity is composed of Cretaceous or v
Laramie beds, through which the river has cut in some
places to the subjacent Devonian rocks.

Eichardson did not ascend the Liard River in any of Liard Biver.
his journeys, but learned that, "for twenty-four miles
upward from its mouth, it flows through sand and shale,
with limestone occasionally cropping out," while seventy-
five miles up it is a high hill, named the " Noh'hanne

Neighbouring
part of Becky
Moontains.

Graphite and
ixoD ore.

OretaoeoQS and
Laramie.
Beds of lignite.

Butte," on the summit of which is a salt spring. From
this hill, Mr. McPherson brought specimens of limestone,
" similar in lithological character to those procured from
the Eock by the Eiver's Side." (J. B. V., vol. ii. p. 203).
This observation may be regarded as approximately
fixing the western edge of the Cretaceous and Laramie
rocks in this latitude, while the limestone seen further
down the Liard, may be that underlying these rocks,
exposed by the river in places. In loose fragments of
limestone at the mouth of the Liard, Kennicott collected
fossils which, according to Meek, are referable to the
Hamilton group. (Trans. Chicago Acad. Sci., vol. i.,
p. 69).

The Eocky Mountains, where approached by the
Mackenzie below the mouth of the Liard, are described
as consisting of a number of ridges running S.S.W., or
S.W. by S., 'vith abrupt eastern faces and longer
slopes to the westward, thus corresponding with
the outer ridges of the same range much farther south,
and probably indicating a similar prevalent west-
ward dip. A few specimens obtained from this part of
the range are not sufficiently characteristic to be of
much value, but some of them, from near the Liard
Eiver, are said to be indistinguishable from those of
Limestone Point, in Great Bear Lake, noted further on.
(2nd Expedition, appendix, p. xxvi). Specimens of plum-
bago and specular iron were also given to Eichardson as
derived from this part of the mountains, (p. xxv).

The valley of the Mackenzie near the mouth of Bear Lake
River, is occupied by rocks referred by Eichardson to the
" Lignite formation," which, with little doubt, represent
the series now known as the Laramie. The formation
"may be characterized as consisting of wood-coal in various
states, alternating with beds of pipe-clay, potter's clay,
which is sometimes bituminous, and slate-clay, gravel,
sand and friable sandstones, and occasionally with porce-
lain earth. The strata are generally horizontal, and as many
as four beds of lignite are exposed in some parts." (2nd
Expedition, appendix p. xvii.) The lignites were observed

to be on fire in various places, both by Sir A. Mackenzie,
in 1789, by Bichardson and others. Four sections seen
in the banks of the river are detailed by Bichardson —
(1) at the mouth of Bear Lake Biver, (2) five miles above
the mouth of the river, and (3) ten miles above the same
point. (2nd Expedition, appendix pp. xix-xxi.) A detailed
description of these beds and the lignites they contain is
again given in the Journal of a Boat Voyage, and
fossil plants obtained from the shales are figured,
(vol. i., p. 186.)

Great Bear Lake and Vicinity.

The greater part of the north-western and western i-aramie
shores of Great Bear Lake, together with the low land Bituminous

sbale, alnin

at the base of Great Bear Mountain, which stands on sulphur, ai^d
the promontory to the south, appear, according to
Eichardson's notes, to be formed of rocks referable to
the Cretaceous or Laramie. He describes slate-clay and
shale more or less bituminous, plastic and bituminous
coal and earthy clay, with selenite, pyrites, poor clay-
ironstone and efflorescenses of alum and sulphur. At
the base of Great Bear Mountain, are bituminous slate
and slate-clay, holding brown coal. The indications on
Petitot's map, however, show that Umestone and granite
project through the newer formations in places, forming
the hills in the centre of the promontory on the west
shore of the lake, as well as Great Bear Mountain.

Other rocks described on Bear Lake Eiver must be LinjeBtone

Kocks aaXVL'

assigned to the Cretaceous, or possibly in part to the rated with
Laramie. At the mouth of the river, however, rocks,
both of the limestone series and the Cretaceous, evidently
occur, the former probably constituting a projecting ridge.
A hill is described on the north bank of the river, at its
mouth, composed of limestone rocks similar to those of
the ridge at the rapid above referred to. Parts of the
limestone are saturated with petroleum, and petroleum
springs were observed by Franklin.

On Bear Lake River, a little below the rapid, a small Salt,
stream flows in from the southward, near the sources of

which the Indians procure an excellent common salt,
which is deposited from springs by natural ovaporation.
(1st Expedition, appendix p. xiii).

The Bamparts
to the
Kanows.

Sandstones at
the Narrows.

Feel Biver.

Mackenzie River and vicinity below Bear Lake River.

In latitude 66J, about 30 miles below The Eamparts,
is a perpendicular sandstone cliff, about one hundred and
sixty feet high, which presents the same castellated
appearance with that above noted. The beds are hori-
zontal, and rest on horizontal strata of limestone. (2nd
Expedition, appendix p. xxxv.) Beyond this point, to
" The Narrows," north of which the river divides and
becomes estuarine in character, several outcrops of
sandstone, marl-slate and shale were observed, all
probably referable to the Cretaceous or Laramie.

At The Narrows the sandstones are said to contain,
"small, rounded, and also sharply angular grains of
opaque, white, green and blue quartz with grains of
lydian- stone and coal." (J. B. V., vol. i., p. 222.) These
silicious materials are, in all probability, fragments of
the cherty beds of the limestone series. Such material
forms a great part of many of the coarser Cretaceous
beds of the Eocky Mountains where they have been
geologically examined south of the latitude of the
Peace Eiver.

The Peel Eiver, which flows into the Mackenzie not
far below The Narrows, is said to show "the shale for-
mation in its banks," (J. B. V., vol. i, p. 222), while
Isbister mentions that alum-shales occur along it to the
point at which it leaves the mountains. (Quart. Joum,
Geol. Soc, vol. xi., p. 511. Joum. Eoyal Geog. Soc,
vol. XV., p. 343.)

Country between Great Slave Lake and the mouth
of the Coppermine River.

The following notes, embracing the information avail-
able, for the tract of country above defined, are extracts
from or abstracts of those given by Eichardson in
Appendix I., to the narrative of Franklin's first journey

(1819-22). The route pursued by the expedition is
sufficiently indicated on the map by the chain of lakes
running from Great Slave Lake to the upper part of the
Coppermine River, to the north of which the ;iver itself
was followed.

Of the country north of the north arm of Great Slave gaK^Port
Lake, Richardson writes : — " The granite formation Enterprise,
continued for a considerable distance on our route
towards Fort Enterprise, but it contained more and
more foreign beds as we advanced to the northward.
. . . . At the mouth of Yellow Knife River, and in
Lake Prosperous, mica-slate prevailed. Between Rocky
and Carp Lakes, the granite contains many beds of
mica-slate, and the country is tolerably well wooded "
(p. 520). " At Carp Lake [lat. 63° 35'] the hills are of
lower altitude, have fewer precipices, and more rounded
summits ; the valleys are less fertile, contain gravelly
soil, and nourish fewer trees. This appears to be the
commencement of the gneiss, or as it may be termed, in
this latitude the Barren Ground formation, for it seems
to exist throughout the great district to the eastward of
the Coppermine River, termed the Barren Grounds by
the Indians." (p. 520.)

" The country about Fort Enterprise consists of short Bocks at Fort

_ . '' . , ^ . n , , -I Enterpriae.

and very obtuse conical, or sometimes round-backed
hills, of moderate elevations, never disposed in mountain
ranges, but entirely unconnected and separated from
each other by inclined valleys of moderate extent. Their
summits are almost universally formed of naked smooth
rock, and generally of a species of durable red granite
that has been more than once mentioned as composed of
well crystallized reddish felspar and grey quartz. Large,
irregular, but somewhat cubical, fragments of this rock
are scattered over the surface of the hills, or rest upon
their very summits, by two or three angular points, as
if left exposed there by the decay of the less durable

material that enclosed them The acclivities

of the hills, generally speaking, consist of gneiss wrapped
in a mantle form, round the granite." (p. 520.)

Following this general description (pp. 522-523), are
local details respecting the vicinity of Port Enterprise ;
granite, micaceous and hornblendic gneiss, greenstone,
mica-slate and clay-slate, being mentioned.

The following notes embody the principal recorded
• ' observations : —

Eleven and a half miles on a north-westward course
from the last mentioned locality (Point Lake), greenish-
grey clay-slate occurs. The rocks at the west end of
Point Lake were then found, for some miles, to consist of
granite and gneiss, probably Laurentian. The shores of

Red^Rock j^gd Rock Lake are characterized by reddish and

greenish-grey clay-slates, with hills apparently of trap.
One of these " bore an exact resemblance in altitude and
form to Salisbury Craigs, in the neighbourhood of
Edinburgh." In latitude 66° 45' 11", gneiss and syenite
hills were again observed on the north bank of the east-
and-west reach of the river. These, I suppose from the
description, to form an eastward projection from the
large area of these older rocks between the Coppermine
and Great Bear Lake. Beyond this point the rocks noted
are as follows : — Dark red sandstone ; dark purplish-red
compact felspar rock, with a light reddish and greyish

Cambrian felspar and quartz rock, the low area characterized by
these rocks is bounded to the northward, and eastward
by a lofty ridge of trap rocks, which constitutes the
famous Copper Mountains ; reddish-grey granular foliated
limestone ; deep red sandstone, grey sandstone composed
of grey quartz and felspar, pale red sandstone with quartz
concretions, greyish-white siliceous sandstone with
imbedded portions of the pale red kind ; greenish fels-
pathic trap, greenstone, flesh-red felspar and hornblende
in concretions, with hornblende and amygdules of
prehnite, hard wine-yellow limestone with thin layers of
flint incUning to flinty-slate.

encTwFttfLaiie ^^® abovo notes, taken in conjunction with Eichard-

snperior son's description of the Copper Mountains, appear to

show, in so far as lithological criteria may be depended

on, that representatives of both the Animikee and

Keewenaw series of the Lake Superior region may occur
here. The interest attaching to the Copper Mountains j^o„QtJ55|'
is so great as to justify the quotation of the paragraphs
referring to them. They are as follows : —

"The Copper Mountains appear to form a range
running S. E. and N. W. The great mass of rock in
the mountains seems to consist of felspar in vai'ious
conditions ; sometimes in the form of felspar rock or
clay-stone, sometimes coloured by hornblende, and
approaching to greenstone, but more generally in the
form of dark reddish-brown amygdaloid. The amyg- q^^^^^
daloidal masses contained in the amygdaloid, are either J^ronKh'the*
entirely pistacite, or pistacite enclosing calc-spar. ^^ck.
Scales of native copper are very generally disseminated
through the rock, through a species of trap tuff, which
nearly resembles it, and also through a reddish sandstone
on which it appears to rest. "When the felspar assumed
the appearance of a slaty clay-stone, which it did towards
the base of the mountains on the banks of the river, we
observed no copper in it. The rough and in general
rounded and more elevated parts of the mountain, are
composed of amygdaloid ; but between the eminences
there occur many narrow and deep valleys, which are
bounded by perpendicular mural precipices of green-
stone. It is in these valleys, amongst the loose soil,
that the Indians search for copper. Amongst the Mode of
specimens we picked up m these valleys, were plates of of copper,
native copper ; masses of pistacite containing native
copper ; of trap rock with associated native copper,
green malachite, copper glance or variegated copper ore, v.

and iron-shot copper green ; and of greenish-grey
prehnite in trap, (the trap is felspar, deeply coloured
with hornblende), with disseminated native copper : the
copper in some specimens was crystallized in rhomboidal
dodecahedrons. We also found some large tabular
fragments, evidently portions of a vein consisting of
prehnite, associated with calcareous spar, and native
copper. The Indians dig wherever they observe the
prehnite lying on the soil, experience having taught
them that the largest pieces of copper are found

Country north
of the Copper
Mountains.

Cbromlo iron.

associated with it, We did not obaorve the vein in its
original repository, nor does it appear that the Indians
have found it, but judging from the specimens just
mentioned, it most probably traverses felspathose trap.
We also picked up some fragments of a greenish-grey
coloured rock, apparently sandstone, with disseminated
variegated copper ore and copper glance ; likawise
rhomboidal fragments of white calcareous spar, and
some rock crystals. The Indians report that they have
found copper in every part of this range, which they
have examined for thirty or forty miles to the N. W.,
and that the Esquimaux come hither to search for that
metal. We afterwards found some ice chisels in
possession of the latter people, twelve or fourteen inches
long, and half an inch in diameter, formed of pure
copper."

" To the northward of the Copper Mountains, at the
distance of ten miles, in a direct line, a similar range of
trap hills occurs, having, however, less altitude."

A rolled piece of chromic iron was picked up on the
banks of the Coppermine Kiver by Dr. Rae, when
accompanying Sir J. Richardson, in his search expedition
in 1848. (J. B. V., vol. i., p. 327.)

Banges \
parallel to
the coast.

Cretaceous or
Tertiary.

Arctic Coast, west of the Mackenzie River.

The Arctic coast, west of the Mackenzie, to longitude
148°, was explored by Franklin. The shore is described
as low, but a short distance inland, there is a range of
mountains running nearly parallel to it, comprising, from
east to west, the Richardson, Buckland, British and
Romanzoff chains. The low land, at least as far as the
west end of the Richardson chain, is probably underlain
by Cretaceous or Laramie rocks, continuous with those
of the Mackenzie basin, as beds of lignite were observed
at Garry Island, off the mouth of the Mackenzie, and
near the Babbage River, opposite the west end of the
Richardson chain. There is, however, nothing to indicate
that these rocks terminate to the west at this place.
(2nd Expedition, appendix, p. xxiii.)

Continental 5hore from Mackenzie River to Boothian

Peninsula.

From Sir J. Richardson's description of the rocks J^*^^^^,
along this coast, for about 270 miles east of the itooks.
Mackenzie, or to the promontory of Cape Parry, they
are referable, with little doubt, to the Cretaceous, or to
that formation in conjunction with the superposed
Laramie 'series.

In the lay west of Cape Bathurst, cliffs of sand and
slaty-clay are noted. The extremity of Cape Bathurst is
composed of cliffs of slaty-clay, which when dry, has a
light bluish-grey colour. East of the Cape are beds of
" alum-shale " said to resemble that of Great Bear Lake,
previously referred to. At Point Trail, in this vicinity, ^'^™* shales,
cliffs or horizontally bedded "bituminous alum-shale"
of a brown colour and interspersed with crystals of
selenite and ironstone concretions, had been on fire.
" The burnt clays, vaiiously coloured, yellow, white and
deep red, give it much the appearance of the rubbish of
a brickfield," (2nd Expedition, appendix, pp. xli-xliii.)

The circumstances here met with, apparently, exactly
reproduce those presented by similar shales of the Fort
St. John group (Cretaceous) on the Smoky River, a
tributary of the Peace. (Report of Progress, Geol.
Survey of Canada, 1879-80, p. 57 b.)

Slate-clay is again noted in cliffs at several points
further east, to the bottom of Franklin Bay, and at one
place, the shaly strata were actually observed to be in
a state of combustion. (2nd Exp., appendix, p. xliii.)

In his subsequent Journal of a Boat Voyage (vol. i., p. Bichardson's
270), Richardson remarks of Cape Bathurst : — " I believe
that this promontory, from its northern part to the
bottom of Franklin Bay, is the termination of the
sandy and loamy deposit and bituminous shale,
which, throughout the whole length of ^he Mackenzie
rests on the sandstone and limestone beds so frequently
noted in the preceding pages, and fragments of which
may be traced among the alluvial islands in +be estuary

- of the Mackenzie, and in Liverpool Bay." {Cf. Bell on
Cretaceous rocks overlying Devonian limestones on
Athabasca. (Eeport of Progress, Geol. Survey of Canada,
1882-84, p. 14 cc.)

EztensiTe
Cambrlao area
on the ocast.

Bllnrian or

Devonian

limestones.

Bae Blver.

East of Cape Parry, for over seventy miles (Cape
Lyon to point Tinney), "the rocks forming the coast
line are slate-clay, limestone, greenstone, sandstone
and calcareous pudding-stone," and are recognized by
Eichardson as belonging to a formation differing from
that m«t with further west. (2nd Exp., appendix, p. xlv.)
Naked ridges of trap rocks are mentioned in some places,
*^d splintery reddish limestone, slate-clay and limestone
inocxstratified, compact bluish-black limestone and other
rocks are described, the dips observed being generally
to the north-eastward. Though the notes are rather
imperfect for this part of the coast, it is believed to be
occupied by an extension of the Cambrian rocks of the
Coppermine, possibly with outliers of the Silurian or
Devonian limestone in some places.

In his Journal of a Boat Voyage (vol. 1., p. 283)
Richardson makes the following additional important
remarks respecting this portion of the seaboard : —
" The quartz-rock beds acquire occasionally a pistachio-
green colour, as if from the presence of epidote.
A similar stone occurs at Pigeon Eiver on the north shore
of Lake Superior ; and the limestones and sandstones of
the latter district, with their associated trap rocks, as at
Thunder Mountain [now classed as Animikie] correspond
in most respects with those between Cape Parry and the
Coppermine Eiver."

Beyond the district above described, from Point Clifton
to Cape Hearne, in Coronation Gulf, '* The whole coast
consists of a formation of limestone precisely similar to
that which occurs at Lake Winnipeg and Parry's Penin-
sula." (2nd Expedition, appendix p. xlvii.) The strata
are said to be nearly horizontal.

On Eae Eiver, which flows into Coronation Gulf
from the west near the mouth of the Coppermine, lime-

Btone, bluish-grey quartz-rock and high cliffs of "basalt"
are described from specimens and notes obtained by
Dr. Eae, who ascended the river for about twenty miles
in 1849. Among the limestone and quartz-rock, Dr. Eae
discovered layers of "asparagus-stone or apatite, thin ^atiteana
beds of soap-stone, and some nephrite or jade." In
this connection Eichardson further adds : — " From the
similarity of the various rocks associated in this quarter,
to those occurring at Pigeon Eiver, and other parts of
the north shore of Lake Superior, I am inclined to
consider that the two deposits belong to the same
geological era, both being more ancient than the Silurian
series." (J. B. V., vol. i., p. 312.)

Near Eae Eiver and Eichardson Eiver, immediately to "Basaltic
the north-west of the mouth of the Coppermine, and
also on the western side of the Coppermine Eiver,
Eichardson describes a series of lines of "basaltic"
cliffs. "All these precipices face towards the south-
south-east, or east-south-east, and radiate between west
and south-south-west from a point in Coronation Gulf,
at which they would meet if prolonged. (J. B. V.,
vol. i., p. 316.)

A notice of the rocks near the mouth of the Copper-mine Rocks between
and of the Copper Mountains has already been quoted anSor^tBear
from the narrative of Franklin's first journey. Nothing
material is added to this by the observations in his
second journey, but notes are there given of the rocks
of the Barren Grounds between the mouth of the
Coppermine and Dease Bay on Great Bear Lake. Eocks
of the Coppermine Eiver series are described as extend-
ing westward to the height of land and consists chiefly
of purplish grey-spotted sandstone and conglomerate.
(Appendix p. 1.) So far as noted, the westerr slope
appears to be composed of " granite " and " porphyry."

Eastward from the mouth of the Coppermine, the Coast east of
rocks of the coast and small islands lying off it, are ^°pp°"^^°
described in the narrative of Franklin's first journey as
similar to those of the Coppermine Eiver, as far as
Cape Barrow. .

Galena.

At Galena Point, fourteen miles south of Cape Barrow,
on Batliurst Inlet, a narrow vein of pure galena was
observed traversing gneissic rocks. (Ist Expedition,
p. 581.)

Bocks and
minerals
described by
Jameson from
the east coaBt
of Melville
Peninsula.

Wast C!oast of
Hudson Bay.

Boothian and Melville Peninsulas and Vicinity.

In Agnew Eiver, on this coast, copper ore was found
by Ross, and massive beds of trap are mentioned in the
appendix as occurring in the Saumerez Eiver, though
this is included in the area of country generally charac-
terized by granite.

A specimen of lead ore was found on a hill in lat.
69° 13' 14" on the west side of the Gulf of Boothia,
{Op. cit., p. 115.)

Melville Peninsula.

The rocks referred above, in a general way, to the
Archaean, probably include areas of Huronian. Jameson
mentions as among the prominent varieties of rocks de-
rived from this region, " Granite, gneiss, mica-slate, clay-
slate, chlorite-slate, primitive-trap, serpentine, limestone
and porphyry." In association with these the following
minerals occur : — " Zircon and beryl, also precious
garnet, actinolite, tremolite, dalage, coccolite, rock
crystal, calc-spar, rhomb-spar, asbestos, graphite or
black lead, specular iron ore, magnetic iron ore,
chromic ore or chromate of iron, titanic iron, common
and magnetic iron pyrites." Some of the " transition
rocks," noticed by Jameson, should probably also be
classed with the Archaean, and in addition to several of
the minerals above mentioned, in these were found
tourmaline (schorl) and molybdenite. (Narrative of
Discovery and Adventure in the Polar Seas and Regions,
by Professors Leshe, Jameson, and Hugh Murray, 1830.)

Between this point (Cape Esquimaux) and Repulse Bay,
in the course of the two journeys above referred to,
granite and gneiss weie observed in a number of places,
and no mention is made of other rocks in situ, though
among specimens collected, and reported on by Prof.

Tennant in the appendix, hornblende and mica-slates and
chloritic and talcose slates are noted. On an island near
the south shore of Eanken Inlet, Dr. Eae " picked up
some specimens of copper ore, but the ore did not appear
to be abundant."

Northern Continental Shore, East of Hudson Bay,
with Baffin luind.

In the Transactions of the Geological Society, vol. ii. steinhaner on
(1814.) Eev. Mr. Steinhauer describes a number of
specimens sent by the Moravian missionaries from the *

Labrador coast, and gives localities for labradorite, and
for the soap-stone used by the Eskimo in making
lamps, &c.

Dr. Bell specially mentions the occurrence of mica Micaand
and graphite on the north shore of Hudson Strait, as
being of possible economic importance.

Graphite.

In a supplement to the appendix of Capt. Parry's West coast of
Voyage for the Discovery of a North-west Passage in ^ ° ''^'
the years 1819-20 (Natural History) C. Koning describes
the most characteristic rocks of the west coast of Baffin
Bay as " gneiss and micaceous quartz-rock, with some
ambiguous granitic compound, in which hornblende
seems to enter as a subordinate ingredient (p. ccxlvii).

Dr. P. C. Sutherland, in the Quarterly Journal of the Remarks by
Geological Society (vol. ix., 1853, p. 299), describes the
east coast of Baffin Land from Lancaster Sound to
Cumberland Sound, as follows : — " On the opposite
(south) shore of Lancaster Sound, at Cape Walter
Bathurst, the crystalline rocks are again recognised, and
from this point they occupy the whole coast southward
to Cumberland Strait (Sound) and probably considerably
beyond it. To this, however, I believe there is one
exception, at Cape Durban, on the 67th parallel, where
coal has been found by whalers ; and also at Kingaite,
two degrees to the south-west of Durban, where, from
the appearance of the land as viewed from a distance,
trap may be said to occur on both sides of the inlet
d2

Books of
Frobisber Bay.

Copper and
Iron ores.

Graphite is found abundant and pure in several islands
situated on the 65th parallel of latitude in Cumberland
Strait, and on the west side of Davis Straight.

A considerable collection of rocks and fossils, made by
C. F. Hall, chiefly in Frobisher Bay and its vicinity, is
described by Prof. B. K. Emerson, in Appendix III. to
Hall's Narrative of a Second Arctic Expedition. The
greater number of these specimens consist of ordinary
Laurentian rocks, including granite, gneiss, magnetite-
gneiss, hornblendic gneiss, mica-schist, etc. In associa-
tion with these, in Frobisher and Field Bays, magnetite,
apatite, bornite and pyrite were found, together with
crystalline limestone holding cocolite. At the head of
Frobisher Bay, from a hill named by Hall " Silliman's
fossil mount,"* which appears to form part of a some-
what extensive development of nearly horizontal cream-
coloured and sometimes magnesian limestone, a number
of fossils were obtained.

Mr. F. M. Endlich, in a list of minerals obtained in
the Howgate Polar expedition (1877-78) enumerates,
among others, the following from Cumberland Sound : —
Muscovite, crystals and large plates; chalcopyrite,
pyrrhotite, apatite, (Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collect-
ions, 1882, p. 171.)

In this appendix to M'Clintock's voyage, Professor
Haughton gives the following, respecting the south shore
of Pond's Bay, or inlet at the northern extremity of
Baffin Land. (Lat. 72o 40'). "In this locality, a
quartziferous black mica-schist underlies the Silurian
limestone, and is interstratified with gneiss and gamet-
iferous quartz-rock, all inclined 38° W.S.W. (true)."
M'Clintock states the inclination or dip of the beds as
35° to the west, in the same volume, (p. 156).

ffiKpsum ^^'^^ *^® appendix to Parry's Third Voyage, we

learn that in association with the limestones of the east
side of Prince Eegent Inlet, are subsidiary beds of

Notes by
Endlich and
Hanghton.

'*' The position of " Silliman's fossil mount " is shown on the map accom-
panying Hall's Life with the Esgaimauz. London, 1801.

gypsum. Gypsum also occurs on the west side of the
inlet in North Somerset, where it is said to occur in
" beds several feet thick, extending for at least 30 miles
through the country." (App. p. 147.) At the first- . ,
mentioned locality brown haematite was also found,
apparently derived from the limestone.

" Coal, sandstone, clay-ironstone and brown haematite Coai formation
were found along a line stretching E.N.E. from Baring
Island, through the south of Melville Island, Byam-
Martin Island, and the whole of Bathurst Island. Car-
boniferous limestone, with characteristic fossils, was
found along the north coast of Bathurst Island, and at
Hillock Point, Melville Island."

From a comparison of different coal exposures noted liOcaUtieB of

tossUe and
by M'Clintock, M'Clure, Austen, Belcher, and Parry, in rock-specimen

the Parry Islands, Prof. Haughton has laid down the

approximate outcrop? of some of the coal beds. These

he finds to agree remarkably well with the trend of the

boundary of the formation drawn from totally different ~. ■

data. Lists of fossils and rocks from the following

places, with notes, are given : — Hillock Point, Melville

Island (lat. 76" N. ; long. Ill" 45' W.) Bathurst Island,

north coast, Cape Lady Franklhi (?) (lat. 76° 40' N. ;

long. 98° 45' W.) Princess Eoyal Island, Prince of

Wales Strait, Baring Island (lat. 72° 45' N. ; long. "

117° 30' W.) In connection with this place, it is

noted that the carboniferous sandstones underlie the

limestones, and that "it is highly probable that

the coal beds of Melville Island are very low down

in the series, and do not correspond in geological

position with the coal beds of Europe " (p. 385).*

Cape Hamilton, Baring Island (lat. 74° 15' N. ; long.

117° 80' W.) Cape Dundas, Melville Island (lat. 74° 30"

N. ; long. 113° 45' W.) Cape Sir-James-Eoss, Melville

Island (lat. 74° 45' N. ; long. 114° 30' W.) Cape Pro-

♦ Dr. Armstrong in his Narrative of the Discovery of the North-west
Passage (p. 409), says of tke same place, " In Ptincess-Royal Island, besides
the characteristic Silnrian limestones, there are black basalts and red
jaspers, as well as red rocks, less altered by heat, but showing a passage ^ ,
Into jasper."

vidence, Melville Island (lat. 74" 20' N. ; long. 120° 30'
W.) Winter Harbour, Melville Island (lat. 74° 35' N. ;
long. 110° 45' W.) Bridgeport Inlet, Melville Island
(lat. 75° N. ; long. 109° W.) Skene Bay, Melville Island
(lat. 75° N.; long. 108° W.) Hooper Island, Lyddon
Gulf, Melville Island (lat. 75° 5' N. ; long. 112° W.)
Byam-Martin Island (lat. 75° 10' N. ; long. 104° 15' W.)
Graham-Moore Bay, Bathurst Island (lat 75° 30' N. ;
long. 102° W.) Bathurst Island, Bedford Bay (lat. 75°
N. ; long. 95° 50' W.) [Vesicular scoriaceous trap rocks
were found here by M'Clintock, though no such rocks
are mentioned elsewhere in connection with the Car-
boniferous.] Comwallis Island, McDougall Bay. Silurian
and Carboniferous fossils were found together at the last
mentioned place.. The questions raised by these are
discussed by Haughton on page 389.

Coal outcrops. Respecting the coal seams which have been dis-

covered in the Arctic Archipelago, Prof. Haughton further
remarks : — " If the different points where coal v/as found
be laid down on a map, we have, in order, proceeding

; ■ from the south-west, Cape Hamilton, Baring Island;

Cape Dundas, Melville Island, south ; Bridgeport Inlet
and Skene Bay, Melville Island; Schomberg Point,
Graham Moore Bay, Bathurst Island ; a line joining all
these points is the outcrop of the coal-beds of the south
of Melville Island, and runs E.N.E. At all the localities
above mentioned, and indeed, in every place where coal
was found, it was accompanied by the greyish-yellow
and yellow sandstone, already described, and by nodules
of clay-ironstone, passing into brown haematite, sometimes
nodular and sometimes pisolitic in structure " (p. 388).

Routes to the Yukon and far North-
west Territories of Canada.

{See, also, Appendix.)

The points of view from which a new country must
be viewed are (1) the value of the resources, and (2) the
routes or means by which these resources can be
reached and brought to market. It has been, already,
conclusively shown that the North- Western Territories
of Canada contain mineral resources alone of such
splendid promise as should insure, now that the ball
has been set rolling on the Upper Yukon, this great
Dominion a swift and, perhaps, startling accession of
wealth and eminence. The problem that now appears to
be taxing the ingenuity of all men concerned in the
development of Canada's sub-arctic region is that of the
easiest and most economical routes.

Taking Vancouver as a starting point, it is found The Routes

° , , . . , to the Yukon

that there are at least nme or ten routes more or less from the west
used: — (11 St. Michael's, the Up- Yukon Eiver route;
(2) the Chilkat Pass; (3) Bound's Trail; (4) Dalton's
Trail ; (5) Chilkoot Pass ; (6) White Pass ; (7) Taku
Inlet ; (8) Stikeen Eiver. There are' two routes from the
Coast to Telegraph Creek, the starting point on this route ;
one via the Stikeen River, the other (9) *Overland
and through British Territory from the Kitimat Arm of
Douglas Channel, 308 miles from British Columbia
Coast to Telegraph Creek ; and (10) the Fraser River —
from Ashcroft (B.C.) on the Canadian Pacific Railway,
800 miles to Lake Teslin, 600 miles further to Dawson
City. These are all so condemned and approved alter-
nately by newspaper critics and returned travellers that
it would require volumes of descriptive and technical
detail to properly represent their respective merits or
demerits. The second part of this volume briefly deals
with these different routes, in the shape of extracts from
various official authorities, publications and newspapers.
(See Sections 10, 18 and 27, Part II.) But a few words
might be said respecting the different railway schemes.

* This route has not yet been surveyed, and, therefore, cannot be des-
cribed, but IL id said to offer an easy'grade route tliroueh All-Canadian
territory, much of it good agricultural country, and skirts some of the
active mining fields of B.C., and several prospectiTc ones.

Railways from
theWest Coast

Objections to
Bhort costly
railways.

The subject of
railways
viewed from
a dividend-
paying point
ol view.

Good waggon
roads vermis
short railways.

It is proposed to build a railway from Skap;way
Bay to Bennett Lake ; another from the Taku Inlet to
Teslin Lake ; another from the Stickeen Eiver to the
last mentioned lake ; and other lines are proposed from
the West Coast, all terminating at some lake or river point
a few miles inland and hundreds of miles from the Yukon.
The question that arises respecting these proposed short
railways is : — While offering a certain advantage in the
matter of taking passengers and goods over the first few
miles of a 600 miles' journey during the short summer
season, what prospect do they present of returning divi-
dends to shareholders ? In a twelvemonth's time Dyea,
Skagway, Telegraph Creek and other shipping termini will
be furnished with numberless transport contractors, with
whom railways will never be able to compete unless
trade and passenger traffic become enormous ; a pros-
pect that certainly looks likely to be realised, but which
at this stage appears too speculative a contingency upon
which to build costly railways.

The gravest objection, however, to these railways is
that, for the most part, they only cover the narrow
coastline between the shipping ports and the inland
waterways leading to the goldfields, and are,
therefore, of little service from September to June of
each, year, when these waterways are frozen over.
(See Section 11, Part II.) Railways that are built over
the mountainous coast country of this part of the American
continent, and which can only command full traffic for little
over four months in the year, will require to charge rather
heavily during those few months if shareholders are to draw
the dividends anticipated. It must also be remembered
that, unlike an agricultural country, or, indeed, any
other country in the world, the railway traffic, excepting
in passengers, will be altogether one way; the return
journeys will be almost wholly unremunerative.

Unless some means are devised of getting heavy
traffic over the ice-laden lakes and rivers"'' it is difficult to
see the wisdom of building all these short and expensive
railroads until such time as sufficient encouragement is

* Section 19, Part II., refers to the use of dogs or reindeer for this
purpose, bnt there is no donbt that mechanical science will soon overcome
the difficulty. The traction engine supplies a key with which some genius
will solve the problem. (See Appendix.)

forthcoming to build a line from the terminal point of all
the coastal railways right through to the goldfields. At
present good waggon roads to the navigable waterways
and inland trails are all that is needed when the
question is considered from the profitable investment
point of view. As to building a railway 600 miles into
a gold-mining country like the Yukon, before its wide-
spread richness and permanency have been thoroughly
established, and which, during the summer months,
when the bulk of the carrying trade would be done,
could never compete against the Mackenzie and Yukon
Rivers' traffic, it is sufficient to say that no government
would be so unwise as to countenance such a project.

There is no intention of questioning the value which Travellers and

^ "^ Traflio V. Bail*

these coast lines will prove to traffic during the short ^vay share-

1 holders,

open- waterway season, but with three or four short

costly railways, all with the same object and converging

towards the one point, competing against all-waterway

routes and good waggon roads, and, more particularly,

against each other, it is difficult to see how they are

going to pay. There is no doubt that the proper course

was for the Canadian Government to have had rapid

surveys made of the most likely routes, before any

charters were granted, and to have selected the best for

a State railway, which should have been constructed at

once. This would, at least, have stopped many schemes

now afoot in which much disappointment and loss will

be experienced.

As the case stands now, several charters have been

granted for different railway projects, on some of which,

it is said, preliminary operations have already begun.

If possible, and not too late, it would be a wise move for

the various companies, or concessionaires, to join forces

and decide upon one railway only. The advantages of

such a course are obvious.

The White Pass and the Stikeen proposed railway ^'^^ White
routes are, no doubt, the best known at present, and, of stikeenKoutes.
these, all information to hand at the beginning of this
year (1898) gives the palm to the first-mentioned. It must
be noted that railway routes are referred to, not roadways.

White Pass
Bonte.

The Stikeen
Boute.

Ugly f/jaturea
on uie 8t.
Michael's,
Chtlkoot and
Taku Biver
Bootes.

Skagway Bay, the starting point of the Whita Pass
Route, has the advantage over all other seaports in this
region, in having deep water, excellent shelter, and a
good landing wharf for large steamers at all tides and
seasons. The route, after leaving the Bay, proceeds
along a flat for four or five miles, then over the coast
range — the highest point of which, 2,600 feet, is reached
17 miles from Skagway. Thence it descends to Lake
Bennett, 35 miles from Skagway. A survey reports that
the steepest gradient for a railway by this route is only
3 feet in 100. The line continues to a point on the
Hootalinqua Eiver 90 miles from Lake Bennett, thus
giving a railway of 125 miles from the sea, to an unin-
terrupted direct waterway to the Yukon.* From this
point on the Hootalinqua it is 400 miles by the Stikeen
Route via Teslin Lake to the sea. Of this distance
nearly 150 miles must be covered by a railway from
Telegraph Creek to Teslin Lake.

Navigation is open at all times of the year by sea to
Skagway, while the Stikeen River is closed by ice for at
least six months and Teslin Lake for nearly a month
longer every year. But the Stikeen River labors under
other disadvantages as compared with the Skagway.
Even when open the river is somewhat difficult to navi-
gate by vessels drawing not more than four feet, and lines
have to be taken ashore at one particularly bad spot.
Teslin Lake is closed long after the Hootalinqua River
opens, and ice forms upon it sometime before it appears
on the river. It is a well-known fact that ice remains on
the lakes longer and forms earlier than on the rivers of
this region, though on Tagish Lake and other lakes
amongst the coast ranges the mountain streams keep the
ice from forming and clears it off much earlier than on
the lakes further inland.

These facts, certainly, give many points to the
White Pass Route over that of the Stikeen.

There are three other routes, of which a great deal
has been said that is misleading. The following sum-
ming-up of Mr. Ogilvie's latest utterances (Lecture at

(* There is an alternative scheme of extending this line to Fori Selkirk
instead of the Hootalinqua Biver.)

43 : , ,..,; .

Victoria, B. C, November 5th, 1697) discloses some
ugly features upon these routes.

The St. Michael's or Up- Yukon Route :— Only 2^ ^'t'! Mioh»er»
months' open navigation, and treacherous sand-bars, I'outo.
which are likely to limit vessels to only one trip in the
season.

The Chilkoot Pass Rente :— So rough and moun- Ks rSS^*
tainous that, Mr. Ogilvie remarks, " it would probably
be necessary to suspend the road by iron girders from
the cliffs on the road to Sheep Camp, and from Sheep
Camp to the head of the climb the road is yet more
difficult."

Taku River Route:— The dangers from the Great r.r/e?Route.
Taku glacier, and obstacles to navigation caused by
enormous gravel-bars, form permanent objections to this
route.

However, the object of these pages is not so much Jbj|™°o? these
to deal with the routes from the west coast as from the pages,
point-of-view at which Europe, and more particularly
this country, must regard the development of these far
north-western territories of Canada, in which mining,
the fisheries and furs, must ever be the only possible
industries of any extent, though circumstances may
bring about a wide development of the great petroleum
areas which extend throughout the entire length of the
great Mackenzie basin, though in some favoured localities
in the South limited agriculture may be carried on and
stock grazed during the short summer.

Routes and Approaches from the East and South East.

The main highway into the great auriferous territory
in the far north-west, between the Yukon and Mackenzie
Rivers, will ultimately be from the east, or, to be quite
correct, from the south east. The exact route will be
determined by such mining developments as occur
throughout the North Western Territories within the
next few months, but for the reasons which follow, the
Mackenzie River is certainly destined to play a chief
part in the opening-up of these sub-arctic regions.

Residents of Lower or South-East Canada will no ^°^^ . ,

Overlana irom

doubt favor those routes of which Edmonton — a terminus Edmonton.

A bad feature
in the railway
qncBtion.

Liard and
Peace River
xoates.

The Mackenzie
Biver route.

on a branch of the Canadian Pacific Eailway — is the
starting point. (See Map.)

A through-railway route to the Yukon from this
point would pass through good ag)icultural country for
the first few miles, but the rest of this gigantic under-
taking — over 1,000 miles in lengtli — would pass through
regions absolutely unproductive for all practical purposes,
excepting in the matter of furs, and such minerals as
may be discovered.

A feature of this question ',hat must be kept in view
is, that railways to any goldfieMs in the far North- West
Territories, can only pay on the outward journey ; there
will be httle or no freight on return trips, and few
passengers, so far as any appreciable addition to receipts
are concerned as compared with the cost. The length
and cost of this line, together with the competition of
cheaper routes, must rele/,'ate the consideration of its
construction to some future period when possible dis-
coveries along its proposf-d route may be sufficient to
warrant reconsideration. A waggon road is another
matter and one will no doubt be made by the Government
if the Survey Party nov on the route report favourably.
(See Edmonton Boutca, No. 14. Section 21, Part II.)

There are summev routes from Edmonton to the
Yukon along both the Liard and the Peace Eivers, but it
is very 'unlikely that either will ever be popular. The
dangers, length and unceasing toil — the greater portion
being- up a swift stream of the former, and the same
drawbacks though with fewer perils but greater length of
the latter, will never permit these river routes to be
much favored, excepting by travellers residing in or
about the districts through which these rivers flow.
(See Sections 10 and 11 in Part II., for description and
distances.)

The route from Edmonton to the Yukon goldfields,
via the Mackenzie Eiver, is preferable to any other from
this point because of its ease and inexpensiveness. The
great attraction of this route is, that out of its entire
length from Edmonton to Dawson City, 2,458 miles,
2,182 miles are down stream. There are only three

portages between the starting point and Great Slave
Lake, and two or three short ones about 1,000 miles
further on in McDougall's Pass, which altogether
scarcely exceed a mile in length and are described
by Mr. Wm. Ogilvie (1887-88 expedition)—" The Pass
is wide and level, the valley being nearly a mile wide at
the bottom, and very flat. It is almost treeless. Lakes
in the Pass reduce the portage distance to less than half
a mile." Mr. Ogilvie passed along this portion of the
route in June with his canoes, thus showing that the
waterways in this Arctic region are free from ice almost
as early as the lakes on the Lewes Eiver. There are
Hudson Bay Posts at certain intervals, so that during
the summer months this down-stream journey should be
quite a pleasant trip. The only up-stream portions are
on the Peel and Trout Rivers, and up the Yukon, 260
miles, to Dawson City. (See under Sections 11 and 21,
Part II., for distances and particulars.)

Route from Hudson's Bay to the Yukon.

The summer route from Europe to the Yukon The Route of

, the future,

and the whole of the North- Western Territories, north

of about Lat. 55', will, undoubtedly, be from Hudson's

Bay by way of the Great Slave Lake and Mackenzie

River ; and the easiest and most direct course of such a

route would be via Chesterfield Inlet. The notes and

extracts in Part II. of this work, under Sections 11 and

22 dealing with the distances, and giving the descriptive ■

particulars and resources of the country which such a

route would tap, should be read in order to understand

its many advantages. Its chief value lies in the almost

direct course which it provides between England and

the Yukon goldfields ; but it also possesses almost equal

attractions in the vast extent of mineral country, Arctic

whale and seal industries, freshwater fisheries, and an

almost untapped fur country which it opens up to

European markets, and the enterprise of European

Capitalists. Perhaps its chief advantages are that

throughout its entire course of over 1,000 miles from

the Great Slave Lake it is navigable by river steamers ;

and four-fifths of this river route to the Yukon country

is down stream.

HadsonV liay.

Safety of
Naylgation
InHudson's
Bay.

By reference to Section 25, Part II., it will be seen,
on the high authority of Dr. Bobert Bell, Assistant
Director of the Geological Survey of Canada, that the
greater portion of Hudson's Bay and Straits is quite
open to navigation throughout the whole of the year,
while the same authority states — "I have a record of
the principal phenomena of the seasons at Martin's
Falls on the Albany Eiver, extending through a period
of fifty years, and from it I find that the river is open
there on an average for six months of the year. I have
also a record of dates of the opening and closing of
Hayes Eiver at York Factory, extending over 50 years,
from which it appears to enjoy an average of fully six
months of open water. The Nelson Eiver is open for
a longer period." There are no accounts procurable
respecting Chesterfield Inlet, but it is reasonable to
assume that this great arm of the Bay is open for a
period not very much shorter than that of the rivers
just mentioned.

In referring to the safety of navigation in Hudson's
Bay and straits, Dr. Eobert Bell states that he obtained
a record from the Hudson's Bay Company which shows
that " there have been almost every year during the
past two centuries ships of various classes and sizes
navigating the strait without loss, and it seems almost
incredible that such a number of voyages could be made,
extending over 874 years, without the loss of over one,
or, as is claimed by some writers, two small sailing
vessels ! "

The navigation of Hudson's Bay will be suJQfioiently
dealt with by quoting from the report of the 1884
Hudson's Bay Committee, which states — '* No evidence
has been given that goes to prove that Hudson's Strut
and Bay, proper, ever freeze over, or that the ice met
with in those waters is sufficient to prevent navigation
at any time of the year ; that Hudson's Bay and
Strait appear, from all evidence taken, to be singularly
free from obstruction to navigation in the shape of
shoals or reefs, and, during the period of open water,
from storms or fogs."

These extracts surely prove the practicabiUty of the
Mackenzie Eiver route so far as Chesterfield Inlet—
or any other port in Hudson's Bay — is concerned.

The chief consideration in the question of opening 5f^^°^,'
up a shipping route from Europe to Hudson's Bay is Bay country,
that of freight. This subject is dealt with at consider-
able length under Section 25, Part II., under the
heading — " Hudson's Bay and its Territory." But the
amazing gold discoveries on the Yukon and in the
country between this great Alaskan waterway and the
Mackenzie Eiver, and the probable early development
of other rich mineral areas in the far North Western
Territories, present additional and urgent reasons for
the opening up of this direct route from England to the
Yukon-Mackenzie country.

The next section for consideration in this Chester- The route alter

leaving

field Inlet route is that between the Inlet and the Great chesterfield
Slave Lake. Mr. J. W. Tj-rrell proved in his exploratory
tour of '98 that deep navigable waters extend 250 miles
beyond the Inlet to the head of Aberdeen Lake, and
he describes himself and companions as being the first
white-men who had ever been on this lake. (See
Section 22, Part II.) Writing of his journey along the
Doobaunt Eiver, just before entering Aberdeen Lake,
he states — "The surprising and most delightful feature
of the locality was that upon the shores there was
strewn an abundance of driftwood. At first sight its
occurrence was unaccountable, but the mystery was
readily solved, however, by finding that ive Imcl readied
the confluence of another large river flowing in from the
west. Much of the driftwood was of large size, and
judging from the slightly battered condition, one would
infer that it had come no very great distance, or, at any
rate, through very few rapids."

This account leads to but one conclusion, viz., that a waterway

, . . between the

a large unexplored river, free from any serious impcdi- iniet and Great
ments to navigation, extends from near the mouth of
Doobaunt Eiver at Aberdeen Lake to some point directly
west, or nearly so, and to some unknown distance, possibly

48 - .

to branches of the Great Slave Lake. The total distance
from Aberdeen Lake to the navigable branches of Great
Slave Lake is somewhat about 150 miles. Branches
flowing east from the Lakes and this large river
undoubtedly cover the greater part, if not the whole, of
this distance. Under any circumstances the country
is level and easy to travel. Well-defined Indian and
Esquimaux tracks from the Inlet to the Lakes have
been known to exist for years.

siave^Lake The Great Slave Lake, about 250 miles in length,

route?" °* ^"^^ ^^^ ^*^ eastern branches are the next section of this
route. The Great Lake is well known to be navigable
for large river-steamers, and so also are Artillery
and Golden Clinton Lake, but the channels connecting
them, though well-defined on maps and apparently
extensive waterways, are lacking official records.

River Section!^ The Mackenzie Eiver Section comes next in this

route. The following extracts from a report on an
exploration in the Mackenzie and Yukon Basins in 1887,
by R. G. McConnell, B.A., of the Geological Survey of
Canada, supply some most valuable information con-
cerning the navigation of the Mackenzie Eiver, its lakes
and its tributaries : —

Navigation of " The Mackenzie Eiver and its continuation. Slave

the Mackenzie. .,,« -n^.i

Eiver, are navigable from Fort Smith at the foot of the

Slave Eiver rapids to the Arctic Ocean, a distance of
over 1,300 miles. A small steamer, built by the Hud-
son's Bay Company at Fort Smith, in the winter of
1886-8, now makes annual trips from that post down
S' ve Eiver and the Mackenzie as far as the mouth of
Peel Eiver, which enters the latter at the head of its
delta, and thence thirty miles up Peel Eiver to Fort
Macpherson. ... It follows from these dates (see
Section 12, Part II.) that the Mackenzie, disregarding
the obstructions in low water from rapids, cannot be
considered as navigable much before the 10th of June,
nor later than the 20th October."

On reaching the delta at the mouth of the Mac-
kenzie and passing through the left-hand channel for

K^ '

12 miles, the Peel River is reached. Fort Macpherson
is situated 14 miles up the Peel on the left bank.

Country tapped by a Hudson's Bay Route.

Before proceeding further with a description of this
routo, a short reference might be made to the immense
area which the Mackenzie River, its lakes and tributaries,
would open up were they connected with the sea by a
direct route through Hudson's Bay.

A vast and very rich fur country between Hudson's The navigable

" T 1 » • /-v IT area of the

Bay, Athabasca Lake and the Arctic Ocean would Mackenzie,
be tapped, as well as the copper and otherwise highly
mineralised country of the so-called "Barren Lands." .
The magnificent freshwater fisheries could also be
operated upon as well as those of the Arctic Ocean by
means of this great navigable waterway. Excepting
a 14-mile break of rap'ds, the Slave River is navigable
through to Lake Athabasca, in the surrounding country
of which there are evidences of innumerable mineral
deposits of great apparent value. The navigable
Athabasca River continues further, affording command
of a large extent of country of high pi'oripactive value,
and, excepting a break of rapids 70 miles in extent
(capable of being made navigable by improvement)
Athabasca Landing is reached, whence there is a 90-mile
road to Edmonton, the terminus of a branch of the
Canadian Pacific Railway. The magnificent Peace The Peace
River, extending from Lake Athabasca right through to
the Omenica goldfields of British Columbia, and navigable
throughout, excepting for three or four rapids which
make portaging necessary, forms a part of this great •:

navigable waterway system. The northern arm > of
Great Slave Lake, Hay River, and other smaller streams,
provide further means of supplying this proposed main
artery of trade.

About 200 miles down the Mackenzie from Great TheLiard
Slave Lake is the Liard River, which is navigable by
steamers for quite 200 miles to the mouth of the Nelson
River, which is also navigable for small steamers for at
least 100 miles further on. Canoes can, and do, proceed

right on — with occasional portages — to the head waters
of the Liard, where the ftcvourable route from Edmonton
to the Yukon Goldfields is met with.

Mr. E. G. McConnell, in his report, which I quote
on a preceding page, states : —

WTe?** "Of ^^^ other tributaries of the Mackenzie, Peel

River is the only one which can be considered as navi-
gable. This is ascended annually, as stated above, by
the steamer "Wrigley" as far as Fort Macpherson,
and, if necessary, could be followed much further, but
the exact distance is not known."

fiSiutari^'^of ^^^ there are many short tributaries of the Mac-

the Mackenzie, kenzie which might prove valuable arteries in connection

with the fur trade, the mining industry, and trade v/ith

the Indians and Esquimaux. Of these the Nahanni, the

Dahadinne, the Carcagou and the Arctic Red River are

the most important on the "West so far as exploration has

gone, and the Willow, Blackwater, Great Bear (connecting

with Great Bear Lake) and the Hare Skin rivers are the

most important in the East.

hi|he8t*m. ^^ The Report of the Select Committee of the Senate,

fhe*Macirenzie a-ppointed to inquire into the resources of the Great

River, Mackenzie Basin in 1888, states in reference to the

Mackenzie River :

♦' There is a river navigation of about 2,750
miles, of which 1,390 miles are suitable for stern-
wheel steamers, which with their barges may carry
300 tons ; the remaining 1,360 being deep enough
for light draught sea-going steamers. There is a
total of about 6,500 miles of continuous lake, coast,
and river navigation, broken only in two places ;
that the two breaks in question are upon the Great
Slave and Athabasca Rivers, the first being over-
come by a 20-mile waggon road from Fort Smith
southwards on the Great Slave River, and Ihe latter
being a stretch of 70 miles on the Athabasca, of
questionable navigation above Fort McMurray,
down which flat boats or scows descend, but cannot

• 51

ascend, and which about 50 miles of waggon road
would overcome, while some improvement of the
rapids might make the whole river navigable ; that
with suitable steam crafts this river and lake navi-
gation may be connected with Victoria and Van-
couver by way of the mouth of the Mackenzie Bivcr,
by way of the Arctic Ocean and Behring Straits and
Sea, and it (the Mackenzie) is now connected on
the south by 90 miles of waggon road, between
Athabasca, Athabasca Landing and Edmonton, w^ith
navigable water in the Saskatchewan."

From the Peel River the summer route generally ^onjI^^t'S?
taken to the Yukon is by way of the Trout (or Poplar) ^'^^^ ^h™f
River to McDougall's Pass, where lakes reduce the the Mackenzie,
portage distance to less than half-a-mile. The Pass is
wide, treeless, very j3at, and easily traversed. -'

An 8-mile creek, navigable by boats, leads to the
Bell River (navigable by river steamers), which takes
one to La Pierre's House, a few miles further on. From
this point to the Porcupine River — also navigable by
steamers — is about 30 miles. The junction of the
Yukon and Porcupine is 290 miles distant. (See Notes b.
Section 10, Part II.)

The mid-season route from the mouth of the Mac- The mid-season
kenzie to the Yukon is the same as that just described, mouth of the
excepting that, instead of taking the McDougall's Pass the*YSton.
route, a portage of between 48 and 50 miles is done. This
portage is some miles longer if La Pierre's House is the
objective point, but the shorter distance is from the Peel
River, near Fort Macpherson, to the nearest point on
the navigable Bell River, from which there is unob-
structed navigation for steamers along the Porcupine to
the Yukon River, or up the Porcupine River to its head-
waters.

In 1872 a Mr. James McDougall made thorough Valuable dis-
explorations of these routes — both by portage and water thiTroutc"
ways ; he discovered the Pass which bears his name —
and reported that it was not more than 35 miles

The tlirongh
Peel River
xoQte.

Mr. Ogilvie's
report ; the
Peel Kiver
route to the
Stewart Biver.

The Upper
Porcupine
route via the
Tatondnc
Kiver.

between good steamboat navigation on either side. He
also declared that a good road could easily be made.

Mr. McDougall made a most important discovery of
coal on the Trout Eiver only a few navigable miles from
the junction of Peel and Mackenzie Bivers. (See Notes
B, Section 10, Part II.)

The Peel Eiver supplies a route that will be largely
used when the object is to reach the gold-bearing reefs
at the head waters of the Stewart and Macmillan Eivers.
The Peel — described by the Senate Committee of 1888
as " a gold-bearing stream " — is a river that, so far as
official records go, enjoys the distinction of having been
explored by only one man. Mr. W. A. K. Isbister
journeyed down this river in 1844, and his report is to
the effect that it is 300 miles in length, and has no
serious obstructions to river steamer navigation.

In his report of exploration in the Upper Yukon
country of 1888, Mr. Ogilvie furnishes evidence which
shows that the navigable Beaver branch of the Stewart
Eiver is only separated from the west branch of the Peel
by some "low terraced sand-hills." The latest official
maps contain this important west branch of the Peel, but
it is absent from the earlier ones. (See Section 10,
Part II.)

The Upper Porcupine forms another very important
route to the Yukon goldfields from the mouth of the
Mackenzie Eiver. This route, also, has been explored by
one man only — Mr. Wm. Ogilvie, 1887-88. A summary of
this interesting journey is contained under Note F,
Section 10, Part II. of this work.

After crossing to La Pierre's House, or some ether
point on the Bell Eiver, the journey is continued to the
junction of the Porcupine and Bell Eivers. Instead of
proceeding along the Porcupine to the Yukon Eiver, the
opposite direction is taken. The Porcupine is navigable by
river steamers up to the neighbourhood of its headwaters.
There are one or two other rivers by which the Yukon
may be reached from the Porcupine headwaters in addi-
tion to the Tatonduc Eiver route, but these are sufficiently
referred to in notes F, Section 10, Part II. The total

distance from the Bell Biver to the headwaters of the
Porcupine, following the river windings, is about 220
miles.

In his report of exploration during 1887-88 Mr. E. Navir»tion

_,___, ,,-r,. ,,^,.,o. r r* t of rivers by the

G. McConnell, B.A., of the Geological Survey of Canada, Mackenzie

' o J mouth route,

states : —

*' On the west side of the Eocky Mountains,

the Bell, Rat, and Porcupine Rivers could easily be

navigated for three or four months of the year, by

small steamers, from Lapierre House down to the

junction of the latter with the Yukon. Above the

mouth of the Porcupine the Yukon, beyond a stiff

current of from four to five miles an hour, presents no

obstacle to navigation as far as Rink Rapids, a distance

of over five hundred miles, and below the mouth of the

Porcupine it is navigable to the sea. Stewart Eiver,

the principal tributary of the Yukon on the east in

the district examined, is reported to be navigable

for a distance of nearly two hundred miles above

its mouth, but has not yet been ascended by the

steamers plying on the Yukon."

"The navigable waters of the Mackenzie are The navigable
separated from those of the Yukon in Lat. 67-20 N. ySifonand''*
by a distance of about sixty miles only.* A cart B^re"^**
trail was staked out some years ago by the Hudson's SiSy «)*d^m.
Bay Company across the interval separating these
rivers with the intention of supplying the Mackenzie
River district with goods by way of the Yukon, but
the project fell through and the road was never
built." ' •

The facts established by these official reports and official
the extracts from authorities in Part II., are : — that fstaw^"
unparalleled gold discoveries have been made on the Yukon fact^*°*
Eiver; that the richest finds are made in those rivers
flowing in from the East — in the Eocky Mountain ranges ;
that the further up the rivers the richer the gold ; that
the headwaters of these rivers will be the scene of great

» Mr. Jas. MacDonsall made several explorations in this neigbboturhood
in the seventies, and declares thati the distance between good steamboat
navigation on either side was only 35 miles.

An important
snmmary.

The Arctic
Ocean Boate ;
importaut
pomts.

milling activity ; that the Peel River — after leaving
the Mackenzie — offers the best means of providing a
through-navigable waterway route to these headwaters,
and that the Mackenzie River will be the shortest,
easiest, most direct, least expensive, and most popular
route from the E?.st coa°t — taking an English port as
the starting point.

Route via Behring Strait and mouth of Mackenzie.

The following important statement — the more sig-
nificant in view of the recent gold discoveries in the
Yukon -Mackenzie countiy — was made in the summary
handed in to the Dominion Government by the Select
Committee of the Senate appointed to inquire into the
navigation and resources of the Great Mackenzie Basin
in 1888, p. 10 :—

" That with suitable steam crafts this river
(the Mackenzie) and its lake navigation may be
connected with Victoria and Vancouver by way of
the mouth of the Mackenzie River, the Arctic Ocean,
Behring Strait and Sea." (See Sections 8 and 9,
Part II.)

It is not for one moment proposed that the Arctic
Ocean offers a regular means of reaching the upper
Yukon goldfields that can compare or compete with
other routes, but, putting the common prejudice against
Arctic Seas aside, there is abundant proof available to
show that this route to the mouth of the Mackenzie
River is quite as safe — perhaps more so in its season —
as the Yukon River. Besides, it can take deep-sea
vessels, whereas the Yukon requires especially shallow
di-aught vessels of light tonnage for its navigation. River
steamers are certainly i-equired from 4ihe mouth of the
Mackenzie to the gold-bearing region, but only for 250
miles in one case (the Peel R. route), and 500 miles in
the other (the down Porcupine R. route), as against
about 1,800 miles by the Yukon. The distance from
V^ictoria — taking time into consideration — is in favour
of the Arctic Sea roi^+^e. From Victoria to the mouth
of the Mackenzie — via ^he Arctic Ocean — and along

the Peel River to the region of the headwaters of the
Stewart River is about 4,450 miles, whereas from
Victoria to the mouth of the Stewart River — by way
of St. Michael's and the Yukon — the distance is about
4,400 miles ; a difference of fifty miles in favour of the
St. Michael's route, but ocean travelling? is admittedly
more rapid than by shifting sand-bauk obstructed rivers.
Besides, this ocean route gives from three to four
months open seaway as against ten weeks on the Yukon.
(See Section 25, p. 163, Part II.; "A prophetic state-
ment by Dr. G. M. Dawson.")

In respect to the navigation of Canadian-Arctic Seas, ^ noteworthy

f o 1 /. , . extract bearing

and the development of their ricn mineral and ushmg upon the

1 » 11 . r » 1 naviRation of

resources, the followmg extract from the report of the the Canadian
special Committee of the Canadian Senate of 1888,
p. 308, is important as confirming the opinion long held
by navigators, that, taking the proper season in the year,
the Arctic Coast of British North America can be navi-
gated with ease and safety : —

" In a memorial from Sir Roderick Murchison
upon the same subject he speaks thus (p. 394) : ' In
respect to one of these courses, or that by Behring's
Straits, along the coast of North America, we know
that a single sailing vessel passed to Cambridge
within 150 miles of the mouth of the Back River,
and returned home unscathed, its commander having
expressed his conviction that the passage in question
is so constantly open that ships can navigate it
without difficulty in one season.' "

An important adjunct; Arctic Sea Fisheries.

The advantage of the Arctic Ocean route to the Whaiingin
Yukon-Mackenzie countiy rests in its serviceability as a Bay.
means of combining the highly remunerative whale,
seal and walrus fisheries in Mackenzie Bay and the
Arctic coast, with the advantages it offers of reaching
the goldfields and taking machinery and supplies to the ^*^h^ery and
head-waters of the Peel, Stewart and MacMillan rivers. he^wa%M^f
(See Part II., Section 8, re navigation of the Arctic s^^i^^'aaci
Ocean and the Mackenzie River, and Section 9 re Dr. 1^*^™"*°^

American
whalers in
Maokeueio

A splendid
opening for
British enter-
inrlse.

The future im-
portance of
Mackenzie
Bay.

Dawson's opinion and whaling in Mackenzie Bay ; and
also Section 2 re quartz reefs at the head waters of the
rivers.)

The whaling industry (combined with the capture
of the seal and walrus) is one of great value in Mac-
kenzie Bay. This bay is said to be the best whaling
ground in the world, but, curiously, it is only exploited
by San Francisco whalers. They have established head-
quarters at Herchel Island, about 90 miles from the
mouth of the Mackenzie Eiver, as, being subjects of the
United States, they are debarred from coming within the
three mile shore limit. Even as it is they are said to be
acting contrary to International Law. Inspector Con-
stantino reports that there were 1,200 men (all United
States Americans) on this island in the 1895 season, and
the Hon. John Schultz reports that their profits are
enormous. (See Section 9, Part II.)

Why British whalers, with the greater advantages
they could command by being British subjects, do not
establish themselves in this industry in these prolific
waters, is a question often asked by well-informed
authorities in Canada (see Section 9, Part II.), but
irvariably answered with the reply that the industry
could only be conducted from Victoria or Vancouver,
from which places, however, no whaling is carried on.

This is a reason in which there is a notable want of
spirit — because of the fear of American competition, and
perception — because of the splendid opportunity that is
lost.

In view of the great mining development that is
promised in this region, there is little doubt that the
Mackenzie Bay fishing industry will shortly assume
considerable importance, as whaling vessels now going
to those fishing grounds comparatively empty will
fill up with supplies for the goldfields, and to supply
those miners who take the Mackenzie and Peel Rivers'
route to the fields. Besides, as before mentioned,
heavy machinery and supplies can be easily taken by

this deep sea route to the quartz reefs at the rivers'
headwaters.

Considerable scepticism is felt in respect to the ^NOTt?*"***
prospective value of the mouth of the Mackenzie as a America,
commercial seaport. Dr. Dawson, however, dispels
any doubt in this direction by proving that the circum-
stances of Mackenzie Bay and the "White Sea are almost
parallel, and that what is being done so successfully in
Sub-Arctic Russia should be done equally well in Sub-
Arctic America. (See section 24, Part II.)

Other examples are shewn in the prosperity of comparison
many cities quite as far north as the mouth of the seaports in
Mackenzie. Besides, northern Asia affords even more Kuropeand
telling comparisons, numbers of British vessels going many
degrees further north on ordinary shipping business
and with nothing like the promising prospects held out
in this easily reached bay, into which the mighty and
far reaching Mackenzie discharges its great volume of
tepid waters.

The future of British North America is a fascinating ^o^jIqi. ,.
problem to speculate upon, the only danger being that future,
the more one studies the indications of its enormous
resources, the more boundless become its possibilities,
until one passes into a state of bewilderment at the
apparent extravagance of the prospect. Its agricul-
tural, lumber, and fishery resources are rich and promis-
ing indeed, but when its future mineral development
is added the vista widens out beyond all human calcu-
lation.

THE

ROUTES AND MINERAL RESOURCES

N. W. CANADA.

PART II.— AUTHORITIES.

WJierever the word ** evidence " is used m a
headline f it must be understood thai the
matter immediately following is an extract
from the Beport of the Select Committee of
the Senate appointed to enquire into the
Besources of the Mackenzie Basin for the
Government of the Doviinion of Canada ^
1888.

Section X. Untold wealth of Alluvial
Gold In the Country,

General Summary of the 1888 Senate Committee.
Of the mines of this vast reffion little is known of The rich

° mineral

that part east of the Mackenzie Eiver and north of the resouroeB of
_ , _,, T , r^, ,t , ~, - , this great ares-

Great Slave Lake, Of the western affluents of the

Mackenzie enough is known ta show that on the head-
waters of the Peace, Liard and Peel Eivers there are
from 150,000 to 200,000 square miles which may be
considered auriferous, while Canada possesses west of
the Eocky Mountains a metalliferous area, principally of
gold-bearing rocks, 1,300 miles in length with an average
breadth of from 400 to 500 miles, giving an area far
greater than that of the similar mining districts of the
neighbouring Eepublio.

Botmd&rles
and Area of
the Yukon
District.

Character of
the Country.

The Yukon or
Felly Biver.

Dr. Dawecn'B
Ezpeditloii.

The Yukon Goldfields.

The following account of the Yukon Goldfielda
district is embodied in a report J^sued from the office of
the High Commissioner of Canada, August, 1897. '

The Yukon district is a vast and, as yet, little known
tr.i,ct of country which forms the extreme north-westen^
portion of the North- West Territories of Canada. It is
bounded to the south by the northern line of British
Columbia (lat. 60 deg.), to the west by the eastern line of
the United States Territory of Alaska, to the east by the
Eocky Mountain ranges and the 13Gth meridian, and to
the north by the Arctic Ocean. The district has an area
of 192,000 square miles, or about the size of France, and
of this rea 150,768 square miles are included in the
watershed of the Yukon Eiver.

The region as a whole is naturally mountainous in
character, but it comprises as well a lr;rge area of merely
hilly or gently undulating country, besides many wide and
flat-bottomed valleys. It is more mountainous in the
south-east, and subsides generally and uniformly to the
north-westward, the mountains becoming more isolated
and separated by broader tracks of low land. The average
base level may be stated at a little over 2,000 ieet.

The Yukon or Pelly Eiver provides the main drainage
of the region. This river passes from Canadian into
American territory at a point in its course 1,600 m'les
from the sea. The 200 miles of its course in Canada
receives the waters of all the most important of its
tributaries — the Stewart, Macmillan, Upper Pclly, Lewes,
White Eiver, etc. — each with an extensive subsidiary
river system, which, spreading out like a fan towards the
north-east, east, and south-east, facilitate access into the
interior.

In 1887 an expedition was despatched by the
Canadian Government to the Yukon country, under the
personal charge of Dr. G. M. Dawson, now Director of
the Geological Survey of the Dominion, and that gentle-

man's exhaustive report, published among tne proceedings
of the survey in 1888, contains the most authentic
information at present available on the geology, topo-
graphy, and general characteristics of the district.

The immediate necessity for the exploring and
surveying work undertaken by the expedition arose from
the fact that somewhat important developments of placer
gold-mining had been attractin.j a yearly increasing
number of miners and prospectors into a portion of the
region in question ; and the work decided on included
also the preliminary determination of the point at which
the Yukon or Pelly Eiver crossed the 141st meridian,
which line constitutes the boundary between the
Canadian North- West Territories and Alaska.

So far as is known, it was as late as the year 1878 that The first Goia-

prospeotora.

the first gold-prospector entered the country, and from

that time onwards small parties of miners and prospectors

regularly have made their way thither. The route

generally taken is vid the head of Lynn Canal by the

Chilkoot Pass and the Lewes Biver, whose upper waters

lie within thirty miles of tide water. While gold has been Rfycia*"*"®

found from the outset in the bars of the Lewes Biver and

its affluents, it was generally in unremunei'ative quantities

for the conditions under which mining could be conducted

in that remote and difficult region. In 1881, however,

paying placers were found along the Big Salmon Eiver.

In 1882 the Upper Pelly Eiver was prospected, and in

1884 mining operations were successfully carried on on

that river and the Tes-lin-too, a southern tributary of the

Lewes. In 1885 mining was begun along the Stewart

Eiver, which soon attracted the greater part of the mining

population. Cassiar Bar, on the Lewes, with rich

deposits, was discovered early m 1886 ; while in the

autumn of that year came the sensational discovery of

" course gold " on Forty-mile Creek, still further c'own

the main river than the Stewart. The announcement of

this fact drew off nearly the entire mining population to

that place in 1887. , .

Dr. Damon's
Reportk

Gold yields on
the Lewes and
Tes-lin-too
Elvers.

Gold on the
hig Salmon
and Upper
Pelly Kivers.

Yield on the
Stewart River.

Forty-Mile
Creek.

Of the results of the gold discoveries to that date,
Dr. Dawson writes as follows in his report : —

" Taking a general view of the gold discoveries so far
as made in the Upper Yukon country, we find that,
though some small bars have been worked on the upper
part of the Lewes, and ' prospects ' have been obtained
even in the streams flowing into Bennett Lake, paying
bars have been f ouna on this river only below the mouth of
the Tes-lin-too. The best of these are within a distance
of about 70 miles below this confluence, and the richest
so far has been Cassiar Bar. This is reported to have
yielded, in some cases, at the rate of 30 dollars a day to
the hand, and gold to the value of many thousand
dollars hag been obtained from it, chiefly in 1886. In
1887 only three or four men worked here. All along the
Lewes below the Tes-lin-too many bars occur which,
according to the reports of prospectors, yield as much as
10 dollars a day ; and the same is true of the Tes-lin-too
itself, both below and above Tes-lin Lake. Bars of this
kind are, however, considered scarcely remunerative at
present.

" Gold has also been found for a long distance up
the Big Salmon Eiver, and on the Upper Pelly as far as
it has been prospected. The Tes-lin-too, Big Salmon
Eiver, and Pelly have each already atforded some good
paying ground, but in consequence of the rusli to Forty-
Mile Creek only about 13 miners remained in 1887 on the
first-named river, four on the second, and two on the
Pelly. On the Stewart Eiver, as much as 100 dollars a
day to the hand was obtained in 1885 and 1886, and
probably over 100,000 dollars worth of gold has already
been obtained along this stream. It has been prospected
for a distance of 100 jto 200 miles from its mouth
(according to varying statements), and the gold found
furthest up is said to be somewhat ' coarser ' than that
of the lower part.

" Forty-Mile Cieek is reported to be a river of some
size, but more rapid than most of those in the district.

It has, according to miners, been prospected for about
ICO miles from its mouth, gold being found almost every-
where along it as well as in tributary gulches. The gold
varies much in character, but is quite often coarse and
nuggety, and very large amounts have been taken out in
favourable places by individual miners. Few of the
men mining here in 1887 were content with grcmd
yielding less tlian 14 dollars a day, and several had taken
out nearly 100 dollars a day for a short time. The
amount obtavied from this stream in 1887 is reckoned
by some as high as 120,000 dollars, but I believe it would
be safe to put the entire output of the Upper Yukon region
for the year at a minimum of 75,000 dollars, of which
the greatest part was derived from this stream.

*• The number of miners in the whole Upper Yukon
country in 1887 may be stated at about 250 ; of these,
200 were on Forty-Mile Creek, and it was estimated that
at least 100 would winter on the creek to be ready for
work in the spring.

" Forty-Mile Creek is what the miners term ' a bed-
rock creek' — i. e., one in which there is no great depth
of drift or detrital deposits below the level of the
actual stream. It is so far the only locality which has
been found to yield ' coarse gold,' but from the extremely
wide distribution of 'fine gold ' it may safely be predicted
that many more like it remain to be discovered.

" Mining can scarcely be said to have begun in the done^hithi^*
region more than five years ago, and the extent of country
over which gold has been found in greater or less quantity
is already very great. Most of the prospecting has been
confined to the banks and bars of the larger rivers, and it
is only when their innumerable tributary streams begin
to be closely searched, that * gulch diggings ' like those of
Dease, McDame, and other streams in the Cassiar district,
and possibly even on a par with Williams and Lightning
Creeks in Cariboo, will be found and worked. The general
result 80 far has been to prove that six large and long
rivers — the Lewes, Tes-lin-too, Big Salmon, Pelly, Stewart
and White — yield 'fine gold' along hundreds of miles "

Dr. Davson's
opinion of
tntnie
ptoBpeots.

of their lower courses. With the exception of the Lewea,
no part of the head waters of any of these have yet been
prospected or even reached by the miners, and scarcely
any of their innumerable tributaries have been examined.
The developments made up to this time are sufficient to
show that when means of access are improved, important
bar-mining will take place along all these main-rivers, and
there is every reason to anticipate that the result of the
examination in detail of the smaller streams will be the
discovery of much richer auriferous alluviums. When
these have been found and worked, quartz-mining will
doubtless follow, and the prospects for the utilisation of
this great mining field in the near future appear to me
to be very promising."

{For distances and further particulars of the streams
and resources of this territory, see Index.)

The name
" Kloudyke."

The Klondyke River and District.

William Ogilvie, of the Department of the interior, in
his report to the Surveyor-General of Canada, dated
November 6th, 1896, says the name Klondak, Klondyke,
or Clondyke, as it is variously spelled, is "a mispronun-
ciation of the Indian word or words Thron-dak or Duick,"
which means plenty of fish, from the fact that it is a famous
salmon stream. It is marked Tondack on old maps. It
joins the Yukon from the east a few miles above the site
of Fort Eeliance.

The first

discovery

of Gold ou the

Klondyke.

Concerning the discovery of gold on this stream he
says : — " The discovery, I believe, was due to the reports
of Indians. A white man named G. W. Carmach, who
worked with me in 1887, was the first to take advantage
of the rumors and locate a claim on the first branch,
which was named by the miners Bonanza Creek.
Carmach located here late in August, but had to cut some
logs for the mill here to get a few pounds of provisions
to enable him to begin work on his claim, the fishing
at Klondak having totally failed him. He returr i with

■'%..■,■

a few weeks' provisions for himself, his wife and brother-
in-law (Indians), and another Indian, in the last days of
August and immediately set about working his claim. As
he was very short of appliances he could only put together
a rather defective apparatus to wash the gravel with. The
gravel itself he had to carry in a box on his back from 30
to 100 feet. Notwithstanding this the three men working Splendid
very irregularly washed out 1,200 dollars in eight days,
and Carmach asserts with reason that had he had proper
facilities it could have been done in two days, besides
having several hundred dollars more gold, which was lost
on the tailings through defective apparatus. On the same
creek two men rocked out 75 dollars in about two hours,
and it is asserted that two men in the same creek took out
4,008 dollars in two days with only two lengths of sluice
boxes. This last is doubted, but Mr. Leduc assures me
he weighed that much gold for them, but is not positive
where they got it. They were newcomers and had not
done much in the country, so the probabilities are they
got it on Bonanza creek. A branch of Bonanza, named ^°K]o^|yij^
Eldorado, has prospected magnificently, and another jj^amiflcentiy
branch named Tilley Creek has prospected well ; in all
there are some four or five branches to Bonanza Creek
which have given good prospects. There are about 170
claims staked on the main creek and the branches are
good for about as many more, aggregating say 350 claims
which will require over 1,000 men to work properly.

A few miles further up Bear Creek enters Klondak, ^i^nuruia

and it has been prospected and located on. Compared a^'erfuj

with Bonanza it is small and will not afford more tha. '"™*'-
20 or 30 claims, it is said.

About 12 miles above the mouth Gold Bottom Creek
joins Klondak; and on it and a branch named Hunker
Creek after the discovery very rich ground has been
found. One man showed me 22-75 doUai^. he took
out in a few hours on Hunker Creek with a gold pan
prospecting his claim on the surface, taking out a panful
here and there as fancy suggested. On Gold Bottom

Creek and branches there will probably be two or three
hundred claims. The Indians have reported another
creek much farther up, which they call Too Much Gold
Creek, on which the gold is so plentiful that, as the
miners say in joke, " You have to mix gravel with it to
sluice it." Up to date nothing definite has been heard
from this creek.

Boope on the
Klondyke
gold fields.

Indian OsMk.

The Stewaxt
Bivei.

From all this we may, I think, infer that we have
here a district that will give 1,000 claims of 500 feet in
length each. Now, 1,000 such claims will require at
least 8,000 men to work them properly, and as wages for
working in the mines are from 8 to 10 dollars per day,
without board, we have every reason to assume that this
part of om: territory will in a year or two contain 10,000
souls at least, for the news has gone out to the coast, and
an unprecedented influx is expected next spring. And this
is not all, for a large creek called Indian Creek joins the
Yukon about midway between Klondak and Stewart river,
and all along this creek good pay has been found. All
that has stood in the way of working it heretofore has
been the scarcity of provisions and the diflSculty of
getting them up there even when here. Indian Creek is
quite a large stream, and it is probable it will yield 500 or
600 claims. Farther south yet lies the head of several
branches of Stewart Eiver, on which some prospecting
has been done this summer, and good indications found,
but the want of provisions prevented development.

Good qaartz
on Klondyke
tributaries.

Good quartz has been found in place just across the
line on Davis Creek (see my map of the 141st . . . ),
but of what extent is unknown, as it is in the bed of the
creek and covered with gravel. Good quartz is also
reported on the hills around Bonanza Creek ; but of this
I will be able to speak more fully after my proposed
survey. It is pretty certain, from information I have got
from prospectors, that all, or nearly all, of the northerly
branch of "White Eiver is on our side of the line, and
copper is found on it, but more abundantly on the
southerly branch of which a great deal of it is in our

territory also ; so it is probable we have that metal too.

I have seen here several lumps of native copper brought ^pp" *°*

by the natives from White Kiver, but just from what part

is uncertain. I have also seen a specimen of Silver ore

said to have been picked up in a creek flowing into

Bennett Lake, about 11 miles down it on the east side."

(For distances and further particulars, see Index).

Bishop GLUT'S Evidence.

In the Peace and Liard rivers certainly there is gold rivers ris^g
in large quantities. It is found in the sand bars, and I l,°tween°tiw*'
fancy that mines will be found in tho Eocky Mountains, Mackcmiie
and that the gold is carried from that part the same as Rivers,
in British Columbia. ... I should imagine there
are considerable veins of gold in the Bocky Mountains.

Extracts from the Report of Mr. WILLIAIM OGILVIE,
Dominion Land Surveyor.

I have heard the amount of gold taken from the Mining on the

, Stewart Biver.

Stewart Eiver in 1885 and 1886 estunated at various

amounts. . . . Many agree that 30 dollars (£6 5s.) per

day, per man, was common on many of the bars of the

river, and instances of as high as 100 dollars per day

having been earned were spoken of.

I cannot here enter into the reasons for it, but I ^J|,^i,g
unhesitatingly make the assertion that this corner of our ™*^"4"fi?'l
territory from the coast strip down and from the 141st meridian
meridian eastward will be found to be a fairly rich and
very extensive mining region.

Up to date of mailing, November 22nd, (1896,) very fa^'ooodX^
rich prospects have been found on the few claims gf^*"*"!*'
prospected on : from one dollar to the pan of dirt up to
12 dollars are reported and no bed-rock found yet. This
means from 1,000 to 12,000 dollars per day per man
sluiciug.

ly.

F 2

CuDAHT, 9th Deoember, 1896.

MarveUoasIy
rifih yields.

The richest
mining area
ever found :—
official report.

Since my last the prospects on Bonanza Creek, a
tributary of the Klondyke, and tributaries are increasing
in richness and extent until now it is certain that millions
will be taken out of the district in the next few years.

On some of the claims prospected the pay dirt is of
great extent and very rich. One man told me yesterday
that he washed out a single pan of dirt on one of his
claims and found £3 worth of gold in it. Of course, this
may be an exceptionally rich pan, but 5 to 7 dollars per
pan is the average on that claim it is reported, with 5
feet of pay dirt and the width yet undetermined, but it
is known to be 30 feet, even at that ; figure the result at
9 to 10 pans to the cubic foot and 600 feet long : nearly
4,000,000 dollars at 5 dollars per pan, one-fourth of this
would be enormous.

CuDAHY, 11th January, 1897.

Some of the claims are so rich that every night a few
pans of dirt suffices to pay the hired help when there is any ;
as high as 204 dollars has been reported to a single pan but-
this is not generally credited. Claim owners are now
very reticent about what they get, so you can hardly
credit anything you hear ; but one thing is certain — w»j
have one of the richest mining areas ever found with a
fair prospect that we have not yet discovered its limits.

Extracts from the Report by R. Q. McOONNELL, B.A., of the
Geological Survey Department of Canada, 1888-89.

Banks of Macken'.le Delta and the Peel Eiver are;
composed of alluvial sands and clays.

The "Daily Chroniole," 5th August, 1897, states:—

Of all the 800 claims staked out on Bonanza Creek
and Eldorado Creek not one has proved a blank.
Equally rich finds were made on June 6th to 10th on
Dominion Creek. Not less than 300 claims have been
staked out on Indian Creek, and the surface indications
are that those are as rich as any of the others. The
largest nugget found was picked up by B. Hudson on
Claim 6, on the Bonanza, and was worth 257 dollars.
Next in size was one found by J. Clements on Indian
Creek, worth 231 dollars. Bigger pockets have been
struck in other regions, but nowhere has so general a
find been made.

Every claim
peReed out a

Erize; no
lauka.

" In all, about seventy-five lucky miners have reached Portnnestakea

*' •' . out In one

St. Michael's. Some brought but a portion of their season.

elea,n-up, preferring to invest other portions in claims
they know to be rich. Among the most lucky are J. J.
Clements, of Los Angeles, who cleaned up about 175,000
dollars. The last four pans Clements took out were
worth 2,000 dollars, and one went 775 dollars. He
brought out 50,000 dollars, and invested the rest. Pro-
fessor Lippy, of Seattle, brought out about 50,000 dollars,
and he has 150,000 dollars in sight, and claims his mine
is worth 500,000 dollars, or more. W. Stanley, of
Seattle, also cleaned up 112,000 dollars ; C. Berry,
110,000 dollars; H. Anderson, 55,000 dollars; P. Keller,
50,000 dollars ; T. J. Kelly, 38,000 dollars ; W. Sloan,
of Nanaimo, 85,500 dollars ; and at least thirty more
vrho did not talk, but stood guard over their treasure
in the state room. Then there are about twenty more
men bringing from 5,000 dollars to 20,000 dollars. All
this gold is the clean up on last winter's work. It must
come out via St. Michael's, and the bulk of the supplies
must go in that way. The two great transportation
compan' pushing in supplies, are the North American
Trading c.ud Transportation, and the Alaska Commercial
Company."

The following appeared In the " Daily Telegraph '
August 12th, 1897:—

goM washed' "^^ Conversation with a representative of Renter's

dSlifers^hand. ^B^^^V' ^^' Harry de Windt communicated his impres-
pan. sions regarding the goldfields at Klondyke.

** He said : ' There is no doubt that extraordinary
rich finds have been made at Klondyke, although it is
not possible to vouch for the accuracy of a great many
of the accounts. Mr. Ogilvie, the Dominion Government
Surveyor in Alaska, with whom I stayed just a year ago
to-day, has since written home saying, that he had, with
his own hands, washed 560 dollars worth of gold out of
one pan. Another case for which I can vouch is that
of a fireman on board one of the Yukon River steamers,
who last year was earning 8 dollars a month, and has
just returned here with 170,000 dollars worth of nuggets
and dust.'"

In the "Financial Guide" of August 9th, 1897, appeared
the following : —

No ui-fpunaed "Klondike practically defies competition. In the

country ''reeks course of the present century there have been several

* rushes ' to so-called mining camps, but the present
excitement has a solid foundation. Klondike is not a

* pocket ' district. It is gold bearing throughout, and its
water-courses, as we are told in an American despatch,
'literally reek of gold.' One can best judge of the
importance of the wonderful finds at Klondike by the
value of the precious metal won there in a few months."

" Daily Telegraph," 22nd July, 1 897.

" A telegram from New York, daiod July 23rd says,
that there were on that date still 4,000,000 dollars of
gold dust to come down from St. Michael's. The

special correspondent of the Daily Telegraph wired on
July 22nd :—

" 'The Dominion Government at Ottawa, is using n^Jilo^'he"**'
every effort to complete the organisation of the district *'^^,J^
in which the goldfields recently discovered along the corroborated.
Klondyke and other creeks are situated. This action
has been taken in view of the fact that the Government
is in possession of information which corroborates the
first accounts given of the richness of these placer
diggings.' "

" Under date July 25th, Eeuter's special corre-
spondent at Victoria (British Columbia) wires : —

" Never in the history of the Pacific Coast has there 250.000 square

, , .. . ■ . Li.' 't L 3 miles declared

been such excitement as is at present bemg manifested by Dr. Dawson

in connection with the recent gold discoveries on the r?ch^in*eoid.^

Klondike placers, which undoubtedly appear to be the

richest ever found. Their actual extent is unknown,

but the total area of the auriferous region in Canada,

in which they are situated, extends to nearly a quarter

of a million square miles. Dr. Dawson, of the Geological

Survey, classed this whole area alike, and gold-bearing •

gravels have been found in the bed of every stream."

" Accounts received from the mines tell of fabulous au accounts
richness. No one knows how much gold has been taken fabufoua tich^^
out. Miners have brought out all they could carry, and country*'^^
others have remained behind because they have found
more gold than they could bring away.

" One man speaks of seeing in one cabin four five-
gallon cans full of gold dust. Another tells of a bank
out of which nuggets stuck like pebbles.

"Dougall Mc Arthur, a miner, who has returned Reports not
with a fortune, stated yesterday, that the reports of ^^^^sgerated.
fortunes being made in a day are not exaggerated. He
declares that there is no danger of the country becoming
overcrowded, as there are mines enough for all."

SfdSffiSthe "^'- ^®"T (M'- Clarence Berry, of Fresno, Cali-

J^* to the *pan ^^^^'^t "^^^f together with his wife, went to Klondike
notoncommou three years ago), says, 'Klondike is the richest goldfield
in the world.' Some of the pay streaks are nearly all
gold. One thousand dollars to the pan is not uncommon,
and over 100 ounces have been taken out in a single pan.
It is not unusual, Mr. Barry says, to see men staggering
along with all the gold dust they can carry.

Even women " * Several women have recently returned from Klon-
Bxnau lottones. dike, with gold dust valued at from 10,000 dollars to
60,000 dollars which they had dug up themselvee.

" ' Thousands of gold seekers of both sexes, and all
classes, are hurrying to the Pacific coast cities in the
hope of reaching Klondike, content with any mode of
getting there.

SstriiStao'/'the " ' '^^ Alining towns in Colorado, CaUfornia, and

Bo°th being Montana, are being deserted by the miners ; every man
with sufficient money is starting for Klondike. The
same feverish excitement prevails in San Francisco and
other Pacific coast cities, and the remotest parts of the
country are rapidly catching the infection. Men of all
classes are throwing up their work and starting for the
land of gold. At Seattle half the poHce force has re-
signed, and the street cars have nearly ceased runningi
as a result of men leaving for Klondike.' "

G^jW b«ing " According to the special correspondent of the British

the field by the Columbia Beview the shipments of gold from Klondike

ton even dnriug

this first season for the scasou approximate {^20,000,000 equal to
£4,000,000 sterling. Says the journal in question : —

" The richness of the auriferous gravel deposits on the
banks of the Yukon River have been known and
recognised on the Pacific seaboard for several yeais,
but every succeeding summer has brought reports of
new discoveries on the higher reaches of the river or
tributaries, and coarse gold-dust has found its way into

the banks, until the reoent arrival of two steamers at
San Francisoo with upwards of two tons of bullion from
the Klondike diggings has created an excitement in
Western America unparalelled since the CaUfomian gold
rush of '49 and the Cariboo excitement of 1858. Much
of the dust lately brought down is very coarse, and the
emptying of leather sacks on the bank counters, where
several hundredweight of gold could be seen in one
heap, has sent up a real and intense gold fever, the
effects of which are plainly discernible in London.

To quote the New York correspondent of the Daily
Mail: —

" * The continued excitement over the Klondike gold "^^a^^^o^gjjj
discoveries, and a widespread demand for information tha reports of

. rapid fortune!

about goidfields have resulted in the leading newspapers being made.

throughout the country issuing special supplements
to-day, giving reports from Klondike, as well as the
cost and the methods of getting there, and other useful
information. The New York papers devoto great space
to interviews with lucky men from Klondike, who con-
firm the recent reports of rapid fortunes made in the
diggings.' . .

New York " Tribune," July 14th, 1897.

The San Frsmcisco correspondent of the Tribune gives
some interesting particulars regarding the recent dis-
coveries. He writes : —

'• Forty Alaska miners came in here to-day (July 14) miners arriving
by the steamer " Excelsior." bringing over (^500,000 in muuon*'doHari
gold dust from the new Klondike mines. °' *°***

«' T, S. Lippy and his wife, of this city, brought down
^60,000, which represents their work, since April, 1896.
Mrs. liippyi who is a small wiry women, tanned black
by the sun, was the first woman to cross over the divide

from the new Juneau to the new oamp. She did much
'hustling' in the winter, and she showed a noble pair of
moose antlers as a trophy of her skill with the rifle.

SSJffbSSof "As the United States Mint was closed for the day

•ndtaStjMifc' when the miners arrived, they packed their sacks of

gold dust to Selby's office. There a picturesque collection

of bags was produced. Some were made of deer hide,

and held as much as |||2,500.

" Several of the miners ran out of even canvas bags,
and were forced to put their gold in tumblers and fruit
jars, which they covered with writing paper. They
looked like fruit or jelly put up by country housewives.
All the bags were weighed, and then, as fast as the
weight was recorded, they were slit open with a sharp
knife and the contents poured upon the broad coimter,
which has a depression in the middle. The heap of gold
dust looked like a pile of yellow shelled corn.

BKffsof eoid " At Dawson, near the camp, men come in and leave

grocers' saoks of gold dust on deposit, and these are thrown

tm«a of floor. Under the counter by the storekeeper as though they

were bags of flour. The whole country is wild about

discoveries, and everyone who can get an outfit is pouring

into Klondike."

London "Standard" August — .

The following are extracts from an article which
appeared in the London Standard one day last week : —

^"Smationof " '^^^ recent discoveries of gold on the Klondike
veportg. Greek afford ample confirmation of the reports brought

us during the past few years of the auriferous richness

of the Yukon Valley

ufloojm "In 1895 the value of the gold obtained from the

of %r*"*** Yukon placers was 709,000 dollars. Last year the total
■SSm!*****" was more than four times this sum; and this year it

may be anything between ten and twenty times as much.

If there is anything in the rumours which have come

along the last few days, other districts as rich as, or g^iS^SS^'^S

richer than, Klondike have been located. There is g^jft^^ert

nothing inherently improbable m this ; on the contrary, J^^^®*
nothing could be more probable in the circumstances.

"Daily Telegraph," July 2l8t, E897.

" There is every reason to believe that the Klondike ^^[jJlJI^f^ ^^
Gold Field will rival those of California and Australia. Australia.

"Mr. C. H. Mackintosh, Lieutenant-Governor of ^S^oiex-
the Canadian North-West Provinces, admits the truth tremeriohress.
of the reports regarding the extreme richness of the
district."

" Financial News," Ijondon, 26th July, 1897.

" Among the people who have just returned from Marvellous
the new Klondyke gold mines are men who had been for
more than ten years facing the dangers and hardships of
the frozen North in the hope of making a rich find, and
signally failed. Now they come back with fortunes
stowed in their gripsacks and stories of untold millions
to be picked up in the country of which so little is
known.

"Fine gold dust in small quantities was found at Proof of heavy
the mouth of the Porcupine Biver, a stream that joins waters of the
the Yukon about 100 miles west of the boundary. °'°^^

" The gravel is frozen solid the year round, and has Purpose of
3 tha\
separated.

to be thawed out in some way before the gold can be S^rs.° " *""

" Through the ice the miners burned holes with fire,
and then blasted out the pay dirt on the benches of
bed rock."

Blcta prospect
for Tradiug
Companies.

The world's
richest Fields.

Prospects
contmne
tocreasingly
encoaraglng.

Where a
Company's
prospectors
will operate.

An OfDcial
declares the
Roldflelds
to be
inexhaustible.

" The Alaska Mining Becord, published in Jnneatkt
contains letters stating that the stories told are not
exaggerated. ' One hundred dollars to the pan is very
common. One can hardly believe it, but it is true,
nevertheless. A very hard country to live in on account
of the mosquitoes and poor grub, 'but healthy and a
show to make a ten strike.' There is nothing a man
could eat or wear that he cannot get a good price for.
First-class rubber boots are worth from an ounce to
25 dollars per pair. The price of flour has been raised
from i dollars to 6 dollars and was selling at 60 dollars
when we arrived.' Another letter says : — ' It will pay
to bring anything here which can be carried in.' "

"Westminster Gazette," 2l8t July, 1897.

" The latest advices state that discoveries of a sen*
sational chtiracter have been of almost daily occurrence
in the lUondike district, and it seems now beyond doubt
that one of the richest gold-fields hitherto known exists
within Canadian territory on the Yukon."

INSPECTOR GONSTANTINE, January 23rd, 1897.

" Placer prospects continue more and more en-
couraging. It is beyond doubt that three pans on
different claims on Eldorado Greek turned out 204, 212,
and 216 dollars; but it must be borne in mind that
there were only three such pans, though there were
many running from 10 to 50 dollars."

<< There is an immense reach of country beyond
which has not yet been prospected. ... Of all the
200 claims staked out on the Bonanza and Eldorado
Greeks not one has proven a blank."

INSPECTOR STRICKLAND, in the Toronto "Globe,"
August 8rd, 1897:-

He believes the placer goldfields of the country in-
exhaustible, as there are hundreds of streams known to
be goldbearing which have not yet been prospected owing
to scarcity of men and difficulty of getting food. . . .
He had, himself, actually seen one ordinary mining pan
yield 595 dollars worth of gold.

After gold is discovered, the miners cut down a ^eth^of
quantity of timber, and then they bum a hole, or rather goaen earth
two holes, about 6 feet long by 4 feet wide, putting in ^^^^^ ^
two fires in each hole during the day. Each of these
fires will probably bum out about 8 inches of dirt.

The Marvellous richness of Klondyke.

From the " Bullionist," 18th October, 1897.

The news from Klondike is of a mingled character,
but nothing could be more emphatic than statements
contained in the New York papers within the last few
days as to the enormous quantities of gold obtainable in
the neighbourhood. In a dispatch received by the
Journal of that city from Mr. Joaquin Miller, the well- » ,^zzica "
known American poet, who writes from El Dorado »' J^io^'^y'**'
Gulch, Klondike, he says that "he has been fairly
dazzled with gold." He describes in detail sixteen rich
claims, several yielding over 80,000 dollars per foot. One
owned by Captain Ellis, of California, yields over 1,000
dollars per pan, or 10,000 dollars every 24 hours. That
gentleman showed Mr. Miller three bags, each containing
60 lb. of gold dust, also numeroas oyster and tomato
cans and old boxes filled with gold dust, and invited
Mr. Miller and others who were present to help SheipVhein"*
themselves. The latter remarked: "Wherever we go nuggete?
we find men with heaps of gold." On Sunday the
New York Herald pubUshed a communication from Sitka,
in the adjoining American territory of Alaska, announcing
that marvellous gold discoveries had been made in Cook Marvellous"-
Inlet; in the same region. The newly discovered gold- «iiscoTery.
field is said to be easily reached, and to have a mild
climate and a fertile soil.

London "Standard's" Special Correspondent, 26th August, 1897.

It is reported from Klondyke that miners who ^^^j?®*^
possess buckets full of gold are living on two spoonsful potatoes,
•f beans and a bit of bacon daily. A steamer has started
to return to the East with several tons of gold of the
^alue of over three million dollars, heaped on deck, under

tarpaulin, like bo much ooal or potatoes. M'Eay, a
returning miner, says there is more gold than any man
has yet dreamed of. A Correspondent, quoting the
statements of this msui, says the miners' tales make
one's heart jump and the pulse tingle.

From the Special Correepondcnt of "The Standard "of London,

SIst August, 1897.

The steamer ''Portland" having failed to meet at

St. Michael's the Yukon Biver steamer with its tons of

gold worth several millions of dollars, brought to Seattle

only 18 miners with 575,000 dollars of gold. . . . <

offloiai report Mr. Ogilvie the Dominion Land Surveyor, whose

of 70,000.000 -i . i. -i- • XT u 1.

douaraofgoid Capacity or mtegrity .... says, m November he

informed the Authorities of the Dominion that

60,000,000 of gold was in sight. This quantity he now
mcreases to 70,000.000.

ReuteKs Agency, Seattle, August 30th.

The matest The Steamer Portland arrived here to-day. . . .

worid'Bhito?/ She brought gold to the value of about 500,000 dollars
. . . . Old timers, who reahze the state of affairs,
predict death and distress during the winter. Those who
are returning now, however, admit that the strike o£
gold was, and is, one of the greatest in the world's
history. They also predict further gold finds in future

• • • ■

From "Morning Posfs" correspondent.

New York, August 29«A, 1897.

Glowing " The steamer •' Portland " arrived yesterday at

coniiiryB° * Port Angeles with 100,000 dollars in gold, and a party of

^ . . Gold early pioneers returning home from the Klondyke gold-

^ °^^' fields. The passengers are full of glowing descriptions of

the mineral wealth of the country, and speak of goM galore

NewoiBcoTery in all directions. They say nothing of the terrors and priva-

janotiou of tions described by later adventurers in the same region.

Porcupine They speak of a splendid gold discovery in the Monnet

mooeding Greek, 800 miles from the mouth of the Yukon Biver,

§^i^° and outside the ) boundary of British America. The

wealth there is said to exceed that in Klondyke. When

asked to reconcile the smallness of the quantity of gold

brought in his ship with the glowing statements of the*

passengers, the Captain of the " Portland " explained gJSSJ""^
that he was compelled to leave St. Michael's before the gjg^^'^^
arrival of the treasure boat from the Yukon. Mr. Ogilvie ertiin»te.
is quoted as saying that the 600 claims already staked
in the Klondyke region will yield 70,000,000 dollars m
gold to their owners."

"Standard" (London) 27th August, 1897.
Beuteb's — ViCTOBiA (B.C.), August 2Rth.
According to an apparently authentic report from Jjl^^J^^^**
Dawson Cit3% gold to the value of six million dollars is awaiung amp
there awaiting shipment in June.

'* Daily Chronicle," 4th September, 1897.
A report received at the Department of the Interior
to-day (Washington, 3rd September), from the Governor
of Alaska, states that two-and-a-half (2^) tons of gold
dust have been shipped this season from Klondike.

New discoveries of gold are constantly being made.

Mr. Thomas Deasy, Chief Officer of the Fire Depart-
ment of Victoria, British Columbia, writing to Commander
WeUs, B.N., Chief Officer of the Metropolitan Fire
Brigade, on August 27th, 1897, states :

" Situate as the writer is at Victoria, the nearest ThematMi

shipping port to the mines, he has an opportunity to ewtb. ^
truthfully depict everything connected with the greatest
goldfields on earth. From Cassiar to Alaska, covering
thousands of miles of Canadian territory, gold has been
found. Scarcity of provisions and long distance from
civilisation retarded the miner. The frozen North had
terrors which only the most hardy of mankind could
endure. Snow and ice, precipices and gorges, dangerous
rapids on the rivers, impenetrable woods on land, every
mile meant privation. At last a whisper was circulated
in the nearest camps that untold wealth could be found
further up river. Places where miners made good pay
were deserted. Towns and villages added hundreds to f

the rush. Eventually the news reached cities, and
thousands are on tho way to the Mecca of the North.
At the present writing two steamships are on the way

out with tons of gold. The great Yukon oountry is no
place for the 'tenderfoot.' Strong men, with means
enough to outfit for a year or two, will be successful.
The country will produce more wealth each succeeding
o*'°*(Bdu")on y^^^' I* is practically uiideveloped. Hundreds of
tiSie Mackenzie, thousands will Scatter over the numerous creeks and
rivers, eventually opening up mines on the Peace, Pelly,
and Mackenzie. From this city many left in the first mad
rush, and many will return to winter. Those remaining
took into consideration the difiEiculties to be surmounted,
and preferred to await until next spring. If 10,000 men
should delve all the coming winter, only a small expanse
of territory will be opened up.

New Qnld discoveries off great richness.

The first copy of the International, published at the
new town of Warder, on Lake Tagish, in June this year
(1897), states :—

Two prospectors have come in from the middle fork
of the Salmon Eiver, a sect'on that has never been ex-
plored, bringing a quantity of gold taken out there in a
few week's work. The amount of their cleanings was
close to 1,000 dols. An interesting feature of the
matter is that this gold is washed from the decomposed
surface of a mountain which they declare to be all ore.
The mountain is porphyry. The gold is found all
through it. They do not claim the rock is high grade,
but they assert that it is all good ore. A. H. Pettengill,
ex-chief deputy county auditor, who now owns and
operates naining interests on Upper Kettle river in Stevens
Country returned to Colville recently from a trip across
Golville reservation, and if his statements are true, the
portion of the Colville reserve lying along the boundary
line between Stevens and Oakanogan Counties will rivai
even the palmiest days of Cripple Creek. A Mr. Allison
bonded the claim from the original owners for 10,000 dols.
In a very short time he secured 30 sacks of ore. No-
one is allowed to visit the works of the mine, which are
a little more than the mere uncovering of the vein.^

How wide the pay-streak is, is yet a matter of the most
random conjecture, but no one will doubt that it is
wide enough, forout of less than 50 lbs. of the ore from the
ledge, 800 dollars in pure, yellow gold was pestled out in a
common mortar.

A Quartz Reef on the White Poas.

The correspondent of the Pall Mall Gazette writing
from Vancouver, on September 9th (1897), states that news
had just reached Vancouver of the discovery of a ledge
of quartz 20 feet wide, which assayed from 86 to 73 dels.
per ton.

It was discovered by a man named Wade, who, on
a trip from Lake Bennett, at a point contiguous to the
White Pass, picked up four pieces of quartz rich in gold.
He then uncovered the ledge above mentioned with a
wooden spade and took some pieces to the Treadwell
Mine for assay.

A Stupendous Outp.'Jt of Odd predicted for 1898.

The Daily Mail correspondent states in the issue of
October 11th, 1897 — " Judge Malony, of Juneau, Alaska,
who is returning with a party from Elondyke, says that
not one-fifth of the gold now in sight has yet come out
of Elonkyke. He is afraid to offer predictions of a
fabulous yield, lest he might be charged with exaggeration.
Mr. Galvin, of the same party, who sold one claim on
Bonanza Creek for 100,000 dollars, predicted that 250
tons of gold, or 130,000,000 dollars would be shipped
from IQondyke next year. His companion placed the
amount at 800 tons."

"Westminster Gazette," 10th November, 1897.

The son of Mr. Lyman Gage, the Secretary of the PrevionB
Treasury, has just arrived at Butte, California, from the Kiondyke's
Yukon gold district. He confirms previous accounts of confirmed?'**
the richness of the Klondyke Valley, and asserts that
the first steamer that gets away in the spring will bring
15,000,000 dollars worth of gold from the Klondyke.

Interview with Mr. HARRY de WINDT, In "Strand Magazine,"

October, 1897.
The big boom (ou the Yukon) oommenoed in
September, 1896, when one George Gormack found gold
in large quantities. Then came the inevitable rush. In
the following Spring, when water was available, gold
was washed out in pounds' weight. Four pans went as
high as 200 dollars. The pan, about which one hears so
much, is an ordinary sheet-iron thing of 18 inches
circumference and 4 or 5 inches deep. Some men made
money at the rate of 17 dollars per minute, and fortunes
of 100,000 dollars were made in less than two months,
although the miners had only just commenced to work
their claims.

The Great ** Rush '* of 1898.

Mr. H. DE WINDT in the Strand of October, 1897.
The spring of 1898 will see the great rush, but
there's plenty of room. 100,000 miners might go pros-
pecting in the Yukon Valley, and be lost to one another.
My impression is that there are streams richer even than
the Klondike — the Pelly, the Lewes, the Porcupine, the
Big Salmon, the Tanana, the White, the Hootalinqua,
and the Stewart Bivers, for example, especially the
last-named. All are navigable tributaries of the Yukon.

Beuteb's Tbleobam,

Victoria (B. G.),

October 11th, 1897.
Miners are coming out overland from Klondike,
with large amounts in gold and drafts.

They report a shortage of provisions, but declare
that the richness of the goldfields is not exaggerated.

" Daily Mail," 12(^1 October, 1897.
Telegram from its B. G. Gorbespomdent.
One year ago, Alexander Macdonald, a Yukon
prospector, was penniless ; to-day he is believed to be
the richest man in Klondyke, and unable to tell whether
he is worth 5,000,000 or 20,000,000 dollars until the
clean-up next spring. A year ago he could not pay cash
for his food.

Klondyke'8 Marvels, by a Yukon Pioneer.

"Daily Ghroniole," London, 26th October, 1897.

Mr. A. E. Sola, a young Englishman who has made
his fortune at Klondike, is at present on a visit to this
country, writes a Chronicle contributor, and it was my
good fortune to have a chat with him yesterday at the
Hotel Cecil, where he is staying.

Mr. Sola is now managing director of the British
North American Trading and Exploration Company of
New York, having transferred to it for a good round sum
his claims in Klondike, and thus having passed beyond
the miner's stage, is in a position to speak freely touching
Klondike, its hardships and its resources. Mr. Sola can
speak with authority both as to the hardships and
resources of Klondike. He spent from three to four
years out in that terrible region ; though he has amassed
a great fortune, he still shudders to recall the sufferings
lie underwent during his four years' search for gold.

" What is the truth about Klondike, Mr. Sola," I
began. " Is there gold there or not ? "

" Gold. Why there is, in my opinion, so much pro'rtici^«

gold there that gold may yet be demonetised owing to ^^fond'K'^

the prodigious yield which the Klondike district will f^^*-

give. Why, the supply has as yet scarcely been tapped.

There has been up to the present a slight trickle of gold,

but the main stream of precious metal has yet to flow.

I say ' yet,' you observe. The gold standard will not be

with its back to the wall yet awhile, for the reason that

the luck of winning gold at Klondike is surrounded with

such awful hardships and such perils. But when the

difficulties of access to the region have been overcome,

when the transport question has been solved, and the

present comparatively rude methods of getting the gold

have given place to more scientific methods, there will be

a rush of gold from Alaska which will astound the world. There will be a

, msh to

I was there from three to four years, and perhaps I ought Kioudyke that

to know something. . . . To go there without £400 tiie world.

or £500 is to court disaster, disappointment, and possible

death.

« 2

In winter the
KIo .dyke is
reached by
travelling over
the frozen
lakes and
riven.

Heartbreaking
work searching
for gold ou the
Klondyke.

A Miner's Life on the Klondylce.

" Say, now, a man arrives at Dawson City with a
year's supplies," Mr. Sola went on. " He will naturally
wait until the cold weather freezes the river, and he can
take his provisions on a sledge with dogs, if he can buy
the dogs. He locates a claim at last. He has to build a
log cabin, by no means easy work in winter time. He
then builds a big fire, which is left to burn on the bank,
the snow having first been cleared away from the
ground. Th-* fire burns all night, and the next morning
the miner starts to dig the thawed earth. Then he must
put in another fire and again dig, keeping this up imtil he
strikes bed rock, twenty feet down, and perhaps he finds
no gold there in paying quantity. He must build another
fire, and start another hole somewhere else. He will be
disgusted after several of these holes are made, and will
have to clear out and start another claim. Now that may
go on time after time, unsuccessful always until the man's
heart is broken and his patience exhausted. Now that
is what happens in the great majority of cases. A pretty
prospect, isn't it ? "

A new field to
divide

attention with
Klondyke.

A New Field in Alaslca.

8t. James' Gazette, October 18th, 1897.

The New York " Herald " publishes a despatch from
Sitka describing the wonderful gold discoveries at Cook
Inlet, Alaska, in United States Territory. The newly
discovered region is easily reached, and has a mild climate
and fertile soil. A party of miners from th e new gold-
fields have, it is stated, reached Sitka with over 200,000
dollars in gold dust and nuggets. It is generally believed
in New York that this district will divide attention with
Klondike next year.

An Interview witli an Aiaslcan Pioneer.

"Pall Mall Gazette," October 28th, 1897.

Maok™°osh's ^^' ^' ^- Hindo Bowker (whom the Hon. H. C.

aair.pie of Sub- Mackintosh, at a banquet given him in London in

Arctic America ' -nx «. •

September, in reply to Lord Duuenn's compliments^

facetiously intiroduced as an example of the effects of life
in the North "West territories, of Canada on the human
constitution) was recently interviewed by a correspondent
of the Pall Mall Gazette. He stated that ho went to
Alaska with Lieut. Swatka on an expedition to Copper
Eiver and had been there ever since— over nine years —
until ho returned to England.

" A month or so ago, and am going out again as soon
as I can get away.

"I never suffered from want of fresh meat all the Plenty of meat
time I was out there. There are any quantity of Moose
and Cariboo in the interior.

" The climate, is of course, severe to the new comer. |[^i^°J°[* "' "^
The winter is a bit tedious but the yarns of the perpetual Arctic night
Arctic night are the merest bunkum. Even at its worst buniinin.
there is always light from 9 o'clock in the morning to
3 o'clock in the afternoon, and in the summer months it
hardly ever gets dark."

It was not easy to picture to oneself that the tall
indolent figure iu immaculate evening dress, who inter-
spersed his conversation with critical comments on the
quality of his Kiimmel, was the man who, for the last ten Tho effect of

. ten Tears in the

years, had roughed it at the back of the beyond. He seemed, 'ai North west.

as he lolled in a comfortable armchair in front of the fire, to

be recounting, with languid impartiality, the experiences of

another man in whom he was mildly interested, to be

telling, without a tinge of boastfulnoss or vain-glory, a

fltory of very matter-of-fact achievements — a typical

pioneer of the Empire at the end of the nineteenth

century.

" Does it pay, all this?" he continued, in answer to Docs it pay?
a question I had slipped in. "There can bo no doubt
about that. The second year I was out there I washed
out 2,000 dollars worth of gold. And now ? Well, that
is my own business, and no one's else's, isn't it ? But
last year, in Dawson City, I met two partners who had
made 150,000 dollars as the result of two months' work.
Many of the fellows out there made anything between
100,000 dollars and 50,000 dollars during the yc:»r.

Trade with
the NatiTes.

wmn«w-

oomeiB have
aohauoe?

Prospeotson
the Htewart
Biver.

Dawson City, when I left last spring, had about 8,000
inhabitants, and most of them were doing well. No ; all
things considered, when I left, the prices of provisions
were not exorbitant. Two American transport com-
panies were catering for Dawson City, and, on the whole,
traded on fair lines. The normal price of a sack of flour
was about 6 dollars, though in times of scarcity I have
known it go as high as 50 dollars. Beans which, after
flour, was a staple food, were sold for 15 cents a pound ;
a pound of bacon cost 60 cents ; a pound of coffee 25
cents ; a pound of tea one dollar, and so on in proportion
to the goods. The yams of the startling prices you were
just referring to are either apocryphal, or are the result
of exceptional circumstances. Trade with the natives, for
example, deals in fancy values. I, myself, have sold a
sack of flour for 60 dollars. You see, a native comes
along with a leg of moose. He offers it for sale. I ask
him how much he wants for it. He says 60 dollars.
What does he want to buy ? A sack of flour. Well, I
happen to have a sack of flour to dispose of. What is
the price of it ? Sixty dollars 1 Very good ; he will take
that sack at my price, and I get my leg of moose. You
see its nothing but barter on the hard pan, but the figures
are picturesque. This winter there probably will be some
famine prices, and a good deal of real hardship.

" And will the new comers have a chance this
spring ? "

"Certainly. Why not? There is plenty of room
in the country, and there is gold in every creek, I believe.
The Stewart Eiver, for example, has not been touched,
and I should not be surprised if it did pan out richer than
the Klondike. What I should advise young fellows, who
are not afraid of roughing it, to do is to form an expedi-
tion of some ten or a dozen strong. They should make
a headquarter' s camp in some unexploited district, and
then every man ought to go off on his own account and
prospect, with the camp to fall back on. You can cover
a lot of ground by that method. Every man should have
a capital of at least £200, and provisions for two years.

Then, even if he does not strike it rich, he cannot come
to much harm. But it is no use going out there without
some funds, and without proper equipment. Oh, yes,
there will be a big boom in Klondike next spring. And, a wg !.ooni

" . . . nest Spring.

as one result of it, sorae fair rubbish will be shot on the
market over here by the small companies. You see,
J. know the sort of claims some of the promoters have
bought. I could cell you a story about a certain
syndicate. However, I wont. In fact, I could tell you
several stories "

Interview with a Klondyke Miner.

"Star," Ist November, 1897.

Mr. Fred Price, of Wimbledon, who lived at Seattle
for ten years, and then went to the Yukon goldmining in
1894, stated recently to a Star reporter : — " I'll tell you
how rich the diggings are. Imagine a stretch of ground
80 feet wide from Wimbledon to Waterloo. Well, that
is the Bonanza Creek. It yields from 50 to 1,000 eo to i.ooo dois.
dollars a yard. And remember that is merely one pay yard,
streak on the Klondyke."

" What do you think of the Klondyke promotions?"

" I do not think any syndicate has got ^ old of many outiookfor

•^ •' ° ■' syndicates.

first-class claims. You may depend upon it that if a
man has a good one he won't be in a hurry to part with
it." Mr. Price returns to the Klondyke next March to
look after his claim.

Ontario Mining;.

" Times," 12ih October, 1897.

In the opinion of some mining experts the Western
Ontario gold.fi elds are as promising as any recently
exploited. Mr. Blue, Director of the Ontario Bureau
of Mines, who was sent by the Provincial Government
to the newly-discovered fields along the Michipicoten
Paver, reports to the Government a new vein of extra-
ordinary richness struck near Wawa Lake, assaying 600
dollars to the ton, and states that these results seem
likely to be maintained.

"Times" (London), October 13th, 1897 (Reutei's Cable).

^wfl ^ids^rot Miners are coming out overland from Klondike with

exaggerated. large amounts in go] a and drafts. They report a shortage
of pvovisions, but declare that the richness of the gold-
fields is not exaggerated.

"The richest man in the world."

"Canadian Gazette," October 7th, 1897.

Mr. Joaquin Miller, in a recent letter from Dawson
City, speaks of Alex. Macdonald as " The John Mackay
of the Klondike," and adds, concerning him : " They say
Macdonald is a very conservative man in his calculations.
He made his millions by locating claims, having nothing
at all to begin with but a rich claim, not a dollar to buy
with. I hear he is probably the richest man in the
world." Mr. Macdonald referred to is a Canadian, a
native of Ashdale, Antigonish county, Nova Scotia.

The only

trustworthy

inloimatiou.

Mr. OgUrie
admits the
extraordinary
richness of the
gold deposits.

130,000,000 dols.
worth ont of
two creeks
ouly.

Mr. Wm. Ogilvie on the Yulcon Ooldfields.

The " Manchester Guardian," 2l8t October, 1897, from its Corres-
pondeht, Montreal, October 9, states : —

Mr. William Ogilvie, of the Dominion Land Survey,
has returned to the Pacific Coast from the Klondike, where
he has spent the last two years as the representative of
the Dominion Government. Mr. Ogilvie first went into
the Yukon country many years ago to delimit the frontier
of Alaska, and he has been there, with occasional
furloughs, ever since. His official reports give the only
trustworthy information published as to the Klondike
goldfields, and his return to civilisation has therefore been
eagerly looked for. While protesting against the ex-
aggerated reports published in the newspapers as to the
fortunes made in the new goldfields, Mr. Ogilvie admits
that the deposits are of extraordinary richness. In an
interview he has stated that he believes that one hundred
claims on Bonanza Creek and forty on El Dorado will
yield about 60,000,000 dollars before they are exhausted.
In addition to this there is a vast unexplored region from

which returns almost as great may be looked for, and

Mr. Ogilvie estimates that while the greater portion of

the work will be done within the next ten years, there is

every indication that placer work will be continued for at

least twenty years, and tliis without any attention ^eing

paid to the quartz mining which, it is certain, will follow

the hydraulic operations. Talking of the reports of

wonderful amounts of gold taken out in a single pan, Mr. ][^oantB^

Ogilvie gave some of his own experiences. Mr. Ogilvie f^gie pans.

went into one of the richest claims and asked to be

allowed to wash out a panful of gold. The pay streak

then was very rich, but standing at the bottom of the

shaft, looking at it by the light of a candle, all that

could be seen of the pay streak was a yellowish-looking

dirt, with here and there the sparkle of a little gold.

Mr. Ogilvie took out a big panful and started to wash it

out, while several miners stood about guessing as to

the result. Five hundred dollars was the top guess of

the miners, but w^hen the gold was washed, dried, and

weighed it came to a little over 590 dollars. Speaking of

the quartz to be found in the Yukon, Mr. Ogilvie stated

that he had made a number of tests roughly for several

men. One man brought in a sample from a quartz

ledge which he had discovered. Mr. Ogilvie weighed

out several samples, crushed them, washed out the gold,

and found that the ore made 1,000 dollars to the ton Sie*Y^kon

even by that crude method. Other samples he tried ^o*i^wort^f

made 100 dollars more. If the ore had been properly sold to the ton.

crushed and quicksilver used to amalgamate, the results

would presumably have been much higher.

Value of Yukon Qold.

"Engineering and Mining Journal, 9th October, 1897.
According to the officers of the Selby Smelting
Company, gold nuggets from the Yukon are worth from
17 dollars to 18 dollars per oz., and gold dust from 16
dollars to 17 dollars per oz. The Yukon gold contains a
large proportion of silver and some iron, the latter giving
it a fine rich colour.

Section 2. Quartz Reefs in the Moun-
tains and at the Headwaters of
the Rivers.

Gold-bearlne
quartz
picked tip.

The quarts
from whicu all
this gol i)(l^
come will yv*<
be discovere ^

Oold-boarlng
quartz found
at nnmerons
places in this
North-West
Territory.

Good quartz
found on the
liillB.—oopper
and silver also
found.

Extracts from the Report of Mr. WILLIAM OGILVIE, 1896.

Pieces of gold-bearing quartz had frequently been
picked up along the river in the shallow drift, but none
had been found in place, nor did it appear to me that
much search had been made for it (no quartz crushers
being on the field miners had no inducement to look for
quart?: I'oeis).

I think it may, with confidence, be asserted that
rich finds will yet be made of both coarse gold and gold
bearing quartz. It is not likely in the nature of things
that such a vast extent of country should have all its
line gold deposiLed Uo sediment, brought from a distance
in past ages oi the world's development. If this is not
the case, the mafcrix from which all the gold on these
streams has ccne must still exist, in part at least, and
will no doubt be discovered, and thus enrich this other-
wise gloomy and desolate region.

From the indications I have mentioned it will be
seen that this corner of the North-West is not going to
be the least important part of ?.t, more especially when
we consider the fact that gold-oearing quartz has be n
found in it at numerous places, and much will no doubt
be worked.

Good quartz has been found in places just across
the line on Davis Creek. . , . Good quartz is also
reported on the hills around Bonanza Creek. ... I
have soon several lumps of copper brought by th&
natives from White River. ... I have also seen a
specimen of silver ore said to have been picked up in &
Creek flowing into Lake Bennett.

CuDAHT, 22nd January, 1897.

A quartr lode showing fine gold in paying quantities Qnarta fonna.
has been located on one of the creeks, but I cannot yet
send particulars. I am confident from the nature of the
gold found in the creeks that many more of them — and
rich too — ^will bo found.

CuDAHY, 23rd January, 1897.

I have just heard from a reliable source that the
quartz mentioned above is rich, as tested, over 100 dollars
(over £20) to the ton. The lode appears to run from 3
to 8 feet in thickness.

"Financial News," 13th August, 1897:—

Chicago, August 11th. — A gigantic Chicago Cor- Quartz reef
poration, with a capital of £5,000,000, has been or- companies
ganised to get at the gold quartz mines in Eastern
Alaska. John Cudahy, the packer, is at the head of the
Company. New York and London syndicates are, it is
alleged, trying to get the property, but without success.

Extract from inspector Constantine's Repoil, January 20th, 1896.

" The country is full of quartz ledges, more or less Quartz
valuable, and it only requires a short way of getting in prospecta
from the south, with the assurance of a certainty of
supplies, in order to develop them. . . . In a
country where a man has to pole up a rapid river for
some hundreds of miles in summer, then pack his food,
clothing, camping and working tools on his back, or in
winter either haul himself or with a dog, consideration
as to where he can get his food and clothing is of vital
importance to him, and he is governed accordingly.
This accounts for the number of men working on the fo'^f^n^*"
Forty-Mile and creeks emptying into it. Even here transportation
food has to be packed on men's backs in the summer at a
charge of Is. Cd. per pound, and in winter by dogs at
5d. per pound. This is for about 85 miles only. ...

The Peel River
route \7lll
reach the
richest
Btreams.

Means required
for getting
Qaartz
Machinery
on the field.
See Feel Biver
rente.

The work done so far has shown up a large yield of
gold. . . . The true value of the mineral wealth of
this part of the country will not be known for many
years, as new discoveries are being made each season.
. . . Gold has also been found on Indian Greek,
Squaw Creek, and other small streams flowing into
Yukon from the Eastward."

The best paying streams are those running into the
Yukon from the East.

Extraot from Inspeotor Gonstantine's Report, November 20th, 1896.

" Many old miners state that this Creuk (the
Klondyke) is fully as rich as any found in California in
the early days. New creeks are being found daily, all
prospecting well. . . . Without doubt before long
rich quartz will be found, but not worked until some
means of transporting the necessary heavy machinery is
provided and supplies can be got in at reasonable cost."

iCQO per ton
qaartz reefs.

On January 23r(i, 1897 :—

" A quartz lode showing free gold has been located
on one of the creeks. The quartz I understand from a
reliable source, is rich, as tested over 100 dollars to the
ton. The lode appears to run from 3 to 8 feet in
thickness, and lies about 19 miles from the Yukon
Eiver. Coal is found on the upper part of Klondike, so
that the facilities for working are good and convenient.

QnartB lodes
practically
fnezhaustlble
1 000 dollars to
the ton.

"Standard" 31 8t August, 1897.

... He (Mr. Ogiivie) also tested the quartz and
found it yielded at the rate of 1,000 dollars per ton. . .
The quartz lodes are practically inexhaustible.

"Daily Chronicle" Correspondent's interview with Dr. GEO. HA.
DAWSON, C.M.Q., F.G.8,, Ottawa, August 16th, 1897.

The monnteins «« The entire range of mountains which extend more

to the Arctic "

Sea rich In or less Continuously from the extrems end of South

minerals.

America to the Arctic regions is rich in minerals.

Take .... for example .... until the
recent Klondike discoveries appear to throw previous
placer mining into the shade. ...

. . . . Where such large deposits of heavy Bich quartz in

t 13 1- t t 3 LA. LA. V. i the hills where

placer gold have been found there must have been at the rWers riM.
some time large quantities of gold in quartz at no very
great distance, and these quartz veins still exist.

Financial Bulletin, August 2l8t, 1897,
Another phase of the possibilities of the Pllondike There must

■*■ , be contiguous

that has been overlooked is the fact that where there is quarts ledges,
so much placer gold in the beds of streams there must be
contiguous quartz ledges. "When the placer gold becomes
scarce, ledges will be searched for and found, and then a
second era of prosperity will have come, which will be
more lasting than that which is now in progiess. — The
Boslander, July 27th, 1397.

Section 3* Source of the Klondyke
Placer Gold.

"Chambers' Journal," September 4th, 1897.

There is no reason to suppose that even the Klondyke
is the very richest of the rivers which flow down from
the Eockies and carry with them the drift from the
auriferous rocks. Between the left bank of the Yukon
and this mountain range is a vast region absolutely
untrodden by man. It contains, in the upper reaches of
the Stewart and Macmillau Eivers, hundreds of creeks Gold on the
quite as favourable for the reception of floating particles of^l ^ew«t
of gold as the IGondyke. And even this river remains R"?eS!"'""**°
unexplored beyond the place which the Indians know as
Too-much-Gold Creek. Dr. Dawson estimates that the
auriferous alluvium in and around the Yukon watershed

Tta« placers
have their
origin iu the
Rocky
Mountains.

Qnartz reefs
extending to
the Kooky
Moontains.

is spread over an area of a round quarter of a million
square miles. This estimate takes no account of the
possibilities of lode-mining in the hills where the quartz
veins exist. The placers of the Klondyke appear, as we
have hinted, to have their origin in the Bookies ;
but no scientific investigation has yet been made with the
idea of locating the veins, and of ascertaining their
approximate extent. But a United States Geological
Survey party last year found in a range of small
mountains situated between the Yukon and the Tanana
and crossing the Alaskan boundary in a north-easterly
direction not far from Forty-Mile Creek, evidences of
quartz gold which persisted for over 600 miles and gave
promise of the presence of the metal ' in well-nigh un-
limited ' quantities. This range joins the Kocky Mountains
a little north of the Arctic Circle.

{See also Section 2.)

Tbe origin of
gold ill the
Bocliies Aviiere
the Btpwart,
Macinillan and
Klondyke
rivers xiae.

Quartz Reefs In the Rockies towards the Mackenzie

River.

The •' Investors' Review," October, 1897.

The United States Geological Survey has discovered
auriferous rocks of " well-nigh unlimited capacity " in a
range of low hills running between the Yukon and the
Tanana to the north-east, and crossing from American into
British territory near Fortj^-Mile Creek. But the veins
from which the fine gold of the Klondyke creeks has
been washed by the action of running water rmist be
located in the Rocky Mountains which trend to the north-
west between the Yukon and the Mackenzie, and in
which the Klondyke, Stewart, Macmillan, Pelly and
other rivers take their rise.

Quartz Reefs on Stewart River and Headwaters.

"Globe," 9th August, 1897.

Writing from San Francisco, a CDrrespondent of the
New York Tribune says : — ... The latest rumour
from Alaska is of wonderfully rich quartz in large

quantitiefl on the Stewart Eiver ... the ledge a
large one . . . rock asBays 300 dols. . . . This,
if true, means much for the Klondike district.

The Stewart River runs into the Yukon not far ^^"^IfJl
above Dawson, and it is reasonable to suppose that the J^j^^^f °* "*•
placer gold now being found below may have its origin
in the mountains at the head of Stewart River and
neighbouring streams.

Formation of the Yukon Qoidfields.

The following recapitulation of a long Ariicle upon
the Alaskan Goldfields follows an Article in the London
Mining Journal, of October 2nd, 1897, by Russell L.
Dunn, M.E., from the Mining and Scientific Press.

1. The placers are derived from the direct erosion Derivation ct
of gold-bearing lodes in place by frost and flowing water.

placers.

2. The placers are the beds of the first few cutting Typo of the
channels that the living streams made in eroding the flat
valleys they now flow in. These old beds, lying side by %

side, aggregate a width several times the living river, but
at the same time have several times less width than the
valleys. The old beds preserve an approximately direct
course through the linear extent of the valleys, and have
the same grade as the valleys. The old beds are not
exposed at the surface, but are covered with from 8 to
20 feet of silt, so that there is no surface indication of
their locus beneath the silt. (This is the type of placer;
there are, of course, modifications of it likely to be
found.)

3. The richness of the Klondyke placer discovery Richness of

is likely to be equalled by many discoveries yet to be placers^*

made, and is possible of being exceeded in richness by exw^'edby

some of them. fcerie..

The sonroM
of the Gold
at tbe up-
Btream end of
the placers.

Plaoer Gold
Dot the resntt
of glacier
erosion.

Character of
the country ;
the placer
ground frozen
to the bedrock.

4. Tho lodes from which the gold of the placers
has come, are, for the greater number, at or about the
up-stream end of the placers. The lessor number of
them may be, however, considerably farther down stream,
and some even exist wholly within the placers. These
lodes have not been eroded very deeply ; and so closely
arc they connected with the placers, that richness in tho
latter furnishes a presumption of richness in the former.

5. Certain popular opinions, and some so-called expert
ones as well, are absolutely to be rejected as erroneous.
The gold was not broken out of the rock and distributed
by glaciers. If it were in Alaska, one would naturally
search for gold in moraines and not in flat valleys, far
away from them. Gold does not "flow " now, and never
did ; otherwise it would bo in the living rivers as much
as in others. Every valley and flat in the auriferous
region does not contain placers. All the bedrock under-
lying a valley in which a placer has been found is not a
"plaoer"; it is not possible to find gold everywhere in
such valleys as the Klondyke, for example. The entire
length of a placer is not of possible equal richness, nor
is the locus of the portion of greater richness an uncertain
or indeterminate fact.

6. To the preceding add that the surface of the
country, valley and mountain is covered with a deep
strong growth of moss ; that the silt and am'iferous sand
of the valleys beneath the moss is perpetually frozen to
the bedrock; that from these physical conditions the
methods of prospecting for placers and lodes employed
elsewhere are impossible of application here; and one
has clearly in view the special and, in part, unique mining
conditions of the Yukon Goldfields.

(See also Section 2.)

"Westminster Gazette," 24th. August, 1897.

Eioh gold An interesting item appears to-day in the Morning

Seadwatersof Posfs Now York letter to the effect that the nuggets

SUb^c'S?"^'" brought to Seattle from the North- West Goldfields by

Mountains. ^j^^ Starr on Saturday are of such different formation

from nuggeto which have previously arrived from
Klondyke that experts believe they probably did uot
oome from the placer mines with which the world is
now 80 familiar. These experts have for some time
believed in the existence of ledges of rich gold quartz at
the head waters of the Klondyke Biver, and the nature
of the samples in question confirms them in their
opinion. .^, -

•■ .. . ■•#t ■ , »■

Section 4. Other Minerals, '^•^-i^-v.^v^

General Summary from the Cnmmittee. ■ '*

Other mineral productions in this (the N. W. Torri- » '

tories) area are silver, copper, iron, graphite, ochre,
brick and pottery clay, mica, g3rpsum, lime and sand-
stone, sand for glass and moulding, and asphaltum,
while the petroleum area is so extensive as to justify
the belief that eventually it will supply the larger part ..
of this .(the American) continent and be shipped to
England.

Salt and sulphur deposits are less extensive, but the salt, ooai,
former is found in crystals equal in purity to the best fron ot'^ett
Bock salt, and in highly saline springs, while the latter vSu™*"'''*
is found in the form of pyrites, and the fact that these
petroleum and salt deposits occur mainly near the line
of division between deep water navigation and that
fitted for lighter craft, gives them a possible great com-
.mercial value.

Evidence of the Rev. E. PETITOT.

The Gorges or Eamparts of the Porcupine Eiver The great
offer a vast and magnificent field to the geologist and posits of the
the mineralogist. Biver.

Tho Neptanian and Plutonian elements have nnited
there to fonn rocks and soils of an extremely varied
nature. . . . Goal, anthracite, gneiss, red ochre,
trap, porphry, marble, feldspar— pure and rose- veined,
all the varieties of granite, gypsum, sulphur, talc, bluj
marl, and a quantity of other mineral substances show
themselves in profusion in this canyon. Moreover, the
rocks, by their singular and capricious forms, as well as
by their striking, and one might say, improbable colours,
present to the brush of the landscape artist scenery of a
rare and striking character.

Evidence of DONALD MolVOR.

ckwi, iron. &c., Iron could be found throughout the whole country,

the Mackenzie Goal in great abundance on banks of the Mackenzie.

White clay on the river most valuable for pottery.

Quantities of lime and sandstone. Of course, petroleum

is well known to be in large quantity.

« Daily Chronicle," July 29tli 1897.
Minenj " Yet the resources of the country are far richer

lesonrceB far ,i • it i -i i t • i. i«

richer than than 18 generally supposed ; it abounds m every direction

suppose . j^ gold, silver, lead, copper and coal, and quite apart

from the recent discoveries in the grim district around

the Yukon River, the immediate future .... is

one full of the brightest promise."

Evidence of M. MoLEOD, Esq., Q.C., Ex-Judge.

Large deposits Sulphur seems to permeate the whole of the region

th/monthof ^^^S^^Yy because approaching the fires near the mouth
the Maokenaie. q{ ^Jjq Mackenzie (in the river) travellers speak of
sulphurous exhalations.

Evidence of BISHOP GLUT.

other miTieraiB There is copper (in the Mackenzie Basin and N. W.

copper%a?tr' Territory), and one river bears the name of Coppermine
gy^am', and Blvor. It is f ound there in great pieces. I have seen
precious stones jj^^^ crosses made of it by the savages themselves. . .
The sulphur abounds in several places. I have seen it on

the Clearwater River and on the West bank of Great Slave
Lake. It is there in such quantities that the odour is
annoying to those who pass by. Near Fort Smith there
is a salt mine, which is probably the most beautiful and
the most abundant in the universe. There is a veritable
mountain of salt. By digging a little in the earth, from

six inches to a foot, rock salt can be found

You have only to shovel, and you can gather a fine salt,
pure and clean.

On the borders of the Peace Biver, stones are found
which are sufficiently precious to make rings of them.
I have seen Gypsum along the Mackenzie, a little below
Fort Norman.

R. Q. MoCONNELL, 1888-89.

The Devonian rocks throughout the Mackenzie ^fj*J^'*''™ *°*
Valley are nearly everywhere more or less petroliferous,
and over large areas a£ford promising indications of
the presence of oil in workable quantities ....
Near Fort Good Hope several tar springs exist, and it
is from these that the Hudson's Bay Company now
obtain their principal supply of pitch .... Still
farther down, in the vicinity of Old Fort Good Hope, the
river is bordered for several miles by evenly bedded
dark shales of Devonian age which are completely
saturated with oil (Fort Good Hope is 274 miles from
mouth of the Mackenzie Biver).

The oil fields of Pennsylvania and Baker already
(1888) show signr, of exhaustion, and as they decline
the oil fields of Northern Canada will have a corres-
ponding rise in value.

Mineral Resources of the N. W. Territories.

Evidence of Professor BELL before the 1888 Committee.

Gold has been found at Repulse Bay and near
Chesterfield Inlet, Hudson's Bay; also at Bumtwood
Lake, near Frog Portage.

H 2

100

Nuggets of pure silver have been found on the
Upper Peace.

Native copper on the Coppermine Biver, and copper
ore on the Vleat Coast of Hudson's Bay.

Clay iron-stone on the Athabasca Biver, above the
Clearwater Biver; and magnetite at Black Bay, on
Athabasca Lake.

Sulphur is abundant in the form of pyrites on the
West Coast of Hudson's Bay.

Salt, in springs on the Clearwater and the Athabasca,
and copiously on the Salt Biver on the West side of
Slave Biver.

Petroleum and asphaltum on the Athabasca Biver,
Great Slave Lake, Mackenzie, &c.

Gypsum at Peace Point, Peace Biver, Salt Springs,
Salt Biver.

Lignite, along the Athabasca Biver, Mackenzie
Elver, near Great Bear Lake Biver, along Peel Biver
and on the coast o£ the Arctic sea on both sides of the
Mackenzie.

Plumbago found near Fond du Lao, Athabasca
Lake.

Mr. George Dawson stated to 1888 Committee : —
Tiie pitch of Athauasca Biver (and also of the Lake and
of the Mackenzie Biver) may probably be of considerable
value in the future, but it is most important in giving
reason to believe that extensive deposits of petroleum
exist in the country in which it occurs. Mr. Hoffman
reports on an examination of this material (1881-82) : —
He suggests its use for asphalting roadways, &c., and for
the purpose of distillation and for the production of
lubricating and illuminating oils.

Professor Bell, in his evidence to the 1888 Com-
mittee of the Senate, stated — "As to economic minerals,
magnetic iron, apparently of fine quality, judging from
specimens I obtained at Fort Chippewyaa, is found near
the entrance of Black Bay, on the north side of Lake.

101

Athabasca. Graphite has been found in loose pieces,
near Fond du Lao Post, on the same side. Mr. Cochrane
found the Huronian foundation, which is always apt tc
be metalliferous, well developed in Black Bay, and again
between Fond du Lao and the eastern extremity of
Lake Athabasca.

« The lake is deep and navigable for steamers of a
large class.'.'

Evidence from the diary of ANDERSON, the Explorer,
Senate Committee, 1888.

Red earth, sulphisr, coal oil, salt, white earth, gPS^'eto?^
limestone, ironstone, and sandstone, are found all along
the Mackenzie and the Athabasca. Mr. James Anderson,
son of the Explorer, declares that he has seen all these
minerals, himself, in the localities mentioned.

Evidence of G. M. DAWSON, Director of the Geological .Survey of
Canada, to the 1888 Senate Committee.

Referring to the CJoppermine Eiver particularly, J^^g^itf?^
there is every reason to believe there is a repetition, ™®*2?n°**i,-
along that river and in its vicinity, of those rocks,
which contain copper, on Lake Superior, and which
have proved so rich there. If there were any way of
getting the copper out from that country, aa there
will, no doubt, eventually be, it could be examined and
prospected and worked at once. At the present time it
seems to be beyond the reach of the prospector. The
Hudson Bay Co. sent Heame up there in the latter part
of the last century to discover where the copper found
in the hands of the natives came from, but he could do
nothing but report that he found copper there. The sea
to the north was ice-bound, Eind he did not see his way
to utilising it, so it has remained ever since. With
respect to the barren grounds, I know nothing personally.
I think we really know very little about them yet. It
would appear that the barren grounds have been generally
characterised on the result of a very few expeditions
which have not gone over them at all extensively.

102

Pitch aud
Asphaltam.

Evidence of the Hon. Wm. CHRISTIE to the 1888 Senate Committee,

The deposit of pitch on the Athabasca Biyer is very
deep. It is in springs in the sides of the banks of the
river. The bank at that point is not very high. A few
pine trees grow at the top of the bank, and there are
one or two springs there. They boil ap there in the
summer. You can put a long pole down 10 or 12 feet
long, and you cannot find the bottom. The pitch ia
black and very adhesive. It is like English pitch, but
it has no smell of tar. They use it at Fort McMurray
to cover some of the houses, and it looks like an
asphalt pavement.

I have never seen specimens of the crude oil that
comes from the wells, but the general opinion is that
this petroleum, or coal oil, would be found there. In
fact there is a report that there are some springs of itr
near Edmonton. The Indians report that it exists in
that country, but being superstitious they would not
show where it would be found.

A hill of iron
on Lake Atha-
bMoa.

Immense oop.
pes territory
near Chester-
field Inlet.

Likely gold-
bearing quartz
near the inlet,

Discoveries of Qold, Iron and Copper ; Chesterfield
Inlet and Lake Athabasca.

Mr. J. Burr Tyrrell, in the Geological Survey
Beports of 1895, mentions a hill of highly hsematitio
quartzite and iron ore of 125 feet in height on the shore
of Lake Athabasca, and in the Sessional Papers for the
same year he reports that for 225 miles before reaching
the neighbourhood of Chesterfield Inlet and along the
streams leading into it, formations are met with similar
to those which are so rich in copper ore on Lake
Superior, but owing to the necessity for rapid travel
daring the journey on which he visited this unknown
country he could give them no more than hasty exami*
nation. He (Mr. Tyrrell) considers these formations a
continuation of the sandstone and traps on the Copper-
mine Biver which have long been known to contain
large quantities of pure copper. Along the Doobaunt
Biver, and on the North side of Doobaunt Lake, out-

103

crops of white Huronian quartzite were seen. (It is the
Huronian formation that Professor Bell describes as
" always apt to be metalliferous.")

It was on this ioumey that Mr. Tyrrell made the An important

■• " " diseovcry oi

discovery of gold on Chesterfield Inlet. gold on chea-

Petroleum fields of Immense value*

From the 1888 Senate Gommittee's General Summary.

The evidence submitted to your Committee points The greatest
to the existence in the Athabasca and Mackenzie valleys in the world,
of the most extensive petroleum field in America, if not in
the world. The uses of petroleum, and consequently the
demand for it by all nations are increasing at such a
rapid ratio, that it is probable this great petroleum field
will assume an enormous value in the near future, and
will rank among the chief assets comprised in the Crown
Domain of the Dominion.

Ironstone and Copper, West of Chesterfield Inlet.

Mr. Warburton Pike, in the account (1890) of his
travels in the Barren Lands of North Canada, refers
(p. 185) several times to its huge extent of ironstone
country, extending North East from the Great Fish
Eiver, about lat. 65^. He also mentions coming upon
Esquimaux encampments on this river and finding stone
kettles and other utensils with copper let into them,
shewing that the natives found this metal and knew how by tEfnaUveaf
to work it.

104

Section 5. Coal for visiting Steam-
shipfi, iVIanufactures and IVIining
Industries.

General Summary from the Oommittee.'

The extensive coal and lignite deposits of the lower
Mackenzie, and elsewhere, will be found to be of great
commercial value when the question of reducing its iron
ores and the transportation of the products of this vast
region have to be solved by steam sea-going or lighter
river craft.

Professor MACOUN'S Evidence.

Coal on the ^ . n , n . . »

Mackenzie. Question : — Suppose a steamer could start from

Victoria, pass through Behring Straits and the Arctic Sea

to the mouth of the Mackenzie, and ascend the river to

the Great Slave Lake, would that vessel have to take

coal enough for the return trip, or could she depend

upon the coal to be found in the Mackenzie country ?

Answer'. — There is no doubt at all that she could
depend upon the coal of the Mackenzie, because all
explorers speak of it. . . There is no doubt at all
that there is excellent coal on the lower Mackenzie.

Evidence of J. B. HURLBERT, M.D., LLD.

rientywood Sir John Eichardson, in passing along the Arctic

as fuel for Coast wherever there were Elvers, found timber about
Arctic Coast, the mouths of them in such quantities that, he said, if a
steamer should go into the Arctic Ocean it would find
wood enough to supply its daily fuel and asphaltum, or
something of the kind, which is found West of the
Mackenzie Eiver, that it would find enough there to
supply the daily wants of the steamer.

105

Extracts from the Report of Mr. WILLIAM OQILVIE, 1896.

It is now certain that coal extends along the valley Large leami
of the Yukon. . . . There is a seam on it (the branch covered,
stream Chandindu) 6 feet thick. ... On the
Cornell Claim on Cliff Greek the seam is 5 feet 4 inches
thick.

In the course of a year I believe coal will supersede coaiwflistiper-

Bfidfi wood kOK

wood for fuel which will relieve the demand as far as fnei in the
towns and villages are concerned ; but mining interests
will require a lot of fuel where gou) cannot be taken.

Evidence of MALCOLM MoLEOD, Q.O., Ex-Judge.
Qtiestixm of the Committee: — You say that for a Three yards

* •' *' seam of coal at

distance of 350 miles coal is indicated by abundant the janction of

_ Mackenzie and

" shows" on the Peace Eiver in its upper reaches and Bear Lake
extends to the Arctic Ocean. Then you pass on to the month of
lignite which you say is still more extensively developed.

You give the result of Sir John Eichardson's
observations and enquiries on the subject in this way —
" At the junction of the Mackenzie and Bear Lake Eiver
the formation is best exposed ; it there consists of a
series of beds, the thickest of which exceed three yards,

separated by layers The coal when

extracted from the bed is massive and most generally
shows the woody structure distinctly." •

You mentioned that all along the Mackenzie — for
1,800 miles — there are indications of this lignite and real
coal.

Has anything occurred since the publication of de^^sSsafon***
this pamphlet to alter your opinion ? on^he1^«*

Coast at the

Answer— Nothing. On the contrary, I have had "oa^thofthe
information to add to it. Of late, I find from the refer-
ence of Simpson to pitch coal on the shore of the Arctic
Sea, between the mouth of the Mackenzie Eiver and
Point Barrow, that the extent of the coal desposit is
greater than I supposed.

106

Coal near the Mouth of the Mackenzie.

(See paragraph under part B, Section 10, referring to
Ogilvie's discovery of a large seam of excellent tested Coal
on Trout Biver.)

A Forerunner of Great Coal Discoveries.

"ToBONTO Monetary Times,"

10th September, 1897.

Prof. John Macoun, of the Geological Survey (of
Canada), has returned from his rummer's work on the
Prairies of the North- West Territories. He states, that
in Mid -August, Mr. Stafford, of the Gait Coal Company,
discovered a 9-foot seam of excellent quahty Coal in
Alberta, six miles east of the mountains.

Climate of
Alaska bright
•Dd bracing.

AU the coal
fonnd, out-
oropped on the
river banks.

Coal on the Yukon.

Letter from Mr. James Hardy, in the "Sheffield Daily Telegraph"

August 11th, 1897,

Sir, — I should like to say a little about these gold-
fields, which I think would be of interest to the readers
of your paper. As I have spent two summers %nd a winter
up there prospecting, in the employ of Dr. Dawson,
I think I ought to knew something of camp life in that
barren territory. The climate is bright and bracing, not
damp and foggy, as Mr. Mackey says. You can work out
from March until October. In the winter we opened
several seams of coal, as I was a miner. They took my
advice, and it found us fire and warmth in cold weather.
The coal we got was lignite. We found some bituminous
coal some hundreds of miles from there, but did not test
it. All the coal we found outcropped on the river banks.
In some places the coal was stratified; others un-
stratified. I think the gold at Klondike is an outcrop of
some general bed. If it is so they will want miners of »
better stamp when they have reef to get, instead of gravel.
I would not advise any one to go from here until the
spring ; it would be madness to attempt it. It will be a

107

grand place for men interested in coal, as it will be
wanted in winter worse than gold. Young men going
from here ought to get together in fours, and sixes, and so
on, and not to be parted at any price. I never saw the
mercury below 58 zero nor above 1*17 Fahr,

Section 6. Hydraulic and Placer

Mining.

Extracts from the Report ef Mr. WILLIAM OQILVIE, 1890.

The only mining done on the Stewart River was on HyaraiiMo
the bars in the river ; the bench and bank bars were all necessary,
timbered and frozen, so that to work thorn would entail
a resort to hydraulic mining, for which there was no
machinery in the country.

During the fall of 1886 three or four miners com- splendid »•
bined and got the owners of the " New Backet " steam- Btowu°^m
boat to allow the use of her engines to work pumps for taa^um*"""^
sluicing with. The boat was hauled up on a bar, her
engines detached from the paddle wheels and made to
drive a set of pumps manufactured on the ground which
supplied water for a set of sluicing boxes. With this
crude machinery, in less than a month the miners cleared
1,000 dollars each, and paid an equal amount to the
owners of the boat as their share.

There are many bank and bench bars along the river a rich field for
which would pay well if sluiced, but there is no con- Eia^^taery.
venient or economical way of getting water on to them,
and there is no pumping machinery as yet in the country.

Gold in the Stewart River.

R. Q. MoCONNELL, 1888-89.

Extensive gravel benches of a more or less au-
riferous character border the Stewart Biver in many
places, and promise remunerative returns if worked on a
large scale (hydraulic machinery required).

108

Special

methods called
for.

Depth to
beoiock.

The Tarioos

strata

described.

A large
qnantity of
paying gravel
thrown aside.

Placer Mining in tlie Klondiice Country.

Written for the "Engineering and IMining Journal" by its Special
Oorrespondent, October 9th, 1897.

Special oonditions call for special methods to meet
them, and this is certainly true of placer mining in the
Yukon gold belt, and more especially so in the Klondike
district. With the exception of some placers in Siberia,
nowhere else have men undertaken to seek for gold
above the line of constantly frozen ground. The work
is too arduous and forbidding, except for the short'
summer months when the heat is almost unbearable and
the mosquitoes worse. The ground below is frozen solid
down to bedrock, almost as hard and even more difficult
to excavate. The frozen earth and gravel can be blasted
only with great difficulty, and the only method available
has been to thaw the ground by fire, as is done in the
Siberian mines.

On El Dorado Creek, which is the richest and best
known of the tributaries of Bonanza Creek, the branch
of the Klondike on which the first strike was made, the
bedrock on which the rich pay-streak lies is found at a
depth varying from 9 feet at the mouth to 20 feet and even
28 or 30 feet higher up. The top layer, from 1 to 6 feet
thick, is of muck composed of decaying vegetable matter
and soil which in places is covered by long and thickly
matted moss. The summer heat melts the surface
where exposed to a depth of a few inches, making a very
disagreeable footing. Under the muck come the several
strata of gravel and sand shown in the illustration,
which is a typicarsection across the creek. The upper-
most stratum of gravel varies in thickness in places, but
is quite uniform as to the amount of gold carried to the
cubic foot ; while those below are quite uniform on all
the claims along the creek in thickness as well as in
amount of gold. Under different conditions or in any
other diggingB but the Yukon the upper layer of gravel
would be carefully worked, and most likely will be in
the future even there ; but so far the Elondykers have
wasted but little time on it, only taking out so much as

109

110

was necessary to reftoh the richer strata below, and in
most cases not even washing out the gold from what they
did handle.

Bow^ •hn'tB In sinking the shafts all the loose top stuff that oui

be out and scraped away is first removed, and then a
good pile of wood out from the adjoining hills is made
and set on fire. By the time this has burnt out the
ground below it is thawed to a depth of several inches.
Pick and shovel are then used to remove this over a
space of from 8 to 12 feet square, and the shaft may be
said to have been started. Alternate firing and digging in
time carry it down through the muck and the thick
upper layer of gravel to within some 7 or 8 feet of the
bedrock.

When the shaft becomes too deep to toss the dirt
out with a shovel, a windlass is rigged, and it is hoisted
out by a rope and bucket, the latter generally made of a
half barrel, with a rope handle passing through three
holes near the top. When the poorer upper gravel
has been passed the material, as far as loosened by the
fire, is taken from the sides as well as at the bottom of
the shaft, and the dump for sluicing is begun. This is
made with an eye to the most convenient and economical
way of utilizing the supply of water which is to oome
when the snow on the hills thaws out in the spring.

The work is then carried on down to bedrock, next

above which, with a depth of about 18 inches, lies the

rich pay-streak. From this and the cracks and rifts

Where the in the shale rock underneath come most of the

nnggets eome . , .

from nuggets. This stuff is laid by itself on the dump and

given special care in washing, as it abounds in dust and

flaxseed gold as well as nuggets. Many men have been

satisfied with one season's work on this rich deposit.

On all the deeper claims, after reaching bedrock only
the pay-streak and the two strata above it are followed by
drifting. The method is the same as in the vertical shaft,
wood being piled at the end of the drift and burned to
thaw out the ground. While mote men can find room to

Ill

•work the progress made is comparatively slow, as for ^|,'JJfn"f|*f
lack of draught the fire burns slowly and the smoke froien gratei.
takes a longer time to clear out of the way, so as to allow
the men to get at the work of digging and hoisting out.
In thus going down to bedrock and then drifting on only
the richest strata, the readiest and largest returns are
secured for the time and labour expended.

This was the first object with the poorer Klondikers,
to take the richest, make their pile and get out of the
country, leaving the other stuff to be worked by those stnir thrown
who came after them, as it all will be when improved moMr ^lor*
conditions as to labour, supplies and proper machinery be waBhed'over
exist. So far it has not been found necessary to leave ****""
pillars or put in supports for the roof of the drift. So
firmly is the material frozen that it is as hard and strong
as the bedrock below.

From rim-rook to rim-rock the El Dorado Creek width of

bottom of go1(1-

bottom varies from 80 to 500 feet m width, and, as far as bearing creeks,
ascertained, the deposits are quite uniform over the
whole with a length of about eight miles. The amount
of gold yet to be handled on this creek alone must be
very large.

A large number of the nuggets taken out of this Qnartziuthe

nuffffQbS snow

creek have had quartz imbedded in the metal, showing ^he nearness of

4Q6urtz reefs.

their original home to be not far distant, but as yet no
definite location has been made of any quartz ledges.
As a matter of fact, few have turned their attention in
that direction; the heavy covering of thick, matted
moss that lies on the hills hides the rocks from sight,
and makes prospecting extremely difficult. The more
certain returns from the creek bottoms have so far been
the more attractive to the miners.

Although much has been written in regard to the
erosion of these valleys, and the deposit of the gold
by the action of glaciers, an inspection of a large
quantity of nuggets from the several branches of the qq,^ dis i c a
Klondike seem to , show that they have never been f'2*» qnarta

' letufeB by

subjected to the squeezing and grinding forces in *°?^i![S**'»

112

eyicTence on the terminal moraines to be found along any
glaciers. They rather show proof of gradual and gentle
loosening from the original rock and of the after action
of water, and that only to a limited degree.

FiiBt steps of a
prospectlui;
miner with the
pan.

Next step— the
"looker "or
"cradte."

Deacription
of the
"looker."

filaicing.

Prospecting with "Rocker" and Pan.

"When a miner *' prospects " he washes a few panfuls
of gravel or sand, and according to the number of specks
of gold he sees in his pan after the dift has been washed
out he estimates the richness of it. The "rocker,"
which the miner uses in placer mining, is a box about three
feet long and two feet wide, made in two parts, the top
part being shallow, with a heavy sheet-iron bottom which
is punched full of quarter-inch holes. The other part of the
box is fitted with an inclined shelf about midway in its
depth, which is six or eight inches lower at its lower
end than at its upper. Over this is placed a piece of
heavy woollen blanket. The whole is then mounted on
rockers and set in a convenient place near a good supply
of water. The minor puts the gravel and sand he has
collected into the shallow box on the top, and he rocks
it gently while he ladles in water. The finer matter
with the go^ ^ falls through the holes on to the blanket,
which cht'lcs its progress and holds the fine particles of
gold. The .iand passes over it to the bottom of the box.
Across the bottom of the box are fixed thin slats, behind
which some mercury is placed to catch particles of gold
which may have escaped the blanket. Of course if thero
are any nuggets they are retained in the upper box. By
sluicing, however, about three times as much dirt can be
washed as by the rocker, and consequently sluicing is
always the process employed when a good fall of water
can be obtained. In Alaska many miners spend the
winter in thawing the ground and collecting the dirt,
which they heap in a pile till summer comes and water
can be obtained.

113
Section T. Furs, Ivory, &c.

General Summary from- the Oommittee.

The chief present commercial product of the country The great far
is its furs, which, as the region in question is the last wwldT* °
great fur preserve of the world, are of' very great
present and prospective valUe, all" the finer furs of
conunerce being there found, and the sales 'in London
yearly amounting to several niillions of dollars.

Evidence of the Rev. E. PETITOT.

On the sea coast and the right bank (of the oaves con-
Mackenzie Eiver), the Esquimaux have told me that ii^edbonesVna
there are caves containing fossilized bones of large Martodoa.^
antediluvian aniraals, particularly of the mastodon, of
which they have shown me pieces of tusks "df the finest
ivory. '

Evidence of DONALD MclVOR.

Animals in Mackenzie Basin are :— red-deer, rein- Animals in
deer, cabre, musk ox (robes very valuable), moose, elk. Basin.
wild sheep and goats, lynx, Arctic fox, black fox (skins
worth from £6 to £8 each), silver fox (skins nearly as
vpluable), cross fox, wolverine, otter, beaver, martin,
mink, ermine, trout, pike, salmon, in fact, nearly every Fish.
kind most numerous.

Fursof the N.W. Territories; 1888 Committee's Report.

The Committee have found a great deal of difficulty
in getting information regarding the quantity of furs
exported from the N. W. Territories. The following is
incomplete, but is all the Committee could obtain.

Quantity of furs offered for sale in London at the Ic^ndonof
Annual Auction Sale by the Hudson Bay Co., and lu^^ex'orted
C. M. Lampson & Co., in the year 1887. fowitori *^" ^'

Otter 14,439

Sea Otter 8,868

fisner <<• ••• ... ... •.• i,Xt7^

Fox, Silver , 1,967

Fox, Cross 6,785

114

Fox, Bed 85,022

Fox, White 10,257

Fox, Blue ... Mr 1,440

Fox, Kitt *•. .•* ••• ••• 290

Lynx ... .•• ... ... ... 14,520

Skunk 632,794

Marten... ..« ••• 98,342

Mink ... 376,223

Beaver ... 104,279

Musquash 2,485,368

Extra Blaok Musquash 13,944

Wolf 7,158

Wolverine 1,581

Bear (all kinds) ... ..« ... 15,942

Musk Ox 198

Badger..* 3,739

Ermine 4,116

Swan... ... ... ... ... 57

Babbit (American 114,824

Hair Seal (dry) ... 13,478

Sable ... ... ... ... ... 3,517

Fox, Grey 31,597

Evidence of Mr. JAMES ANDERSON and his father, the explorer

(1888 Committee).

pm Md Pood The furs of the Mackenzie Elver are those of the

FKNortb. beaver, marten, silver fox, lynx, otter, cross fox, blue fox,
red fox, musquash (muskrat), mink, bears, wolves, and
wolverines. The food animals amongst these are the
beaver and bear. Towards the Arctic Ocean are found the
musk ox, and the reindeer, and all the fur-bearing animals
are found along the coast.

The food animals on the Mackenzie Biver are the
moose, rabbit, wood partridge, white partridge geese of
all kinds, cranes, waveys, and ducks of all kinds.

Large and Exceptionally Pine Specimens off ivory ffound.

'.'Pall Mall Gazette," 9th October, 1897 (from the Special
Correspondent).

As confirming what was said in a previous letter,
Mr. Wilkinson, of Nanaimo, B. C, \7ho returned from

115

the Klondike some time ago with 40,000 dollars, the
result of but three months' labour, says that large and
exceptionally fine speoimens of ivory were found last
season solidly embedded in the ice gravel. Tusks of
mastodons, weighing as much as 160 lbs., were found in
an excellent state of preservation. While working his
claim, Wilkinson found a leg bone of a mastodon covered
with flesh. He remarks that there are indications on
every hand to show that Alaska was once a tropical
country, and rank tropical vegetation is seen preserved
in ice.

But it is nuggets, and not mastodons, that the
miners want.

An Alask Plain Strewn with Ivory Tasks.

The Sheffield " Daily Telegraph," August 21at, 1897.

Elondyke seems to be the home of ivory as well as Eiondyke Uia
of gold, according to the Pall Mall Gazette. "It was asweuas^^ld,
quite the result of accident," it says, " that what may l^t'ol^t*.
be called the last home of the mammoths — for we can
hardly credit the Indian tales of live specimens — became
known to a white man. The Bedskins of Kwaquihuilette,
a village on the Yukon Eiver, have long known of the
spot, but of the value of the ivory they have been totally
ignorant. They are silent men, those Bedskins, except
when the liquor is in them ; and it required long residence
among them before a miner, byname of George Hughes,
heard of the treasure-trove and its whereabouts. Illness
kept this man a prisoner at Kwaquihuileti;e a year or
two ago. As ho recovered he began to learn many of
the Indian ways, and partially mastered the language
of the particular tribe he was with. His attention was
attracted to the ivory ornaments the natives wore ; and
he noticed that even their rude dining articles were made
of the same material. He induced the Indians to show
him the place whence came this ivory. It took several
days hard sleighing to reach the spot. But the work

I 2

116

A plain . • ,
•oattered
everywhere
were tusks
white and
beaming with

was worth the reward. The miner saw what no white
man had ever before witnessed. There, on this plain,
frozen to the ground, were hundieds and hundreds of
skeletons of gigantio beasts, and scattered everywhere
were tusks white and gleaming with frost. This was
undoubtedly a graveyard of mammoths, and the miner's
fancy pictured iii also as a battlefield, for in some instances
the tusks of one animal were found buried in the skeleton
of another."

Section 8« Steam Navigation from
.* Vancouver via Beiiring Straits to
. Maci^enzie Bay and tiirough to
Mackenzie River.

Navigation
from Behring
Btralts to
Month of the
Mackenzie
open for three
months every
year.

General Summary of the 1888 Senate Committee.

A reference to the valuable evidence obtained by
your Committee will show that navigation from Behring
Straits to the mouth of the Mackenzie Eiver, and
probably as far East as Wollaston Land, may be had for
three months in each year, the soundings given on the
Admiralty Chart of that portion of the Arctic Sea
revealing an average depth of about 20 fathoms. The
western branch of the estuary of the Mackenzie is said
to be the outlet which has the deepest waters. . , ,

That with suitable steam crafts this river (the
Mackenzie) and lake navigation may be connected with
Victoria and Vancouver by way of the mouth of the
Mackenzie, the Arctic Ocean and Behring Straits and
Sea. (lu is now connected on the south by 90 miles of
waggon road between Athabasca Landing and Edmon-
ton, with navigable water in the Saskatchewan Biver.)

117

Evidence of W. G. BOM PAS, D.D., Bishop of Athabasca.

Regarding the object of placing steam on the Mackenzie S&ckenzif ****
. . . . it becomes a question how far it is consistent ^^^^j,™
with the national honor and the glory of Her Majesty and Arctic ocean,
the British Empire to allow this magnificent stream to
be navigated by only a few barges, when in the neigbour-
ing territory of the United States most inconsiderable
streams are traversed by steamers.

The Mackenzie is navigable for steamers for about
1,300 miles from its mouth, and the channels at its
mouth have been correctly laid down on tho Admiralty

Charts.

It is said that Mr. Gordon Bennett of New York has Mr- Gordon

Bennett ex-

sent his vessel to explore the Mouth of the Mackenzie, pioring the

moatb of the

and its seems a pity that British vessels should be wholly Mackenzie,
absent from that region. " .' ' '

Evidence Of J. B. HURLBERT, M.D., LLD.

The American whalers made voyages every year to The Arctic
the Arctic Ocean off Mackenzie Eiver a quarter of a nonew^thUig.
century ago. Dr. Eichardson inferred there was an
open sea from the whales in great numbers being in the
sea, as they must come constantly to the surface to -
breathe.

Captain Collinson was 50 miles off the Mackenzie
Eiver.

There is plenty of open water at the mouth of the openwoterto
Mackenzie Biver for five months in the year. for Ave months

in the year.

Evidence of DONALD MclVOR.

The average length of open water (in the Mackenzie Mackenzie
Eiver) is from second week in May to first or second
week in October.

Excellent harbours (mouth of Mackenzie) and think From threeto

whaling or sealing vessels would have at least three fishing at the

to four months' fishing without being impeded by ice. ""'^

118

General Summary from the Committee.

^^ogbthe Arctic explorers had indeed traversed its (the N.W.

line has itoen Territory) coast line and descended two of the rivers,.

territory Inland which, east of the Mackenzie, flow into the Arctic Sea,

■dentifloaiiy but the object BOUght by them was one which had no

**'^"*^ relation to that of the present enquiry, and it is only

incidentally that their records are now valuable. The

knowledge of missionaries and the officers of the Hudson's

Bay Company is chiefly to the water courses and the

great lakes, while scientific exploration has not as yet

extended north of Great Slave Lake.

REPOBT

By the Hon. John Schultz, Lieut* Governor
of Manitoba, upon Whaling in Mackenzie
Bay, and the Passage from Behring
Straits to the Mouth of the Mackenzie
Biiver,

Government House,

Winnipeg, 3ri August, 1894.

Open w^rto There is open water from Point Barrow to Cape

for 8 montba Bathurst f or quite three months in the summer. . . .
The Eskimo at the mouth of the river (Mackenzie) killed
over 50 of ,the white whale last summer ; in fact the
catch of whales last year by the whalers seems to have
been phenomenal. Two of the vessels captured over 50
each (an average whale is worth £1,000 in oil and bone),
which yielded an average of 1,800 lbs. of whale bone per
head (quantity of oil not mentioned), which would mean
an immense profit to someone. I understand that only
the bone is taken, so that the oil is nearly all wasted.

American Seven vessels wintered at Herohel Island (in Mac-

Already visiting kenzie Bay), and more are expected this year. I am

Bw, afraid that a great deal of liquor finds its way amongst

the poor Eskimo. I do not know that English or

Canadian whalers would treat the Eskimo any better

119

than the Americans do, but it does seem a shame that
BO many hundreds of thousands of dollars should be
pocketed by the Americans every year and not a cent,
by the Canadian or British.

The only Navisrable Channel : a «affe Harbour.

Other evidence from a High Authority.

Mr. -^ states that many mouths from the

Mackenzie Biver meet the Arctic Ocean coast line ya.
the 40 miles across from land to land, the delta being
composed of so many cross channels as to produce
almost numberless low lying islands. All these
channels save the one sounded by .... and
himself are shallow and tortuous and the one in which only on« aeep

ohfumel

he says they never found less than two-and-a-half through the

, . , 1 , . , , . , - , delta of the

fathoms throughout is close to the east siae of the Mackenzie-
delta, and its navigability has been kept a secret by secret.

. . . . and himself in pursuance of a laudable
design to prevent the entrance of their boats or the ships
in question, more especially as within the mouth of this
branch of the delta is to be found a secure harbour. . . a secure

nacooor within

Several attempts have been made by boats from the theaeoret

^ •' channel,

wintering ships to ascend the river, but as aU. their efforts

were confined to the West side of the delta they met with no

success, and, indeed, since Sir Alex. Mackenzie's time, and

the boat expeditions of Sir John Franklin and Dease and

Simpson, there seems to have been a gradual filling up of

these Western channel.

From the Hon. J. 8GHULTZ, Winnipeg, 4th January, 1895.
Now that cordial relations have been established in Herchei island,

, , , , . . , . , _ in Mackenzie

some measure, at least, between our northern inland Bay, the
natives and the Eskimo, Herchei Island may be reached present
from the head of the estuary of the Mackenzie, where re"ch^'feom ^
Peel River joins it, in safety, and with comparatively * ^^'
little difficulty if proper voyageurs be chosen and the
start is made at a proper season . . . the only
communication (between Mackenzie Bay and the
Biver), as you are aware, is by the annual trips of the
Hudson's Bay Company's small Mackenzie Biver steamer
"Wrigley."

120

Whaling at the
month of the
Mackenzie.

Value of tbe

^vballng

industi^.

Section 9. Whaling and Sealing off
the Mouth of Mackenzie River;
Splendid prospects.

Evidence of GEO. M. DAWSON, M.D., LLD., Geological Survey of

Canada.

The idea I ventured to suggest was that whaling
stations be established east of the region usually reached
by whalers (near mouth of Mackenzie Eiver), which
would enable whaling and sealing to be carried on in a
way that it could not be by vessels going and returning
the same season, and remaining to catch whales and
seals in those northern waters.

To show the extent and value of the whaling industry
in Behiing Sea, and in the Arctic ocean to the north-
entered through Behring Straits, which has always been
considered an open route by everybody — I may give
the following figures: — In 1880, there were 36 sailing
craft, and 4 steamers. They produced —

35,000 lbs. of whalebone, valued at 850,000 dollars.
15,000 „ of ivory, „ 9,000 „

21,000 barrels of oil, „ 280,000 „

= an average of £6,700 per vessel, per year.

The Arctic
Ocean qoite
open In
Summer.

Seals, whales,
foxes and rein-
deer In large
nnmbars.

Evidence of i. B. HURLBERT, M.D., LLD.

In 1837 Thomas Simpson, on his return from a
voyage from the Mackenzie through the Arctic Ocean to
Pt. Barrow, stated : — " The sea was clear and navigable
by ships during the summer months. Eeindeer, Arctio
foxes, and seals were numerous. Many whales and
seals were seen everywhere. The natives met with were
well provided with whalebone and sealskins. They were
well clothed in seal and reindeer skins."

Whales,
seal, &c

Evidence of DONALD MclVOR.

Whale, seal, walrus are to be found in large numbera
in and about Mackenzie Bay.

121

Great tracts of valuable timbers along the Mackenzio
— chiefly pine, spruce, tamarao, poplar and birch.

General Summary of the 1888 Committee.

The following (fish) have been found Fi*!**

on the Northern .... coast within the scope of
the present enquiry, viz. : — Salmon. The capeling is
found on the coast of the Arctic Ocean .... thus
implying the presence of cod upon banks near by, and
the rock cod has been frequently taken. The Greenland,
or harp seal and the grey square flipper seal ....
are all found with the walrus and porpoise off the mouths
and in the estuary of the Mackenzie Biver.

The seas adjoining the great territory which your whaies^seaifl.
Committee has had under investigation are frequented large nnuabera
by whales of different species, walruses, narwhals, and coast ot
a variety of seals. All these animals Eire valuable for
their oil, but the large species of whales have heretofore
been most sought for. Only a few years ago these
animals had a much more extensive range than at the
present time. Owing to improvements in navigation
and methods of capture, they have, of late years, fallen
an easier prey to their pursuers and have taken shelter
in the less frequented seas of the northern coast of
Canada.

Extracts from letters from Dr REEVES, Bishop Mackenzie River
District, to the Hon. JOHN SCHULTZ.

Government House, • ;

Winnipeg, IQth Sept., 1896.

Mr. Hodgson is here (Selkirk) on furlough to pass Mr. Hodgson's
this winter with his aged parents from whom he had the mou?h of
been separated for many years, having spent twenty-one ^^^s*^'®^*^
years in the Mackenzie Eiver District, and was latterly
and for some years in charge of Fort Macpherson, Peel
Biver.

122

w!nte?evS^* In immediate reference to the subject of my letter

{b^wuieBay °^ ^^^ ^^ ^*'' ^® ^^y^ *^** '^'^ whaling ships wintered
last winter at Herchel Island harbour, seven ships the
winter before, four ships on the previous winter, and
four ships before that again, bearing out the accuracy of
information supplied to me and by me transmitted to
you for the past several years.

w«^ Their principal reason for availing themselves of

Mackenzie Bay this most important Arctic Harbour is, as I before stated,

huboar. because of its nearness to their principal whaling

ground, whence they can proceed to their lucrative

business a long time before these grounds can be reached

from Behring Straits (in time to catch the opening of

HMtonsieBay the season) and from the fact that the spring rush of

ion?b«f on tho Water down the Mackenzie Biver clears a large area

^c^^are ^^^ its various mouths long after the shore ice is firm
'*'"• far to the East and West.

Tbe whalers They do uot, therefore, go there specially to trade

kenx^Bay '^°' with the Eskimo, but this being their only profitable

with^i^kiino occupation in Winter and very early Spring, they get

eKtalmgefonr ^ large numbers of common and valuable fox skins and

*"* supply the Eskimo with goods in trade, even up to the

vicinity and at the Peel Biver Fort (MacPherson), take

beaver and other furs from the legitimate traders of that

region.

Valuable ivory Deposits.

From the Hon. J. 8CHULTZ, Winnepeg, 4th January, 1895.

BMnitBtrom Since then (date of last letter) at least one

Ma^nzie of the ships, which, in the winter of 1893-94 wintered

Si&^tira!"'"' o,t Herchel Island had reached San Francisco and

although I have no more definite account of the

value of the cargo sold by her owners at that

point than the west coast newspapers give, it would

seem that the trade in which she was engaged has been

enormously lucrative, and should the vague Eskimo

reports of prehistoric ice and mud-embedded deposits

of ivory similar to such on the Siberian coast, and that,

I believe, of Alaska also, have any foundation other than

OxMt stoiM of mere rumour, these profits might be, in the future, very

123

mnoh enhanced indeed, and add to the regret that
foreign vessels should have so oomplete a monopoly
over a Canadian trade apparently so profitable, which is
carried on indeed in violation of several statutory enact-
ments and depaxtmental regulations. {See reports of
ivory confirmed in accompanying evidence.)

Whaling, do.. Statistics (Hon. J. 8CHULTZ).
1887 — Total catch by San Francisco whalers Aioh retnns
amounted to 2,000,000 dollars. e^^tdTtioiis.

1888 — San Francisco fleet operating in the Behrmg
Sea and Arctic Ocean : — 25 vessels, including tenders,
landed products to the value of 627,346 dollars ; average
value of each vessel, 25,094 dollars. Eight of these
were steamers — of a tonnage ranging from 250 to 860
tons for each vessel — average value landed from these
steamers was 45,820 dollars (£9,441). Nearly the whole
of the whaling at the mouth of the Mackenzie is done by
the steamers. Six of these vessels also landed 90 fox,
48 lynx, 2 bear, and 10 other skins, 6,000 lbs. walrus
hides, and 1,310 lbs. walrus ivory.

1889 — Twenty-three vessels, including tender, landed
products to the value of 358,935 dollars ; average value

to each vessel, 15,606 dollars there

were seven steamers, average value of products landed,
31,178 dollars. .

Each whale is worth 6,000 dollars, when both oil Enomoas

. . valae of eaob

and bone are utihzed. whale.

. . . Our North coast whale fisheries are ex- Theoniy
tremely valuable in the eyes of the Americans, for no Arctic are the

, •' J, *' AmericanB.

others operate there . . .

The fishing season of the Arctic is usually from S**of°w2aiS«
about the first of May to the first of October .... season.

The vessels cruise South of Behring Strait until the
ice breaks up sufficiently for them 'to force their way
through the Strait into the Arctic Ocean; This is
generally about the first to the middle of June. The
whalers enter the Arctic about the first of the month.

124

JSSate ta°' When the Whales enter the Arctic they follow up

MaokeuBie the American shore into the North East as fast as the
Bayi

ice breaks up. They go, nobody knows where, but it
is surmised into the great basin at the mouth of the
Mackenzie Biver.

Report of inspector 0. GONSTANTINE, Oornmandant of Yukon
District, 20th November, 1896.

attcntkm"** "^^^ territory about the mouth of the Mackenzie

direpted to the River and Herschel Island is one that the attention of

territory at

the mouth of the Government is called to. Twelve whalers, steam

the MaokeoBie ,.,..,,,.

River. and saihug, wmtered there la j wmter

1 1,
Men deserting Many men desert from the whalers each season

Mackenzie Bay *^

whalers for the and having heard of the rich placer mines of the Yukon,

diggings. make their way there These men come across

country (from Mackenzie Bay) to Bampart House, on
Short jonmey the Porcupine Biver, a distance of ten days' travel over

and easy travel- ^ .i •■•... i

ling from a rolling country, and, for this temtory, fairly easy

Mackenzie Bay n-i t ^ t\ • -n. -n

to the Yukon travelling, thence down the Porcupine River to Fort
Yukon, and from there up the river (the Yukon),

One of these men by some means got word to the
vessels, giving an account of the country here (Klondike),
which induced a number more to leave, and many
wished to, but were unable for various reasons. In
some instances, where men had succeeded in getting
away for some distance, they were overtaken by the
ship's officers, and stripped of all they had, hoping they
would then return.

&?ta Herschel Island is in the Yukon (Police Administra-

MackenzieBay tion) district Pearl Cove is the harbour on the

south side ..... about 80 miles from west mouth of
the Mackenzie. The easterly mouth of the river is the
main one, about 130 miles from the island.

126

The loe at the island breaks up about the end of £faSd S^****
May , . . . . and begins to form about 1st of September MaokenaieBay
each year.

Whaling; profits and particulars*

"The Morning Mercury," New Bedford, MaN.|
14th October, 1897.

It was in 1848 that the first whaleship passed ^Jj|^|*

through Behring Straits, and since. that time the Arctic ^^®*™®^

Ocean has been the principal field for the hunters of oil ^^^1°^
and bone.

The first steam vessel to engage in the whaling ^e®^"haier-
business was the "Mary and Helen," built by Captain a great catcu.'
Wm. Lewes in 1880. During her first voyage this
vessel captured a cargo of oil and bone valued at 100,000
dollars. She was sold to the United States Government
and re-named the " Bogers," and sent in search of the
ill-fated exploring steamer " Jeanette."

Presumably the most remarkable whaling voyage ^**^™^5.
ever made in the old days, so far as profit is concerned, wtasUnRToyace
was that of the "Envoy," which sailed from New old days.
Bedford in 1848. She returned to Providence in 1847 from
a whaUng voyage and was there condemned and sold to
Wm. O. Brownell of New Bedford to be broken up.
Mr. Brownell, however, concluded to fit her for another
voyage, and did bo, sending her to sea under the
command of Gaptam W. T. Walker. Such was the
condition of the vessel that the underwriters declined to
insure her. The net profit of the voyage was 188,450
dollars. The "Envoy" was fitted at an expense o!
about 8,000 dollars.

126

Whaling; in tlie Arctic Ocean via Mackenzie River*

i t » '

Evidence of the Hon. Wm. CHRISTIE, late Inspecting Chief Factor of
the Hudson Bay Co., to 1888 Committee.

fc(Mo?°ioefor'^ ^® *® whether whaling or sealing craft if built at

several months the headwaters of the Mackenzie Eiver could descend
to coast early enough, and ascend the river late enough
to permit of some months' fishing near the mouth of the
river, I would say, yes I do not think there would be
any difficulty in building craft at the head of the
Mackenzie to descend to the mouth of the river,
nain there for some time, and return the same
year, because, etc. . . .

Section XO« Navigability, &c., of the
Country's Seas, Rivers, and
Lakes. - - -^.

General Summary from the 1888 Committee.
Great extent In referring again to the navigation of this region,

of iinbrokon <j u *_» \j

navigation. all the evidence has agreed to the great extent of un-
broken navigation (from the mouth of the Mackenzie
Eiver).

The Peel Rivet The steamer " Wrigley," of the Hudson's Bay

stream. Company, distributes stores (to the Company's various

fur collecting posts) down to the mouth of the Mac-
kenzie, just above the estuary, where the river is said to
be six miles wide, and up the Peel Kiver, which joins
the Mackenzie near that point to Fort Macpherson, on.
that gold-bearing stream.

127

Evidence of Hon. WILLIAM CHRISTIE, ex-member of the N.W
Council, late Inspecting Chief Factor of the Hudson Bay Co.

" The Hudson Bay Co. have now a steamer on the Na^we**'
Mackenzie River, which last year (1887) ran from Fort Watew.
Simpson to the sea, and down the Feel Biver." The
distances on the Mackenzie Biver and Lakes to the
mouth — *:

100 miles (say) down Slave Biver from Fort Smith
where there are impassable rapids, to Gt. Slave
Lake.

250 miles across Gt. Slave Lake to Head of
Mackenzie, that is, Big Island or Fort
Providence.

203 miles from Head of Mackenzie, i.e., Fort Provi-
dence, to Fort Simpson.

271 „ „ Fort Simpson to Fort Norman.

434 „ „ Fort Norman to Port Separation. , .

129 „ „ Port Separation to the sea.

1,387 miles, total distance navigable for light draught
steamers from Forfc Smith on Slave Biver
to Mouth of Mackenzie. •

Evidence of Right Rev. ISIDORE CLUT, Bishop of Arendale.

The Mackenzie is the finest river in the world for Navigable
its length, its depth, and its size in summer. Steamers Mackenzie °
leaving Fort Smith cross the Great Slave Lake, and can ^* '
descend as far as the Arctic Ocean.

They can also ascend the Peel Biver.

' Evidence of GEO. W. DAWSON, LL.D.

It is a little difficult to separate the basin of the The Mackeuzie
Mackenzie from the waters of the Yukon when you get rivers inte°.
west of the mountains, because these rivers interlock itreams.^
with eacli other in all directions. ... In passing
through the country last summer I formed the opinion The Ynkon-
that a large portion of that country would be eventually coontry wiii be

... _ ° * " . * eventually

Bettled. settled.

128

Evidenoe of WILLIAM J. MoLEAN, Chief Trader of the Hudson Bay Co.

narigawe by I Cannot speak of depth of water at the mouth of

BteametB. Mackenzie Eiver, but believe that sea-going steamers
would ascend its whole length.

"^' ^' Evidenoe of DONALD MclVOR.

Wooded J -nks The Mackenzie is extensively wooded on the banks,

and excelleiit

bwboors. has excellent harbours, and would be navigable for five
months the in year by steamers of ordinary size.

« Financial Times," July 30th, 1 897.

The Pownpine « By the treaty of Washington of 1871, the Yukon,

gable. the Porcupine (flowing into it from the east) and the

Stikine were internationalised for navigation purposes

at the suggestion of Sir Donald Smith, the present

Canadian High Commissioner."

Distance between Mackenzie and Yukon Rivers.

R. G. McCONNELL, 1888-89.
Acart-trau The navigable waters of the Mackenzie are sepa-

bfiiiWfidl t)ll6

Yukon and the rated from those on the Yukon in lat. 67^ 20 N. by a
distance of about 60 miles only. A cart trail was staked
out some years ago by the Hudson's Bay Company across
the interval separating these rivers, with the intention
of supplying the Mackenzie Eiver district with goods by
way of the Yukon River ; but the project fell through,
and the road was never built.

The Mackenzie River and Tributaries.

WM. OGILVIE, I887t88.

The Mackenzie Capt. Bell, of the Steamer " Wrigley," stated that

depth. the shallowest water found by him in any part of the

Mackenzie was 11 feet. . .

Important un- From all the evidence I (Ogilvie) could gather

explored Tribu- «, - ,-1^,

toriesof the vossels drawmg from 8 to 10 feet of water would find no
uiTer. difficulty in navigation as far ars Great Slave Lake. A

129

i lort distance above the Bamparts (near Fort Good
Hope) a river flows into the Mackenzie from the west.
It appeared to be 200 yards wide at its mouth. All I
could learn about it at the Fort was that it came from
far up in the mountains.

6^ miles above Sans Sault Bapids and 328 miles
from Fort Macpherson, on the Mackenzie, Garcagou
Biver comes in from the west. It is a large river, being
not less than 400 yards wide at its mouth.

An Indian with me (Ogilvie) stated that this stream ^ Si|ht?rove
was very large and very long, the Indians having J^^^JJ®'"
ascended it for great distances through the mountains.

It appeared to run parallel to the Mackenzie for some
distance, then, turning sharply to the west, to enter the
mountains. This river seems to be the largest tributary
of the Mackenzie below the Liard.

Q. M. DAWSON, 1887.

The Mackenzie drains an area of 677,400 square

miles.

See Section 11 for distances.

The Porcupine, Rat and Bell Rivers.

Extracts from the Report of Mr. WILLIAM OGILVIE, 1887-88.

Writing of the excellence of his two Peterborough
Canoes, Mr. Ogilvie writes : —

In the Spring of 1888, they (the Canoes) descended Joamey from

the latter river (the Porcupine) . ... to the mouth to the month of

of Bell's Biver, and up it to McDougall's Pass. They River.*" ^
were then carried over the Pass to Poplar Biver, and
were used in going down the latter to the Peel Biver,
and thence up Mackenzie Biver, 1,400 miles.

R. Q. McCONNELL, 1887.

The Bat Biver for some miles from the Peel Biver Bat Rirer.
winds through a flat alluvial plain then enters a lake

ISO

region as the current is uniform aiicl easy,
the mountains are reached.

After this

The Porcupine Biver rises only 80 miles from the
Yukon, describes a great curve and joins the Yukon 150

The Heafl-
\raterB of the
Poronpine

miles from the miles farther down. At its most easterly point it
approaches within 30 miles of the Mackenzie (and
naturally much nearer the Peel Biver). Its length 10
500 miles.

The B«ll Biver.

From the
Bioatb of the
Mackenzie
Biver to the
Yukon.

The Bell Biver is through alluvial and quartzita
country. Its upper part has not been explored. At the
Fort (La Pierre's House) it is a small, sluggish stream,
of 40 to 50 yards wide ; banks low, and alluvial with
wooded banks. Its length from La Pierre's House to
the Porcupine is about 30 miles, with no rapids and
navigable throughout.

The Indians take seven days to do the heavy portage-
boats, &c., from Fort Macpherson to La Pierre's House-
exactly 50 miles. (This is the cross-country, portage.
By way of the McDonald Pass the journey can be done
almost the whole way by the waters of the Eat and Bell
Bivers and a lake in the Pass).

Short rente
acroBB from
the month of
{he Uftckenzie
to the Forca-
pine.

Evidence of the Hon. WM. CHRISTIE, late Inspecting Chief Factor
of the Hudson Bay Co.

For the trade on the Yukon we (the Hudson Bay
Co.) used to take the goods down the Mackenzie and
across the mountains to the Porcupine, thence down the
Yukon. It is only a short distance across from the
waters of the Mackenzie Biver. Peel's Eiver (Fort
Macpherson) is the lowest post on the Mackenzie (near
the mouth). ".

See Section 11 for distances. -

Arctic Beglon
rivers navi-
gable from 3 to
4 month.i each
year.

R. Q. MoCON NELL, 1888-89. ,

The Bat and Porcupine (which includes the Bell)
Bivers could easily be navigated for three or four months
of the year by small steamers from La Pierre House
down to the junction of the Porcupine and Yukon Bivers.

181

. : R. Q. McCONNELL, 1888-89.

This river — the Porcupine — arises within 30 miles of rtBesonTao*"*
the Pelly-Yukon River, Lat. 65° 30' N., and after f^^o" *»»•
describing a huge curve of about 500 miles joins the
Yukon about 150 miles further down from the point
nearest its head waters.

From the Bell Biver to the Yukon short ripples are
met with . . . but no rapids or other obstructions
which would prevent the navigation of the stream by
small steamers.

The distance, by river, from La Pierre's House to
Fort Yukon, where the Porcupine joins the Yukon, is
290 miles.

See Section 11 for distances, .

Bell and Rat Rivers, and McDougal'5 Pass.

WM. OQILVIE, 1887-88.

About five miles above La Pierre's House, in an Aconntry
air line, but much more than that by the nver, the Rat Bo^e.
River joins from the East (this river flows into the Peel)
, . . . the country around abounds with game.

There are two routes — one for winter, and the An old route
other for summer travel— between La Pierre's House the mouth of
on the Bell River, and Fort Macpherson on the to the Yoko^i.
Peel. The distance between is said to be nearly
80 miles, and is done in three days. All the trading
outfit for La Pierre's and Rampart House (on the Lower
Porcupine) has to be brought this way in the winter
months on dog sleighs, and the furs and meat received
for it has to be taken to Fort Macpherson in the same
way. From there the furs are sent out by the Mackenzie
River. Shallow draught steamers drawing not more
than 2 feet 8 inches can navigate any place in the Bell
and Porcupine Rivers.

K 2

132.

McDongall'B
Fmb.

Asbestos.

A large seam
of good ooal.

Game In
abnndanoe

A good road-
way possible.

By the Stimmer Boute vi& MoDougall's Pass the
Bell Biver is navigable 21 miles (Ogilyie did this journey
by water as early as 8th Jure).

A shallow creek about 8 miles in length takes one ta
the Pass, which is four miles across. Lakes on the top,
when open, reduce this portage distance to less than
half a mile. A creek, 3^ miles long, on the other side
takes one to Trout Biver — ^thence to the Peel.

The Pass is wide and level, the valley being nearly
a mile wide at the bottom and very flat. It is almost
treeless.

The distance from Bell Biver to Trout Biver by this
route is about 14^ miles.

The summit of the Pass is only 1,200 feet above sea
level and not more than 200 feet above the level of Bell
Biver.

There are several veins of asbestos at the foot of the
slope on the south side of the Trout Biver about four
miles from the Pass.

lOi miles down the river I saw (quoting Ogilvie),
what seemed to be a 3-feet seam of coal in the face of
the chff on the river edge. It extended a quarter of a
mile along the whole length of the cliff. Mr. McDougall
told me that he had found the same seam, and had taken
some of the coal to Fort Simpson, where it was tried
and found to be a fair quahty of coal.

Mountain goats, big horn sheep, cariboo, and moose,
abound in the hills around the Pass.

From the Pass to slack water in the level ground
at the foot of the hills, is a distance of 24 miles by the
Trout Biver. A roadway with a gradient of 55 feet to
the mile might be made, reducing this distance to 20
miles. Such a road was projected by Mr. McDougall.

Trout Biver is called — locally — ^Poplar Biver from
the foot of the hills to Peel Biver.

133

Fort MoPherson is on the right bank of Peel River, ffl^Mii?*'
some 14 miles above the point where it divides and joins ^tti^j^Sh"***
the Mackenzie delta. The river at the fort is about half kemie.
a mile wide. The growth of timber (in the district), is,
for the latitude, very large and thick, many spruce from
12 to 16 inches diameter occurring along the Peel Biver,
and along the Mackenzie for some miles up.

{See Section 11 for distances).

The Peel River.

{See Section 11 for distances.)

Extracts from the Report by R. G. McCONNELL, B.A., 1887.

The Peel River winds through a low alluvial country
for thirty miles from Fort MacPherson then enters the
mountains and is 300 miles long.

R. G. McCONNELL, I888-89.

Of the other tributaries of the Mackenzie, Peel River a very
is the only one that can be considered navigable. This navigable
is ascended annually by the steamer Wrigley as far as the MM^eiuie.
Fort Macpherson a distance of about 30 miles, and if
necessary could be followed much farther, but the exact
distance is not known. <

W. A. k. ISBITER'S Journey down the Peel River, 18«.

Isbiter, an employ^ of the Hudson's Bay Company The only
made a boat journey down the Peel in the year 1844, the Peei Biver
from Fort Macpherson. Some distance up the river he
abandoned his boats owing to the difi&culty experienced .
in making way against the swift stream with his small
party and large cumbersome boats. He took to canoes
which further up he also abandoned owing to the in-
creasing swiftness of the current. He mentions no
serious impediments to steamer navigation of this river
and gives its approximate length at 300 miles.

134

, v> . ,i ,. The Yukon.

{See Section 11 for distances.)

■f

;A-' '

Q. M. DAWSON, 1887. ;^rv.']

Area Oi-ftined ' The Yukon drains an area of 330,917 square miles,
* °°' of which 15,768 miles are in Canadian and 180,144 square
miles in United States territory.

V .<, Q. M. DAWGON, 1887. , ^X

N»T^abiut7 o{ The Yukon is navigable for small steamers from its

mouth to Miles Canon, thence, after an interruption of
about three miles, to the head of Bennett Lake and to an
additional distance by the waters extending south eastward
from Tagish Lake.

A trip up the Yukon.

"Pall Mail Qazette," 18th August, 1897.
A pleasant trip The trip to the gold-fields by the Yukon Eiver route

In the sommei r o j

Mme. is pleasant for tourists during the summer months. They

leave Seattle (or some other Pacific Coast Port), on a well
appointed ocean steamer, which proceeds up Puget
-Sound, passes Port Townsend and Victoria, and gets out
through the Straits of San Juan del Fuca, to the Pacific.
From then on the voyage is an interrupted run of 2,000
miles to Dutch Harbour, the first stop. Dutch Harbour
is a coaling station and a supply point for naval vessels
and the Behring Sea fleets of sealers and whalers. After
a short stop there the vessel proceeds on its way north
through Behring Sea, past the Seal Island of St. George
and St. Paul, and up through Norton Sound to Fort Get
There, on St. Michael's Island, where is located the
transfer and supply station for the Yukon Eiver. Here
the traveller finds a good many native Esquimos. Here
passengers and freight are transferred to large and
commodious river steamers, which proceed down the
coast sixty miles to the north mouth of the Yukon, a
river larger than the Mississippi, that can be navigated

135

with large steamers 2,300 miles without a break, and NavigaWeby
which abounds in fish, the salmon being noted far and a 'Jl'J' «""«"

.-, ,./. n -., . without a

Wide for their fine flavour and large size. break.

As one proceeds up the river one sees innumerable
Indian villages and small settlements inhabited by
traders, missionaries, and Indians, all of interest to the
traveller. The first two or three hundred miles is through
a low, flat country, after which the mountainous country
is reached, and the constant change of magnificent scenery constant
is beyond description. At old Fort Yukon, which is ma^ifloent
inside of the Arctic circle, during the months of June and ■**°*'y*
July the sun is above the horizon without a break, and
all along the river during these months one can read a
paper at any time during the day or night without a lamp.
It is continuous daylight during this time.

After leaving here the next point of interest is ciroieCity
Circle City, the metropolis of the Yukon country. Here cudahy.
is a large frontier town, the houses all built of logs, and
while they have no pretensions to beauty they are warm
and comfortable. Circle city has a population of nearly
2,000 people, and some of the best placer mines in the
country are located near this place. From here the
traveller proceeds up the river 240 miles farther, and
finds Fort Cudahy at the mouth of Forty-Mile Creek.
This is a thriving town, similar to Circle City, but not so
large. It is the supply point for the mines in the forty-
mile district. Prosperous for the last four years, it has
turned out a great quantity of gold, this being the first
important district where coarse gold was discovered. A
little farther on is Dawson City and 66 miles over the °*^° ^^g^
hills are the Klondike placer mines. , , ^. Snes.*'

The Klondike River.

{See Notes No. 1 for particulars of this Biver.)
The Globe of July 26th states that the Klondike Biver is 800 miles Length ol tbe

in length.' If so — even 200 miles — its head waters must extend
to the navigable waters of the Peel Biver, which joins the
Mackenzie at its mouth. Thus, these rich quartz reefs can
be reached by river steamers from Mackenzie Bay. Mr. de Windt
gives 160 miles as the length of the KUmdyhe.—'E. J.D.

Klondike Biver

136

OgUvle'B
loorney from
the Ynkon to
the month of
the UaokeuEle
M3TOB8 oonntry
and down the
Foronpine.

The Peel Biver
near the bead-
waters of the
Foiouplna

The (^nintrjr
imdolating,
wooded and
aotxooky.

The Tatonduc, Porcupine and Peel River«.

WM. OQILVIE, 1887-88.

About 14 miles above the mouth (junction of
Tatonduc and Yukon Bivers) the forks are reached.
One branch comes from the S.E. and the other (down
which Ogilvie travelled) from the S.E. The Indians
state that the latter rises in a plateau three days, Indian
travelling, away (about 40 miles), and in the same
plateau a stream rises which flows to the north,
probably into one of the head streams of the Peel Biver.
The Boundary Line between Alaska and the N. W.
Territories crosses the Tatonduc a short distance below
the Forks . . . « , ,, ^.

Leaving the river (about 40 miles from its mouth)
and continuing about a mile up the valley of a small
stream coming from the east, we reached the top of ^
low ridge which forms the watershed between the waters
of the Tatonduc and those of the stream which the
Indians assured me flows into the Peel.

I had much difficulty in understanding this, as I
could hardly believe that the watershed was so near the
Yukon, and it was not until they had drawn many maps
of the district and after much argument that I gave
credit to their statements. I then proposed to go down
this stream to the Peel and to reach the Mackenzie
in that way, but they professed to be horrified and
frightened . . . caused me to decide not to try it.

It seemed improbable that this river ran as the
Indians said, but I afterwards procured other evidence
which proves that it does. The river has been named
" Ogilvie Biver " by Mr. J. Johnson, Geographer to the
Department of the Interior. From evidence which I
obtained from Mr. McDougal of the Hudson's Bay Co.
and others, I ascertained that this "Ogilvie Biver"
joined the Peel about 60 miles above Fort Macpherson
but that it was impassable in many places.

There are mountains close to the headwaters of the
Tatonduc Biver, but beyond the country is undulating,
not rooky, and more or less wooded.

137

From the Tatonduo to the Porcupine by the track I
followed is 16} miles. Of this distance 13 ruiles is
drained by the river flowing into the Peel. "Oistributed
over this 13 miles are 10 small creeks whioa unite 8 or
10 miles down the valley. I did not go down to the
junction but could, from some places, see the stream
iormed by the union, and although pj near its head it
appeared to be as large as the Tatouduo is about midway
of its course. '''■

' * This plateau, except for the ravines in which the Fiat country

* -^ and mnoii

creeks run, is tolerably flat. It slopes to the east down snus.
the river, and is, as far as can be seen, undulating and
wooded. Lat. 65° 25'. Where the woods are open
there is much fine short grass.

Where I met the Porcupine it is a large creek

flowing northward The valley can be seen

for about six miles up when it turns to the west and

goes out of sight. The stream flows in a bed of fine The Um>«r

gravel and the volume of water was large for the time fine Toimne of

of year (March). About half-a-mile below this, it enters lakes.

a lake three or four miles long and upwards of a mile

wide. Two other lakes follow this one at short intervals.

These three lakes I called the Upper, Middle and Lower

Na-hone Lakes. Below these the river (the Porcupine)

is twice the size that it is above. It flows in a valley

about a mile wide, well-timbered on the bottom, much

of the timber being of fair size, on some of the flats are

found many trees over a foot in diameter, long, clean-

trunked, a^d well suited for making lumber.

- "T" ,•■■;'■•■■■" '■
<

^ About five miles below the lower lake a large ^o^uie^wert
branch comes in from the west. Perhaps this should fbe'p^'rcliDiiie
be called the river as it is much larger than the branch
I came down, both in width and volume of water. It
comes from the S.W., and has quite a large valley which
can be seen from the junction of the two streams for a
distance of eight or ten miles.

138

Timber and
■hrubbei7
large and
•ti'ong in the
npper waters
country of the
Poranpine.

Deer, beaver,
Otter, rabbits
and game in
•bondance.

The Indians had told me of a large oreek down
Poroupine Biver heading near another oreek which flows
into the Lewes (Yukon). They used to go up the latter
cross over to the Porcupine and go down it to fish.
From their description and the distance they said it was
below the lakes, I first thought this oreek to be the one
referred to, but afterwards I saw another branch of the
Porcupine further down which is probably the one they
spoke of. , - ■ ' ■:■•■■ '■

A short distance down the Porcupine, six miles below
the Lower Lake the Lat. is GS" 43 ' and Long. IBS^ 48'
West of Greenwich. The mean height of the barometer
here during May (I camped here until the ice broke) was
27.60 inches, indicating an elevation of about 2,CC0 feet
above sea level. Notwithstanding the high elevation
and latitude, the timber and shrubbery in the bottom of
the valley grew as large and strong as on the Upper
Lewes River in 6 degrees lower latitude. ^.i

Surrounding my oamp was a timber-covered flat
about 2 square miles in area, on which grew many nice
trees, upwards of a foot in diameter. Nearly all of
these were spruce, but there were also some clumps of
Cottonwood, the trees on which nearly averaged as large
as is the same species along the Athabasca and Peace
Bivers. Willows are abundant along the streams, and
grow as large as they generally do in other parts of the
territory — 4 to 5 inches thick. A few white birch were
seen.

Owing to the isolation of this district, animal life is
abundant. Beaver, otter, marten, rabbits, and number^
less cariboo .... Tracks of fox and lynx were
also seen. Ptarmigan were numerous, and many pretty
birds. Moose are very numerous. ;. -j x „^ i..

The ice cleared sufficiently for boat navigation on
May 28th, the date I started down the Porcupine.

About 22 miles below the Lower Lake, and 17 miles
from the other large branch from the S.W. we came to

139

another flowing in from the west. This is, I believe, ^to'^llsros?*"
the creek by which the Indiana used to come in ySSJ^JftJ,"^?"
from the Lewes. Here are many old racks for upp«r Porou.
drying fish, from which I call this creek the " Fishing
Branch " of the Porcupine .... There are no
dangerous rapids on this (the Porcupine) river, but it is.
all swift, running over a bed of lime gravel ....
steamers drawing 2^ feet could navigate this stream
even in summer. Sights were taken from point to
point, and distances estimated. From the Lower Lake
to Bell Biver, following all the windings of the river, is
a distance of about 216 miles.

{See Section 11 for distances).

'"• The Stewart River.

WM. OQILVIE, 1887.
Alexander McDonald, who has been mentioned a. McDonald
before, reported to me that the gold on the upper river the headwaters
(of the Stewart) was somewhat coarser than that on the uiver.

lower (near the mouth) He seemed satisfied

with the result of his season's prospecting and intended
spending the next season there.

Many of the miners who had spent 1886 on the sodootber
Stewart Biver and 1887 on the Forty Mile Biver seemed
to think the former the better all round mining field, as
there were no such failures there as on the Forty Mile, and
they declared their intention to make their way back to
the Stewart.

Between Klondike Biver and Stewart Biver, a large Evidence of
creek called Indian Greek, flows into the Yukon and rich towards the
prospects have been found on it, and no doubt it is in oPSSe steward
the gold-bearing country between the Klondike and company
Stewart Bivers, which is considered by all the old miners Mproaoh trom
the best and most extensive gold country ever found. * *' '*'*
Scores of them would prospect it but for the fact that
they cannot get provisions up there, and it is too far to
boat them iip from here (Gudahy) in small boats. The
new find will necessitate an upward step on the Yukon
and help the Stewart Biver Begion.

140

Gooa gold .-„^ Further South (from the Klondike) yet lies the heads
head waters of of Several branches of the Stewart Biver on which some
river tiibuta- prospecting has been done this summer (1896) and good

indications found, but the want of provisions prevented

development.

richer*thMithe " ^^ '^^ ^^^^ *^** *^® Stewart Eiver, which drains an
Klondike immense Eirea into the Yukon, has been discovered to be

much richer than Klondike."

From the London "Standard's" Speoial Correspondent,
26th August, 1897.

New York.

The Stewart A telegram from Ottawa explains why Canada has

Bn^ass tho^^ neglected the Edmonton route to Klondyke mentioned in
the letter published in The Standard of the 17th instant,
from a Correspondent who subscribes himself ♦' Sixteen
years in Canada." Canada is quietly sending out explorers
thither, being informed that the placers on the Stewart
Eiver surpass those of Klondyke. But it desires to post-
pone any immigration at present;, until the administration
has been perfected, and the journey rendered safe.

Mr. DE WINDT, in the "Daily Teiegraph," 12th August, 1897.

The Stewart " The Stewart Eiver, some eighty miles away, is also

^Ifd-beMU^ extremely rich in auriferous quartz, and is likely before
quartz. jQjjg ^Q oQme into prominence as a gold-bearing region. ' ' '

W. OGILVIE, 1888.

The naviga- "While at the mouth (of the Stewart Eiver) I was

stowa^t Elver, fortunate enough to meet a miner who had spent tho

Sas^ontThekd whole of the summer of 1887 on the river and its

oUto^PMi^"^® branches, prospecting and exploring^ He is a nati»e of

Biver. j^g^ Brunswick, Alexander McDonald by name, and

has spent some years mining in other places, but was

very reticent about what he had made or found.

McDonald, speaking of his journey to the head waters

of the Beaver Eiver, states that he went to the head of

this branch of the Stewart Eiver, and found terraced

141

gravel hills to the west and north : he crossed them to
the north, and found a river flowing northward. On this
he emharked on a raft, and floated down it for a day or .
two, thinking it would turn to the west and join the
Stewart, but finding it still continuing north, and ao«
quiring too much volume to be any of the branches he had
seen while passing up the Stewart, he returned to the point
of departure. . , . .

It is probable that the river flowing northwards on The Peel River
which he made a journey and returned, was a branch of Stewart nearly
the Peel Biver. . . . Judging from all I could learn navigable,
it is probable that a light draught steamboat could navi-
gate nearly all the Stewart Biver and its Tributaries.

R. Q. MoCONNELL, 1888-89.

Stewart Eiver, the principal tributary of the Yukon,
«... is reported to be navigable for a distance of
nearly 200 miles above its mouth, but has not yet been
ascended by the steamers plying on the Yukon^

MacMiilan River.

:v: , ., . ,, Q. M. DAWSON, 1887.
; The MacMiilan and Stewart Eivers are navigable for The Btewart

° and MacMiilan

steamers for a considerable, though unknown, distance. Severs naviga-

ble for a oou-

I (G. M. Dawson) met a couple of miners (Messrs. Monroe siderabio but

_ unexplored

and Langtry) who had ascended the MacMiilan for several distance,
days in a boat. They reported the distance of a large
area of low land with good soil, and had met with no
impediments to navigation as far as they had gone.

The Porcupine Maclcenzie Route.
G. M. DAWSON, 1887.

One result of this journey (Campbell, 1850) was to MacTende to

show that the route from Fort Selkirk, by way of the the Yukon a>
T. .I-.. 1 ■«» 1 . ' J J preferable

Porcupine Biver to the Mackenzie, was preferable to 'o^^e.
that originally discovered.

143

Fine gold has been found at the moiith of the Porcu-
pme, indicating the presence of gold-bearing bars or reefs
on its upper reaches. ,^v ' . - Ux; >; > -- - ;,

{See Section 11 for distances.)

ThePelly
navigable and
gold'bearlog

- The Pelly River.

G. M. DAWSON, 1887.

From the site of old Fort Selkirk the Felly might be
navigated by small steamers to within 50 miles of the
site of old Fort Pelly Banks.

Along the Upper Felly there are large masses of
quartz, quartz gravel and placer bars, no doubt gold
bearing.

{See Section 11 " Distances of Chief Bivers, etc.")

The great
\7aterway from
the Sonth; gold
bearing toiba-
taiteB

fTtae Tippet
Liard ioo
broken for
ooutinnouB
navlgatioa

The Lewes River.

G. M. DAWSON, 1887.
The Lewes is the chief branch, if not a continua*
tion, of the Yukon which it joins at Fort Selkirk. It is
the chief waterway by which miners enter the Yukon
district from the South. It is referred to, in this respect,
under section 10 — "Distances of Chief Eivers, &c."
Gold is found in small quantities along almost its entire
course, though chiefly on its tributaries. Dawson states
(1887 Eeport), that "quartz vein-stuff is much less
important as a constituent of the river-gravels (of this
river) than it is on the Upper Pelly, Upper Liard and
other streams to the eastward.
' {See Section 11 for distances.)

The Liard, Francis and Dease Rivers; also Dease and

Francis Lakes.

Evidence of Q. M. DAWSON, LL.D., Director of thelGeologioal Survey
of Canada to 1888 Committee of the Senate.

From its mouth at Fort Simpson (Mackenzie Biver)
the Liard is probably navigable for steamers, in a
southerly direction, for about 200 miles, or the mouth of

143

the Nelson or East branch. The river above this place
to the mouth of the Dease is generally very swift and
dangerous, with numerous narrow canons.

The Devil's Portage is four miles long, over a moun- pjf Jjl'^'^'"
tain 1,000 feet high. This part of the river is navigable
for boats only with great difficulty, and had always been
accounted the most dangerous in the region. The
ticnth-west branch of the Liard, known as the Black
Turnagain, or Mud Biver, is reported to have a moderate
current, and zsay prove of use as a means of com-
munication.

The Liard, above the month of the Dease, and Thepppez

Liard and

the Francis Eiver, its main tributary, ^^^ere ascended by FranoiB Biven.
me in boats last summer. There is one bad canon just
above the mouth of the Dease and two in the Francis
Biver, and these streams could only be navigated for
short lengths.

The Dease Eiver iz about 140 miles in length. SfveFSS"
There are several rapids, and it is scarcely navigable by ^*«*8« ^'^*'
steamers under the most favorable circumstances. It is
already navigated by large flat-bottomed boats. At its
head is Dease Lake, 26 miles in length, on which there
is a small steamer. Francis Lake, fit the head of the
above-mentioned river of same name, has two arms
running northwards, and has a total navigable length of ;

64 miles.

{See Section 11 for distances.)

The Liard River.

[See Section 11 for distances.)
R.G.MCCON NELL. 1888-89.
The Liard is navigable from Fort Simpson — its Heu G»t»-the
mouth in the Mackenzie Biver to Fort Liard and thence the Liaid.
on up the West branch as far as Hell Gate. Above Hell
Gate its navigation, owing to the numerous rapids and
canons, is exceedingly difficult and dangerous even with
small boats. The NIbIsou or East branch of the Liard
reported to be navigable by small steamers for 100 miles
or BO above its mouth.

144

Dangers off the Liard Route.

j^iiard^ Mr. Warburton Pike in his work, "The Barren

tenon. Grounds of Northern Canada" (published 1892), says

he would have preferred the Liard route from Fort
Simpson to the Pacific Coast, but — " the Liard itself is
so full of terrors even for the hardy voyagev/rs of the
North " that he could not induce guides and boatmen
to accompany him.

Formerly the Hudson's Bay Co. had an establishment
at Fort Halkett on the West Branch of the Liard, but
the difficulties of conveying supplies, and the frequent
occurrence of starvation made it a hard post to maintain ;
finally a boat's crew were drowned by a capsize in one
of the worst rapids, and the fort was abandoned.

R. Q. MoGON NELL, 1888-89.

TabQik

The Hndson From its (Liard) junction with the Dease Eiver to its

oidroate toi^e mouth this river is 470 miles long .... The
Hudson's Bay Company used this river for years as a
trading route to the YiUson, but the difficulties of navi-
gation caused the Company to look for an easier route
to the fur fields on the West of the Eockies, and they
changed to a route from the Pacific via the Stickine and
Dease Elvers. The Liard Eiver is navigable for shallow
draught steamers from its mouth to Hell Gate, but fi'om
there to Devil's Portage it has to be portaged. The rest
of the way to Dease Eiver is very rough in places, and
consequently scarcely navigable by steam craft.

This river has about 240 miles of navigable waters.
{See Section 1^, — '* Old Stickine Route.")

From the Liard to the Pelly*

Q. M. DAWSON, 1887.

From the confluence of the Dease and Liard (the
latter at this point is 840 feet in width and 6 feet deep),
to Frances Eiver the distance is 45 miles.

146

From this confluence to the lower end of Frances A?* °}^ "S"*,*

01 tbe Hn'ison

Lake the distance is 135 miles. Frances Lake is about ^ay Company.

33 miles in length. Finlayson River, entering the West

arm of Frances Lake is 22 miles long, navigable for boats,

and Finlayson Lake — where Finlayson River rises — is

9^ miles in length. From this lake to the Pelly River

is only a distance of 15 miles.

Gold on the Liard and Francis Rivers.

With rega: ^ to gold on the Liard I may state that important
remunerative barL' have been worked on its upper waters deposits wiii
and a long way down towards the Mackenzie. The Liard: countty
whole appearance of this country leads to the belief that veins. *^" ^
important mineral deposits will be found in it, besides port*
those placer mines. There are large quantities of quartz
ledges along the rivers; in many places on the Liard
River, half the river gravel is composed of quartz and
the whole country is full of quartz veins, some of which
are likely to yield valuable minerals.

Gold has been found on many Tributaries of the
Liard and Francis Rivers.

Francis Lake*

This lake is at the headwaters of the Liard and ooid-bearfng

quartz about

Dawson reports that in general appearance the rocks of Francis Lake
Francis Lake very closely resemble those from which the
rich placer gold deposits of Dease Lake (Cassiar) are
derived . . . Where Finlayson Rivar enters Francis
Lake and along the shores of the lake there is a notable
abundance of quartz containing gold.

Road from Francis Lalce to Pelly Banks.

Evidenceof Mr. JAMES ANDERSON, quoting the diary of hisfalher
the explorer, before the 1888 Committee.

A portage (bad), 20 miles to the head of the J£^f,P"
Cordellais Cascades, Finlayson't Branch, thence possible
to navigate a canoe about 40 miles to Beaver Forks,
thence 18 miles to Finlayson's Lake ; river insignificant,
much barred with trees, but it is possible to get a
middle-sized canoe up light ; thence across Finlayson's

146

Lake, 22 miles, a short portage to another small lake,
3 miles long, whence the waters run westward, thence
a small (Beaver) creek which passes through some small
lakes out of the direct course, thence a portage 40 miles
through thick woods, with the exception of two small
lakes and a short piece of river falling into the Pelly, in
all perhaps 7 miles, to the Pelly Eiver.

Dease River.

Q. M. DAWSON, 1887.

This river has a total length, following all its sinu-
osities from Dease Lake to the Liard Eiver, of 180 miles.
It is possible that the river might be navigated by small
stem- wheel steamers of good jjower.

{See also Section K.)

The Peace River.

{See also Section 20.—" Population of the future.")

Extent of The Upper Peace Eiver is navigable for steamers

wtAen on the drawing 3 or 4 feet, and with a little improvement at
***** tv/o points a draught of 5 or 6 feet could be utilized.

The Upper Peace Eiver affords a navigable stretch of
657 miles, which, with 222 miles on Lower Peace Eiver,
gives a total of navigation of 779 miles only, broken at
one point by a rapid 18 miles in length. ,

Coal on (the Peace River.

Coal from the Malcolm MoLeod, Q.C., ex- Judge, gave evidence to

the Arctic the 1888 Committee that coal was to be found for 350

miles along the upper reaches of the Peace Eiver and

extends to the Arctic Ocean.

Ocean.

Distances and description of tlie Peace River.

G. M. DAWSON'S Evidenoe before the Committee of the Senate, ISbC.

Distances on The following is a summary of Mr. Ogilvie's

from F^rt^*''*' Departmental Eeport of 1884 upon the Peace Eiver from
cbippewyan. Athabasca Lake to Dun vegan. Distances : —

147

MILES.

Fort Ghippewyan on Athabasca Lake to Peace

•L OIU u ••• ••• ••• ••« ••• ••• OOt

Fort Ghippewyau on Athabasca Lake to head of

Little Bapids 100^

Fort Ghippewyan on Athabasca Lake to Falls... 234

Fort Ghippewyan on Athabasca Lake to Battle

Xvl Vulr ••• ••■ ••• ••• ••• ••• %0\J

Fort Ghippewyan on Athabasca Lake to Smoky

Jtviver ... ■«( ••• ••• ••• i.c 0x1

Fort Ghippewyan on Athabasca Lake to Dun-
vegan... ... ... ... ... ... 604

The Little Eapids are 3J mile's long, with a drop of

8 feet. . - .-..v

On the Falls there is a perpendicular drop of 9i ft., Particulars

^ ^ -11, coiiserninfi the

but there is a sloping descent on one side used by boats, navigation of

* ° *' Pence litver.

One-and-a-half miles above the Falls there is a rapid
300 yards long, with a total fall for the distance of 8 ft.

The York boat and scows pass up and down through
all these, and Ogilvie states that, with the exception of
Little Eapids, the Falls and rapids near them, and two
shoal places — one near the mouth of Smoky Eiver and
one between Smoky Eiver and Dunvegan — the river is
navigable at low water for boats drawing from 5 to 6 ft.

Above Dunvegan it appears that there are no
serious impediments to steamer navigation to the Eocky
Mountain Portage, a distance of about 135 miles.

Thus, provided means are adopted for overcoming
the possible impediment of 3^ miles at Little Eapids
and 1^ mile at the Falls and rapids, the Peace Eiver
might afford a length of steamer navigation of about
740 miles. "

At the Eocky Mountain portage is an impassable
canon with a portage of 12 miles. This constitutes the
head of steamer navigation, as from this place to west
side of Eocky Mountains (about 83 miles) there are
several bad rapids.

148

The Peace is formed by the confluence of the Finlay
and Parsnip Bivers west of the mountains. These are
streams of about 500 feet wide. From the confluence
the Parsnip might, possibly, be navigated by a small
steamer for 50 or more miles southward. Little is
known of the Finlay, but much bad water is reported.

The Smoky Eiver, from Lat. 55° to its mouth,
flows in a valley 400 to 600 feet deep, half a mile wide
in the bottom and two to three miles from rim to rim.
The banks are open and grassy on southern exposures.
The current is swift, and there are many small rapids, so
that it can scarcely be considered navigable for steamers
of any kind, though it is possible that a steamer of light
draught might ascend some distance at high water.

Agriculture on the Peace River.

In his evidence before the 1888 Committee the Hon.
Wm. Christie, late Chief Inspecting Factor of the
Hudson Bay Company, stated that the Peace Eiver
country was not liable to drought, and that it is as fine
a country as he ever saw. The vegetation is luxuriant,
and that for pasture there is no better country in the
world than the Peace Biver Valley. The soil is as
cultivable as that of Manitoba. Wheat crops can be
relied on. Very little affected by frosts.

Old Stlklne Route*

Q. M. DAWSON, 1887.

Total distance From mouth of Stikine Biver to Telegraph Creek,,

to Fort Selkirk thence to Dease Lake, along Dease Biver, the Upper

Liard and Pelly Bivers, to the confluence of the Lewes

and Pelly (Fort Selkirk), 9ii mUes.

The extent of The Stikine is navigable by stern wheel steamers of

«oumi"he^*" strong engine T-.ower, drawing not more than 4 feet, for
BtiMne River. ^ ^stance of 188 miles to Telegraph Creek, 12 miles
iL»eyond Glenora. » , ••

149

•

The " Great CaCon " which extends for miles breaks
the navigation beyond. A government pack-trail, 62^
miles in length, connects Telegraph Creek with the head
of Lake Dease.

The Dease Eiver, the Upper Liard and Frances
Eivers — above the mouth of the Dease — can scarcely be
considered navigable for steamers, though passable for
large boats, with occasional portages.

The difficulties of the Lower Liard are such as to The lower

. T . , , , , _ Liard unsnlt-

render it an undesirable route, even for boats, and abieasaronte.
scarcely suitable as an avenue of trade between the
Mackenzie and B.C.

Following the river- valleys, by a route practicable ^ '*}t^' Yth "'^
for a railway, from Eothsay Point at the Mouth of the Btiuino to the

•' Mackenzie.

Stikine to the mouth of the Dease, the distance is 830
miles ; thence to Fort Simpson is a further distance of
800 miles — total from the Pacific to the navigable waters
of the Mackenzie about 720 miles.

A serious impediment occurs in the navigation of ot)stacie\o
this (the Stikine) river at the Little Canon (63 miles ",',c1owct°°"
above the great bend) when the river is at its highest stikine.
stage in June or July, in consequence of the great
velocity of the current in this narrow and rocky, through
gorge • . , Under ordinary circumstances the ascent
of the river to Telegraph Creek, with a suitable steamer,
occupies about three days, and it is generally necessary
to carry a line ashore at a few places. At low tide the
mouth of the river has not more than two feet of water.

While snow accumulates on the river flats of the Reep enow on

the lower

Stikine to a depth of from 8 to 10 feet, at Telegraph stiMne.
Creek and Tahl-tan Eiver it seldom exceeds 18 inches,
and at the latter places horses and mules have been
wintering - out for a number of years. "Wheat, oats,
barley and potatoes can be grown and ripen well on this
river, and all ordinary vegetables can be produced.

160

A Rood road
TMiito from
Ttiesraph
Creek to Deaso
Lake.

Dease Lake is the centre of the Cassiar districtf?,
and the construction of a waggon road from Telegraph
Creek (62^ miles) would not be very difiBcult or expensive.
By its construction it should be easy to lay down goods
at Dease Lake at very reasonable rates. One good bridge
over the Tooya Eiver and 8 or 10 miles of corduroy laid
down would be required. The length of Dease Lake is
24^ miles. Average width less than a mile.

This route (Stikine to Dease Lake) is an exceedingly
direct one, and, taken in conjunction with the valleys of
the Dease and Liard Eivers, it affords almost an air-line
from the Pacific coast to the Great Mackenzie Eiver.
The distance is 720 miles.

A railway de-
cided upon
from the
Stikine to tho
Yukon watef.
way.

The New Stikine Route.

{See Section 11 for distances.)

"Times," 13th September, 1897.

"Times" Correspondent — Ottawa, Septemherl2th, 1897.

Pending the final determination of the boundary
between Alaska and the Yukon district, the Dominion
Government has decided to develop the existing all-
Canadian route to the new goldfields by way of the
Stikeen Eiver. Arrangements are being made with the
Canadian Pacific Eailway by which the company will
proceed at the earliest possible period with the construc-
tion of a standard-gauge railway from Glenora, on the
Stikeen Eiver, to the head of the navigable Waters of
the Yukon. Competent engineers have been ordered to
proceed to the locality and make a survey of the country
and report on the feasibility of constructing a railway
connecting the waters of the Stikeen with those of
Teslin Lake and the Yukon. Upon receipt of their
report the construction will be begun. The length of the
line will be about 150 miles. The company will run a
line of first-class steamers between Vancouver and
Glenora.

It is believed that the magnitude of the trade of th&
Yukon district demands such a service. Altered con-

151

ditions in transport and facilities for reaching the Klondike
goldfields by an all-British route will secure to the coast
cities of British Columbia a large share of the trade of
this northern country.

"EVENINQ STANDARD," October 7th, 1897, from its special

Correspondent.
Another route which is growing in favour, owing to
the difficulties of the mountain Passes this Fall is the
Sticheen Eiver route, also known as the " All Canadian,'
because it is confined to Canadian territory. It has the
additional recommendation of being approved by
Dr. Dawson, Director of the Geological Survey, who
travelled by way of Teslin Lake ten years ago, and
advocated the building of a road in this direction. The
licad of navigation is still called Telegraph Creek, and
this route is dignified on the map with the name of
" Government Trail." Whether it exists anywhere but
on the maps may be doubted, and the Government, of
course, have accepted no responsibility beyond having
the country explored. Still, people who have travelled People claim

1 j-is: J. J. 1 • j.^ Ill-- • XI 1- i. A ij theStlchoenaS

l)y dinerent routes claim that this is the best. An old the beat route.

prospector reports that the trail from Telegraph Creek

to Teslin Lakes cannot be more than 115 or 120

miles long, and he describes the country as comparatively

easy of travel. The trail is fairly level, and though some

parts are swampy, there is plenty of timber to make Swampy in

corduroy, i.e., to make a solid road over the bog by ?'t''P°^*'*®

putting down brushwood and laying logs across it, a difflouit.

safe if not a very comfortable mode of travelling. Dr.

Dawson says of this route : — *' The river is navigable

for the ordinary flat bottom boats from Salt Water to

Telegraph Creek, a distance of 150 miles, from Telegraph

Creek to Teslin Lake is about another 150 miles through

what is believed to be a flat and not very diflicult country,

but very little is known about it. Mr. St. Cyr, a surveyor

on the staff of the Department of the Interior, is making

a survey of the country at the present time. He is

expected to come out this Autumn, and when he does

the practicability of the route will probably be settled.

152

A stretch of
uncertain
navigation on
the 8:ikeen.

From Teslin Lake there is no difiQculty whatever, there
being navigation for stern- wheel steamers right down to
the mouth of the Yukon. If this route proves practicable
it will greatly facilitate ingress and egress to and from
the Y'ikon country."

There is a very general opinion as to the value of
tnis route, and, besides the Government Surveyor, the
chief engineer of the Kootenay division of the Canadian
Pacific Eailway is investigating the locality with a view
to the construction of a railway. . . . The Stikeen
route involves a stretch of uncertain river navigation from
Wrangell to Telegraph Creek, while the Taku Inlet has
the advantage of a deep water terminus open all the
year round.

Notice of
application
for an Act to
Incorporate
n Railway
Company.

The Stiklne Route Railway.

The "Financial Post," October lltii.

Messrs. Phillips, Wootton, and Barnard, of Vancouver,
give notice that application will be made to the Legis-
lative Assembly next sension for an Act to incorporate
a company with power to construct and operate a railway
from the head of Stikeen Eiver, via Teslin Lake to the
north border of British Columbia. Also in a southerly
direction to some point on the west coast at the head of
Portland Canal. The construction and completion of
these lines of railway would give ready access to the
Yukon headwaters. Several fairly rich specimens of ore
have been brought down here lately by miners from
mineral ledges on the Stikeen Eiver. "We shall probably
hear of good discoveries in those parts soon.

The StiUne
Railway
reported
otr-cially to
bo feasible.

"Times," London, October IStli, 1897, tfircugii "Reuter's."

Ottawa, October 17th.

The Government Surveyors who have just traversed
the route of the proposed railway to pass solely through
British territory into the Yukon country, via the Stickeen
River, report that the project of a boundary railway from
Glenora on the Stickeen to Lake Tchu, from which point

163

there la unintemipted navigation to Klondike, is quite
feasible. The distance is about 185 miles. The Canadian
Pacific Railway Company this week sent two additional
engineering staffs into the district. The work of oon*
struotion will be begun next spring.

Qold on the 5tlklne.

Placer gold mining has been carried on intermittently Jp*j| ^"n^.
on the bars of this river since 1861, and a " rush "
took place in the following year. This was followed by
exploration further into the country and the opening '

np of the Dease Lake District and the Cassiar country
in 1873. In 1874 the output of gold was valued at
1,000,000 dollars.

The Tes-lin-too (Hootalinqua) Riven

{See Section 11 for distances.)
G. M. DAWSON. 1887.

The Tes-lin-too is navigable for stern- wheel steamers The new chief
for 160 miles or more from its mouth as far as Lake tifeSon^L ""
Teslin, while the Takh-heena may probably be ascended
by steamers of the same class for some distance. This
river (the Tes-lin-too) is no doubt destined to be the
chief waterway from the South to the Lower Lewes on
to the Yukon country. Payable gold-bearing bars are
found along its banks and tributaries where a number of '

miners are now working.

The Big Salmon River.

Q. M. DAWSON, 1837.
Big Salmon river may probably be ascended by An important
steamers of the same class as the Tes-hn-too for some ^*''
distance. Dawson reports this river as being much
more important than any other of the tributaries, joining
the Lewes further down, being 347 feet wide with a
depth of 5 feet, and might be navigated by stern-wheel
shallow draught steamers for many miles. It runs into

154

" Island Lake," 190 miles from its junction with the
Lewes. Though there is plenty of fine gold along this
river there are no good payable bars.

An old Indian
ronte from the
Btikiae.

The White
preferred to
t>ie Ohilkoot
JPas.s by
Dawsou.

The Tahl-Tan Rive«

G. M. DAWSON, 1887.
About twelve miles above Telegraph Creek, and on
the trail to Dease Lake, the Tahl-tan River enters the
Stikine. It rises about 30 miles to the north, and
occupies a portion of an important valley which, still
further to the north westward, carries the upper branche;^
of the Taku River, and the furthest sources of the Lewes
River. The Indians travel along this valley, and it
appears worthy of attention as a route from the navi-
gable waters of the Stikine to the Yukon basin.

The Chilkoot (Taiya) Pass.

G. M. DAWSON, 1887.
The Chilkoot Pass is such that it would scarcely
be possible to constract a useful trail across for pack
animals, Lut the White Pass appears to offer a better
opportunity for making a trail or road.

Anew
American

railway
prospect— 300
miles.

A Railway Line from Chilkoot Inlet to Fort Selkirk.

"Financial News," October 2l8t, 1897.
According to news from San Francisco, a party of
12 engineers and surveyors has left that city for Seattle,
where it will be reinforced by eight assistants and 50
otLars who will sail for Chilkoot Inlet in a steamer
especially chartered for the trip. At Seattle 200 horses,
150 cattle, feed for six months, and 200 tons of general
stores will be purchased for the party during fcho long
drive from Kiukwark, at the head of Chilkoot Inlet, to
Fort Selkirk, the head of steam navigation on the Yukon,
a distance of 300 miles, over a trail unfrequented
during the winter.

The expedi'jion is to deternine whether a railway
..an be built over this 800 mile trail. The engineers will
also try to locate a now pass, believed to exist north of

155

the Chilkoot. The organisers of the expe*^ i are from
Boston, San Francisco, and Puget Sound, anu ^ve formed
a company with a capital of 200,000 dollars to mef^t
necessary preUminary expenses. The members of thii
party expect to arrive in January at Fort Selkirk, whero
permanent headquarters for railway construction will be
located. All the members of the party have been
engaged for two years.

{See Section 11 for distances, and Sections 18 and 27
for further particiddrs.)

The Chilkat Pass.

Q. M. DAWSON, 1887.

From the "West Branch of Lynn Canal, a distance The Takh-

■' -, (• m heenaUiver

of about 50 miles to the lake at the head of the Tahk- easy to navi-
gate,
heena river, then down the river to Lake Labarge. The

voyage down this river is said to be easier than by the

main river, the rapids being less serious.

{See Section 11 for distances, and Sections 18 and 27

for further particulars.)

The White Pass.

G. M. DAWSON, 1887.

This Pass leaves the coast at the mouth of Shkagway The route ot
Eiver, four miles south of the Head of Taiya Inlet, and Columbia d«-
runs parallel to Chilkoot Pass at no great distance IsifJX'tioa
from it.

The distance from the coast to the summit is about
17 miles,

Ogilvie describes this route (1896) as commencing OgHvie's
at Taiya Inlet, about 2 miles south of its north end ; it
follows up the valley of the Shkagway Eiver to its source,
and thence down the valley of another river which
Dr. Dawson says empties into Taku Arm of Tagish
Lake. Capt. Moore (mistakingly — it is believed) describes
this stream as emptying into Windy Arm, which lies
between Tagish and Bennett Lakes.

The route passes across the lakes and down the
Lewes Eiver.

156

This, the Chil-
lioot Pass, is
paid to be im-
passable for
norses.

A route that
may possibly
be found the
best from the
South.

First five miles is through level bottom — land thickly
timbered.

The next nine miles is in a canon-like valley, -where
heavy work would be encountered in constructing a trail.
The remaining distance of three miles to the summit is
comparatively easy.

The altitude of the summit is estimated at 2,600 feet.

Beyond the summit a wide valley is entered, and the

descent to the first little lake is said to be not more than

100 feet.

{See Section 11 for distances, and Sections 18 and 27

for further particulars.)

The Taiya Pass Route.

(Ohilkoot is the name by which the Pass on this route is
commonly hnown.)

W. OGILVIE, 1896.

This route is from Lynn Canal, Taiya Inlet and
Taiya rivei over Taiya Pass to Lake Lindeman. The
distance from the head of Taiya Inlet to the summit of
the Pass is 15 miles and the whole length of the Pass
to Lake Lindeman is 23 miles. Between Lake Lindeman
and Lake Bennett there is only about three-quarters of a
mile of river which is not more than 50 or 60 yards wide
and about two to three feet deep and is so swift and
rough that navigation is out of the question.

{See Section 11 for distances, and Sections 18 and 27
for further particulars.)

Taku Route to Lake Teslfn-too.

W. 06ILVIE, 1896.
Indians reported journeying down the Te din-too
Eiver to Teslin-too Lake, and by way of a stream which
entered the lake from the East they reached Taku Eiver,
and thence to salt-water on the Taku Inlet. The
journey from the head of Canoe Navigation, on the
Teslin-too to salt-water, on Taku Inlet, took the Indians
four days if they had loads to carry, but only two days
if their baggage was light.

157

Many years ago, in 1867 I think, a man named
Monroe prospected up the Taku, and learned from the
Indians something of a large lake not far from that
river. He crossed over and found it, and spent some
time in prospecting, and then crossed to the sea.

I (Ogilvie, Cudahy, June 10th, 1895) am thoroughly
convinced that a road from the coast to some point on
the head waters of the river (Yukon), preferably by the
Taku, if at all practicable, would convert all our pu^t
(the Upper Yukon) of the river into a hive of industry.

A Significant Incident*

W. OGILVIE, 1896.
Great anxiety is felt here (Dawson City) about a Aa incident

•' ^ •" favorable to

mail route and regular mail. Last winter three emails the Taku Kiver

zouto.
left the coast, one by the Taku route, one by the White

Pass, and one via Taiya ; the first two got here in good

time, the last (ours, by the way) did not, nor is it likely

to arrive for some time — may be never. The man in

charge was badly frozen on the summit, and had to turn

back An Indian brought the mail in by the

Taku Eiver and took the Slocan branch of it ^to Atlin

Lake. From what I learned of this route while up

there, it may be found to be an easier way than by

Teslin Lake, but it has the disadvantage of landing on

the head of the Lewes Eiver instead of the Hootalinqua

or Teslin, and so takes in the Caiion and White Horse

Eapids.

G. M. DAWSON, 1887.

Little is yet known of the Taku Eiver, but the The Taku

•' ' River route is

Indians ascend it in canoes to a point at a distance of "«ie knowu as
about 80 miles from the head of the Taku Inlet, and
Indian trails lead S.E. from this vicinity to the Tahl-tan,
Eastward to Teslin Lake, and N.E. to the lakes at the
head of the Lewes.

"Evening Standard," October 7th, 1897.
From its Special Correspondent.
The Yukon Trading and Transportation Company, The Taku

1.1 . -1 /-ii if tC .. -I-.!. route choseu

which obtained a Charter from the Dominion Parliament for a taUivay.
last Session, including the power to provide railway

158

communication, has clso done some surveying aad fixed
on a route. Two routas are available from the coast to
Teslin Lake— one by the Sticheen River and Telegraph
Creek, and the other further north from the Taku Inlet.
The former involves a stretch of somewhat uncertain
river navigation, from Wrangell to Telegraph Creek,
while the latter has the advantage of a deep-water
terminus open the year round. The Taku line has
accordingly been selected, with a maximum grade of

a direct roote^ ^^'^^y ^^^^^ P®^ cent. It is comparatively a direct route,
being but one hundred and sixty-two miles from Salt
Water to lake Teslin. It follows the Taku River to the
junction of Katuna River, thence up that river to Silver
Salmon River, and finally overland to the shores of
Teslin. It is the intention of the Company to proceed
as soon as possible with the work of construction. A
trail will be built over the proposed route, and a saw-
,; mill will be built on Teslin Lake, where the Company

has a considerable area of fairly good timber.

Taku and Windy Arms.

G. M. DAWSON, 1887.
Points at which The mountains rapidly decrease in height and

routes from tho , i . . -mi • t» .

South meet the abruptness after the summit of White Pass is passed,
and the valley bifurcates, one branch leading to the
head of Windy Arm of Tagish Lake, the other to Taka
Arm of the same lake.

Large Rivers PSowing: into Hudson's Bay.

Prof. R. BELL, M.D., LLD., of the Geological Survey of Canada.
Evidence before the Senate Committee of 1888.

importaut The largest navigable river is the Attawapishkat.

the^N. West ' It enters James' Bay about 65 miles north of Fort Albany,

rna'/beVpfined and is Continuously navigable from the sea at high water

Eon'sBay. "^ as far as it will afford width for steamers, which would

be, perhaps, 260 to 300 miles. I came down the whole

length of the river without once taking my canoe

out of the water. Within 100 miles or so of its source

159

there is a large lake. We named it after Lord Lans-
downe. It measures 13 miles in l&ngth, and over 10 in
width. Just below it is another lake nearly as large,
call 3d Attawapishkat Lake. Its general course is east-
ward, but it makes some large bends.

The Albany is next in point of length of navigable
water. It is navigable for river steamers for about 250
miles at high water.

The Doobaunt (Telzoa Eiver of Tyrrell, 1893),
flowing into Chesterfield Inlet is probably the next in
point of size. Length not given. The inlet runs in
about 250 miles from the sea. Lake Aberdeen and
other large lakes extend the deep navigable waters of the
Inlet quite 250 miles further almost due west. A large
river flowing in from the west probably extends the
navigable waterway right on to Great Slave Lake. The
great whaling ground of Hudson's Bay is opposite this
Inlet.

The Moose Biver and its branch the Missanabie
would be navigable for about 120 miles from the sea at
high water. ' .

'O''

The Kapishcow and Equan Eivers, also on the west
coast of James' Bay, are navigable for a considerable
distance by steamers, as also are the Hayes, Steel and
Hill Eivers ; these three are all parts of one river, navig
able 140 miles altogether from the sea.

The Great Nelson Eiver is only navigable for about
50 miles from its mouth ; again for 150 miles (with only
one break) in the central part of its course, and also for
about 40 miles from the outlet of Lake Winnipeg.

(The Churchill Eiver has a considerable length, but
little of it is fit for steamer navigation.)

{For further particulars of rouUis afforded by any of these
rivers, see Sections 21, 22 and 26.)

-3-.-

160

Section IX. Distances of Chief River»
Sea, Lake, and Overland Routes.

(For further particulars of tJiese routes, see Sections 8, 10^
18, 21, 22, 26 and 27.)

Routes from Liverpool to the Yukon Goldflelds.

Chesterfield Inlet Boutb.

MILES.

Liverpool to Chesterfield Inlet 2,800

Length of Chesterfield Inlet (navigable) ... 250
Inlet to Great Slave Lake (over half of river

navigation) 820

Across Great Slave Lake (navigable) 800

Great Slave Lake to McPherson Fort ... 962
Fort McPherson via Peel Eiver to the region of

headwaters of Stewart Eiver (navigable) 250

4,882

Canadian Pacific, via Lynn Canal Eoutb.

(This route includes dangerous rapids and
mountain passes.)
Liverpool to Vancouver, \ik Canadian Pacific

Eailway ... ... ... ,.. ... 6,713

Vancouver to Klonoike Eiver, vid Lynn Canal 1,600

7,313

Canadian Pacific, via St. Michael's Eoutb.
(This route is fairly comfortable, but very
long and through American territory.)
Liverpool to Vancouver, via Canadian Pacific

Eailway 5,713

Vancouver to Klondike Eiver, yia St. Michael's

and the Yukon 4,850

10,063

161

■•..,y«

W. Ogilvle's Distances, 1896.

St. Michael's Eoute.

MILES.

San Francisco to Dutch Harbour 2,400

Seattle or Victoria to Dutch Harbour 2,000

Dutch Harbour to St. Michael 750

St. Michael to Cudahy (up the Yukon) 1,600

Victoria to Cudahy 4,350

Eoute via Taiya (Chilkoot) Pass.

Victoria to Taiya 1,000

Taiya to Cudahy 650

Total 1,650

Eoute via Stikine Eiver.

Victoria to Wrangell (sea) 750

Wrangell to Telegraph Creek (via Stikine Eiver) 150

Telegraph Creek to Teslin Lake. (Overland) ... 150

Teslin Lake to Cudahy 650

Total 1,700

Qovernment Map Measurements.

Eoute via Behbing Straits and Mouth of Mackenzie
Eiver, to the Peel, Porcupine and Yukon Eivers.

A])vroximate —

Victoria to Mouth of Yukon 2,700

Thence to Mackenzie Bay 1,400

Mackenzie Bay to Fort Macpherson 100

4,200

162

Fort Macpherson to Da'' jon City.

MILES.

Fort to La Pierre's House 80

(In summer this route can be done by water
with less than one mile of portage through
MoDougall's Pass).
La Pierre's House to junction of Porcupine and

Yukon Rivers (navigable by steamers) . . . 290

From this junction to Dawson City 230

Total 600

La Pierre's House to Dawson City,
VIA Upper Porcupine River.

La Pierre's House to Junction of Bell and Porcu-
pine Rivers. (Navigable by steamers) ... 30
Junction to Head Waters of the Porcupine River... 216

(Navigable by steamers).
Near Head of Porcupine to the Tatonduc River ... 16 J

(Overland.)
Down the Tatonduc River to Junction with Yukon

River. (Navigable by steamers) 40

From Mouth of Tatonduc to Dawson City ... 75

(Along the navigable Yukon.)

Total 377i

Fort rvlAcPHERSON to Headwaters of the Peel

XviVBli ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• uUvJ

(No impediments to navigation.)

The distances, land and water, separating the Head-
waters of the Peel from those of the MacMillan, Stewart
and Klondike Rivers, are unknown, the country being
quite undiscovered, but occasional travellers' reports and
the lengths of the different rivers indicate that the Peel
River runs very close to the last mentioned rivers, and
is probably connected with them by intervening lakes
and navigable streams. Vr

{See reports on the MacMillan, Stewart and Klondike
Bivers, Section 10.)

163

G. M. DAWSON, 1887.

Fort Selkirk to Lynn Canal 377 milc8.

,, Chilkoot Pass 224 „

,, Hotalinqu River ... ... 294 ,,

„ Pelly Banks 213 „

,, Head of Pelly Lake (above

" Pelly Banks ") 276 „

))

The Upper Pelly.

^ .. ^....n^.. ^— River Straight

G. M. DAWSON, 1887. Windines. Line.

MILES.

Felly Banks to Hoole Canon 50 31

Hoole Canon to Boss Biver 23 16^

Boss Biver to Glenlyon Biver 82 64

Glenlyon Biver to MacMillan Biver* ... 91 61

MacMillan to Lewes Biver (Fort Selkirk) ... 74 46

3^0 218i
• See under heading, " MacMillan River." Section H.

From Fort Selkirk (mouth of the Lewes Biver) to
the MacMillan Biver the Pelly is navigable for lai'ge
sized stern wheel steamers, and right on to Hoole Canon
for small stern wheel steamers.

The Boss Biver is navigable for steamers at its
mouth, but its upper part is quite unknown.

Hoole Canon is quite impassable for a steamer of
any kind, and 18 miles further on at the mouth of Hoole
Biver it might prove difficult.

Further on the Pelly is navigable for small steamers
right on to Pelly Banks, and possibly as far as the lakes.

Dawson's Distances from Fort Selkirk to Taiya Inlet.

Miles.
Fort Selkirk to Bink or Five Finger Bapid ,., 66

Bink Bapid to Little Salmon Biver 63

(Coal beds found 6^ miles above BirJc Bapid.)

Little Salmon to Big Salmon Biver 34

(Numerous lignite-coal beds below Big Salmon

Eiver. ' Depth of B. S. Biver 5 feet ; width at

mouth, 347 feet.)

M 2

164

Miles.
Big Salmon to Tes-lin-too Biver ... 31

(Tes-lin-too Biver. Width, 675 feet at mouth ;
depth, 18 feet. From the mouth of this river to
the lake is about 100 miles. Teslin Lake is 100
miles in length. From near head of lake to
Taku Biver is about 60 miles, a good trail.
Indians travel up continuation of T. Biver
from lake about 100 miles, and cross up
West Fork to tributaries of the Upper Liard,
and down that river to the Dease.)
Tes-lin-too Biver to Lake Labarge 27^

Lake Labarge, length 31

(This lake is reported to be so stormy as to
detain miners in camp for several days.)

Lake Labarge to Tahk-heena Biver 11|;

(Length of T. Biver 50 miles, easy navigation.
Depth, 10 feet ; width at mouth, 237 feet.)

Mouth of Tahkheena Biver to White Horse Bapids 18
White Horse Bapids to Miles Canon 2f

(Usual to portage these Bapids ; too dangerous to
navigate.)

Miles Canon to Lake Marsh 23

Lake Marsh 20

Biver from Marsh Lake to Tagish Lake 5

Tagish Lake 16*6

Lake Nares 2*7

Bennett Lake 26*8

Stream from Lake Bennett to Lake Lindeman ^

(Not navigable for heavily laden boats.)

Lake Lindeman

Lake Lindeman to Tide Water of Taiya Inlet

* This distance is over the Chilkoot or Taiya Pass.
Lake Lindeman to summit of Pass is 8^ miles.

' The elevation of the Pass is 3,502 feet.

The traverse of the Chilkoot portage is itself a formidable
obstacle.

165

Distances from Head of Chllkoot Inlet to the Boundary
Line on the Yukon River between N. W. Territories

and Alaska.

(VV. OQILVIE, 1887-88.)

MILES.

Haine's Mission (Head of Inlet) to entrance of

Taiya Inlet

...

4-79

To Head of Taiya Inlet

2012

„ Head of Canoe navigation, Taiya Eiver

26-02

„ Forks of Taiya Eiver

28-50

,, Summit of Taiya Pass

34-88

,, Landing at Lake Lyndeman

43-18

„ Foot of Lake Lyndeman

47-01

„ Head of Lake Bennett

48-21

„ Boundary line between B. 0. and N. W.

(Lat. 60°)

...

58-21

„ Foot of Lake Bennett

• • •

78-97 -

„ Foot of Cariboo Crossing (Lake Nares of

Schwatka)

76-56

„ Foot of Tagish Lake ...

93-37

„ Head of Marsh Lake

98-27

„ Foot of Marsh Lake

117-38

„ Head of Canon

14306

„ Foot of Canon

143-68

„ Head of White Horse Eapids

146-07 :;

,, Foot of "White Horse Eapids

145-46

, , Tahk-heena Eiver

160-04 '--r >.

178-19 '^( ^

if Head of Lake Labarge

1) Foot of Lake Labarge

204-34 S / ^

,t Tes-lin-too Eiver (Newberry of Schv.at

,ka)

236-00 ^ .

„ Big Salmon Eiver of Miners (D'Abbadie of

Schwatka)

» • «

• • •

269-46

„ Little Salmon Eiver of Miners (Dalj

r of

Schwatka)

• « •

• ••

305-66

I, Five Finger Eapids (Kink

Eapids

. ',■ .. ... ..

Schwatka)

• • •

364-95

„ Pelly Eiver

• f •

423-41 ■

„ "White Eiver

• ••

619-23 .

„ Stewart Eiver

• ••

629.03

„ Sixty Mile Creek

• ••

*65100 :: :

1, Dawson City (Klondike)

• • •

*59700 '

» •«.*.- >

166

'' Miles.

To Fort Eeliance 602-82

„ Forty-mile Biver 647-20

y, Boundary Line between N.W. Ten-itories

and Alaska 687*56

- * These are not OgUvie's Measurements.

Distances from Fort Macpherson to Fort Chipewan.

(WM. OQILVIE, 1887-88.)

Mackenzie Biver, Proper 32-1

Bed Biver 60.1

A large river entering from the East (name

unknown) 1205

Loon Biver 2508

Hare Indian Biver 272*4

FortGoodHope 274*7

Bamparts ... .i 283*6

Beaver Biver 295*7

Sans Sault Bapida 322-7

Mountain Biver ... 828-3

Garcagou Biver ... .. 828*0

Great Bear Biver 444-0

Fort Norman 444-2

Gravel Biver 609-3

Biver Le Vieux Grand Lac ... 650*6

Fort Wrigley 624*5

Biver between two Mountains 628-0

Willow Lake Biver 667*0

Ne-hauner Biver 683-3

Fort Simpson 758-5

Head of Tine ... .-.. ... 829-5

Yellow Knife Biver 855 6

Little Lake , 892-0

Fort Providence .• 916*0

Great Slave Lake ... ... ... ... 962*0

Hay Biver ... ... « 997*0

Buffalo Biver ... ... .-. 1,024*0

Buffalo Greek 1,071*0

Fort Besolution 1,088*0

167

Fort Smith 1,273-6

Head of Bapids ... 1,287*5

Peace River 1,358*9

Fort Ghipewan 1,390*0

Evidence of Prof. ROBERT BELL, M.D., LLD, &o., before the Select
Committee of the Senate of Canada, 1888.

The possible avenues of communication with the
Mackenzie Basin are :—

Miles*
From one of the eastern bays of Great Bear Lake ..,w.

to the nearest point on the Coppermine River ■
the distance is ... ... ... ... ... 40

From Chesterfield Inlet to the head of the Great

Slave Lake is 320

A large unknown river mentioned by Tyrrell,
1893, running into Aberdeen Lake at the ^'
head of this Inlet, along with the lakes,
would lessen this overland distance consider*
ably, if not cover it the whole way by a
navigable waterway.

The harbor at Churchill to the head of the Atha-
basca Lake is 440

Prince Albert on the Saskatchewan to Fort

McMurray, the junction of Clearwater and ,W.'

Athabasca — that point being chosen because .,/,V

there is then between that and the sea ... 300

Fort Pitt to Fort McMurray the distance is ... 300

Edmonton to Fort McMurray 226

Banff to Peace River Landing 260

The Head of Little Slave Lake to Peace River

Landing... ... ... ... ... ... 63

Head of Navigation on Stikine River to Fort
Liard, the head of Navigation on the Liard
River 370

Hazelton, presumably the head of navigation on
the Skeena River, to the big bend of the Peace
River in the Rooky Mountains 160

168

Distances to points on Peace River from Fort Chippewyan
on Athabasca Lake.

{See part M, Section 10.)

The first part
of the roote
from Edmon-
ton to the
Tnkon Oold-
fleldB vUi the
Mitckenzie
BiTertoits
month.

Distances on the Llard, Dease and Francis Rivers.

{See part K, Section 10.)

Athabasca Landing: to Qreat Slave Lake.

QEO. DAWSON and W. OQILYIE, 1888 Committee.

(The distance from Edmonton, a terminus of the
Canadian Pacific Bailway, to Athabasca Landing is 90
miles — ahready covered by a good wagon road).

The Athabasca Eiver is navigable by steamers from
the Landing to the First Bapids — distance 120 miles.
These rapids can be navigated by steamers drawing
two feet. A deeper channel could easily be constructed.

The second rapid is 28 miles further on, and is more
easily navigable, and by vessels of deeper draught.

The Grand Bapids are 23 miles further on, or
166 from the Landing, and are about two miles long.
These rapids are not navigable.

Bapids de Boches are 194 miles below the Landing.
The passage is rough and stony, and is impassable for
canoes. Large boats in passing have to be lowered by
ropes from the banks.

Between Bapids de Boches and the last rapid, 251
miles from Athabasce:> Landing, Ogilvie states that it is
almost one long rapid. Fort McMurray is near this
last rapid.

From the last rapid, to Lake Athabasca, is a distance
of about 170 miles. In the evidence of Wm. Jas.
McLean, Chief Trader of the Hudson Bay Co., to the
1888 Committee, he stated that the Slave Biver is
navigable from Lake Athabasca to the Bapids near Fort
Smith, 80 miles (the rapids break the river for about
11 miles) and from Fort Smith to Great Slave Lake, a
distance of about 150 miles. Total distance 246 miles,
including rapids.

169

Leiis:ths cf some of the Chief Lakes.

Lesser Slave Lake, 90 miles in length.
Lake Athabasca, 192 ,,

Isle a la Cross Lake is 36 ,,
Clear Lake and Buffalo Lake with Isle a la Cross
Lake give a navigable length of 74 miles.
Lao la Biche is 24 miles in length.
Cree Lake, 40 „

Green Lake, 18 >, ""'

Beindeer Lake, 165 ,,

Great Slave Lake, 300 ,,
Great Bear Lake is 190 (width 110).
Wollaston or Hatchett Lake is 70 (same in width).
Francis Lake, navigable length ... 54 miles,
Dease Lake ,, ,, ... 24^ ,,

Finlayeon Lake ,, ,, ... 9^ „

Lake Lansdowne (on Attawapishkat River) 13 >,

Lake Attawapishkat 12 ,,

Lake Aberdeen (at the head of Chester-
field Inlet), navigable length ... 60 „

{For the lengths of Lakes on the Lewes Biver route to the
Yukon see Section 11.)

Route from Athabasca Landing to the Peace River.

Evidence of Wm. C^!RI8TIE to 1888 Committee.

Miles.
From the mouth of Little Slave Biver on the
Athabasca Biver to Lesser Slave Lake

(navigable) ., 100

Length of Lesser Slave Lake (navigable) 90

Portage from Lesser Slave Lake to the Peace

•ctiiver «.. ••• ... ... ,,, ,., q\)

Section X2« loe on Rivers and Lakes.

Ice on Mackenzie and Tributaries.

:. ... . . R. Q. McCONNELL, 1888-89.

The ice is clear in the Liard Biver aboat May Ist,
at its mouth in the Mackenzie Biver about May 20tb, in

170

Great Slave Lake towards the end of June, about which
time the whole of the Mackenzie Biver is open.

loe begins to form again towards the end of October,
and about the middle of November, the streams are
frozen over. wt»:"! >»«' "^ »-»

This gives about four months clear navigation. Ice
breaks (sufiBcient for navigation by stout vessels) at Fort
Norman 19th May, Fort Good Hope 2l8t, near Fort
Simpson 1st of June.

Mr. Ogilvie states (1887) that ice closes in at Foi-t
Norman about 1st week in November, and at Fort
Simpson it closes in about 3rd week in November.

The ice leaves the river at Fort Macpherson about
June 1st.

Mr. James Mackenzie states that his father — the
explorer — always left Fort Simpson and proceeded down
the Mackenzie in May. (Committee report, 1888).

Ice on Great Slave Lake.

R. Q. McGONNELL, 1888-89.
Ice forms in this lake between 20th and end of
Ootoberj, and is fast by the middle of November. The
ice breaks about Ist July, and sometimes as early as
10th June. The channel between Owl Island and the
North shora of the lake is said never to freeze ; and
Back's experience proved this to be the case during two
winters.

- » . . WM. OGILVIE, 1887-88.

As a rule ice clears sufficiently for navigation on
Great Slave Lake in the last days-in June.-

On Lake Athabasca the ice goes a little earlier than
on Great Slave Lake.

.' ' . - *
Ice on the 5t!kine.
Q. M. DAWSON. 1887.
The Stikine is generally open for navigation about
the last week in April, and uloses about the middle of
November.

171

■. *ii\ .>4> Ice on Dease Lake. .v.'. •....' ...

Ice clears on Dease Lake about first week in June
and opens about 1st December.

Ice on the Liardt . . f^ ^

Q. M. DAWSON, 1887.

At the junction of the Dease and Liard, the latter is
free from ice, as a rule, from the first week in May to
about the first week in November.

, r ;t . Ice on the Peace*

Prof. MACOUN, 1888 CommSttM. • • -

Ice first found on the river first week in November,
but the river does not close until about a month later.
The tributaries close earlier. >. ^ ,. . . „ ' ; -,

The river is open to navigation about the middle of
April. Captain Butler found it quite open on April 22nd,
1873.

Ice on the Lewes*

Q. M. DAWSON, 1887.

The ice on the rivers opens early in May. Loose
ice begins to run on the rivers late in September, and
freezes about two weeVd later. The lakes ^on the Lewes
are not open until early in June.

Ice on the Yukon*

Mr. W. Sloan, a B. G. merchant and successful
Klondike miner, states in the Financial Times of 16th
September, 1897, that in 1896 the ice finally froze on
the Yukon about October 20th, and the river opened on
16th May this year (1897).

H. de Windt, 1897.— The Yukon was blocked with
ioe in 1896 as early as September 28th.

The Canadian Observatory Authorities state that
in 1896 the Yukon Biver froze up on October 28th,
and broke up on May 17th, 1897.

172

"Mining World," Undon, 2l8t August, 1897.

Lieutenant Wilkerson, a member of the United
States' engineering corps which has been in Alaska for
the past three years . . . states, in answer to the
question as to how long during the year the Yukon is
open for navigation : — '* During the months of July and
August only. During the remaining months of the year
the ice is from 15 to 30 feet thick. During July and
August the ice breaks up, and the river is a mass of
floating chunks of ice. Those two months of the year
are entirely too short to enable the transportation
companies to carry up supplies for any large number of
people. « r , * ."

Ice on Lake Bennett.

Mr. W. Sloan also states that last year (1896) Lake
Bennett was not free for navigation until May 28th.

Ice on the Churchill River.

The Hon. W. Christie, late Chief Inspecting Factor
tc the Hudson's Bay Company, states in his evidence
before the 1888 Committee, that on the Biver Churchill
the ice breaks up about June 28th.

[See Section 11 for distatices.)

Section X3. Restrictions to large
Foreign Joint-Stock Companies
on the British Yukon.

From l\lr. WM. OQILVIE. . - '

CuDAHY, 11th January, 1897.

vabnioiu rich. Men cannot be got to work for love or money, and
heip'Reuiiig development (on the Klondike) is consequently slow;

per
honr.

173

one-and-a-half dollars per hour is the wage paid the few
men who have to work on hire and work as many hours
as they like.

The Yukon mining regulations, issued by the Canadian S^J""*"*
Government in May this year, state that each miner can reguUtiom.
only — on personal application — take up a section 100 ft.
by 600 ft. (Placer mining) ; that the Government will
reserve every alternate allotment and will charge 10 per
cent, royalty on all gold yields up to 500 dollars per
week, and 20 per cent, where the yield exceeds
this amount.

In the face of these restrictions there will be but poor bxpomm

^ preMnt

encouragement and httle opportunity for heavy ^™'^'^L
capitaUsed English Companies to take up vsJuable
claims on any of the Yukon fields and pay good
dividends after all expenses in high wages (at present
6s. per hour), stores, machinery, and from 6d. to
Is. per lb. transport charges have been met.

The Pamphlet issued by the British Development Association,
Limited, 1897, states :—

" The claim must be actually worked by the owner. Lioenses «in
That is to say, no individual or company can take up on pen^^
claims in the names of nominees ; and this is very right Si&ms must
and proper in the interests of genuine miners. . . . lao^oMM

themMhraa.

" Some companies formed with the object of taking it is a question
up claims on the Klondike, have recently come before ^pit'SSa^
the public for subscription. It is by no means clear ffi^^mo^
how any o? these companies can take up more than one namSerrfu^
claim, and the Governmsnt Authorities have expressed S^^S^S^*""
the strongest intention of preventing any evasion of the
Mining Laws. Each miner hao to pay any an annual
Government License of 15 dollars.

174
Seotion 14r« Climate.

Pro. BELL, M.D., LL-D., Qeologioal Survey, Oanadi.

ftoi^lLniy ^*^® eyidence showing that the soil in the Northern
en the BorfMu. Territory thawed out in Summer, and instanced experi-
ments made at York Factory.

Qeniral Summary of the 1888 Committee.

^hMhaT^tan ^^^ ^^^ prevailing South West Summer winds of

of POTcapine the ooontry in question bring the warmth and moisture
which render possible the far Northern cereal growth,
and sensibly a£feot the climate of the region under con-
sideration as far North as the Arctic Circle and as far
East as the Eastern rim of the Mackenzie Basin.

Extract from Leaflet iseued by the Canadian Paoiflo Railway Go.

jg*ffa>t> The climate is healthy, the winters long and very
acceeaue. cold, but SO devoid of humidity that their intensity is
not so keenly felt as would be imagined from the
readings of the thermometer, and with a plentiful
supply of suitable clothing can be made agreeable.
The summers are short and pleasant with very few
rainfalls. • ...

Inspector CONSTANTINE'S Report

cuoutoiii The cold is said not to be mere intense (in Mac-

kenzie Bay) than here (at Klondike).

Daylight in the N.W. Territorie« (Actual Sunlight).

W. OQILVIE. 1887-88.

Port Macpherson, At Ottawa,

h. m.

'•' h. m.

Lat.67«26'

', May Ist, 17 30

Lat. 46"

26', 14 08

»t

June 1st, 24 00

**.

15 16

- ' H '

„ 21st, 2i 00

16 30

July Ist, 24 GO

16 24

»#

Aug. 1st, 19 24

»»

14 32

„ 81st, 14 44

13 08

175

JVlean Temperature at Fort Franklin, Qreat Bear Lakn,

Ut. 650 la'.

» •' OfllLVIE, 1887-88. " '• 'r-«

During May, 86» -2 Fah. • -

. ' > „ June, 6P-4 „ v - - - ---.r ^•'•r

„ July, 62* '0 „ • V" ' '^ <«'<' "-' I**"'
„ Aug., 60» -6 „ \

On two occasions the thermometer went to 78* in
the shade and ten times to 70°. ,i7

' When I (Ogilvie) arrived at Fort Macpherson on
20th June the new buds on the trees were just perceptible,
and on the evening of the 22iid the trees were abnost
fully in leaf.

The mean minimum temperature for month of July
was 45° -4 F.

Small Snowfall on the Mackenzie.

The Hon. Wm. Christie stated in his evidence before
the 1888 Committee that the snowfall on the Mackenzie
is not so deep. He stated that he found the snowfall
much greater in Ontario — as he approached Ottawa—
than on the Mackenzie at Fort Simpson,

The Open 5ea at the Mouth of the Mackenzie* ^

Prof. MoCOUN'8 Evidence, 1888 Committee.

Question — Do you mention that (the drift of Mac-
kenzie Biver waters to the eastward in the Arctic Thesearoato
Ocean) as evidence that there is open navigation from the MMkrajiie
the mouth of the Mackenzie to Behring's Strait ? ^toiogVnai

Answer — I believe there is, and the reason is very
simple. We can get the records from Point Barrow,
where the Americans have an observatory for three
years. The full reports from that observatory are
published. The reason I think there is no obstruction,
and that we have a clear coast, is that the drift is to the
eastward. . . » .

llG

£S?iirioS of ^ *°^ prepared to prove that thu mild climate of the

2roUo*ooeau^* north-west is not an occasional or accidental thing, but

SpM^euf^' that it is permanent, and that the drift of warm air from

Basin Tent- both sides of the continent seems to come up the

Mackenzie Eiver. The isothermal lines show that.

The rivers in v./hich Sur John Richardson found the

timber coming down, were near the mouth of the

Mackenzie Biver, so that I am quite sure mentally that

the rush of heated air keeps the Arctic Sea open. We

have hot air passing from the American desert to the

mouth of the Mackenzie. The American desert is the

source of the blizzards in Dakota — the source of the

good climate we have in the north-west territories, and

the bad climate they have in the States.

The mildness^
of the N. W.
Territory
oliowte dne to
the movement
of theMagnetio
Pole westward.

Important Changes in the Climate.

Evidence of Mr. JAMES ANDERSON. Quoting from the Diaries of hie
Father, the Explorer, before the 1888 Committee.

Question : — Have not some voyageurs found out
that when they get North of the Magnetic Pole the cold
is not more intense ? - • r

Answer: — I do not know that, but from these
Diaries I find out that right up near the Arctic Ocean in
that new country that was explored there, a great deal
of it was as mild as at Fort Simpson in 1862.

Question : — The cold is not stationary. It has been
discovered that it has been gradually moving to the
Westward (towards Alaska and Northern Siberia) ?

Answer : — Yes ; that is the case.

Question : — We (the Committee) all know that the
East Coast of Greenland, within the memory of man,
was fertile, and at one time the Queen of Norway used
to get her supply of butter made there, though the
climate has, since that time, become so cold that butter
making has been abandoned. Would that not show that
if the Magnetic Pole does move westward the climate
changes westward with it ? > . .

177

Answer : — There is no doubt that the climate is
changing, and we have evidenee of it in the prairies of
the North West. It is getting milder all the time.

Section 15* Indians and Esquimaux.

The Indian population is sparse, and the Indians, ^« Indians

^ * are peaceable

never having lived in large communities are peaceable, and Hkeiv to
and their general character and habits as given by mait.
witnesses justify a hope that the development of the
country, as in the case of the Indians of British Columbia
may be aided by them, t • • •

Extract from the Report by R. G. MoCONNELL, B.A.

Friendly Eskimo and Indians (Lonoheux) in the
neighbourhood of the mouth of the Mackenzie Biver.

Employment of Indians : their numbers.

The Indians of the Lower Mackenzie are mere xnmberaof
industrious than those of the Upper Begion, and might E°8q^manx in
be utilized with great advantage to themselves and *^«^"N'^^'
economy to the employer in opening up the coal and
petroleiun fields of the Territory.

In his evidence to the 1888 Senate Committee, Bishop
Glut stated that there were 20,000 Indians (not including
Esquimaux), in the Mackenzie Basin ; about 14,000 of
these were Chipewyan Indians.

The Esquimaux might number 1,000 but he could
not say, nor, he believed, could anyone else.

178

Trading with the Indians.

®^**' ?f* rade ^'* ^^^P*' Whitney in his book Oti Snotv-slioes to

S^aStatho **^ Barren Grounds, published 1896 (p. 162) referring to
to'iies. the matter of trading with the Indians of the far north-

west of Canada, states : — " There is, of course, no money
in the country, a ' made beaver skin ' being the standard
of value by which all trade is conducted — as, for
example, a marten is worth from two to three beaver
skins, and a bear-pelt about twenty beaver skins. A
' made beaver ' is a full grown dressed beaver skin, and
its value on rough calculation is equal to about fifty cents,
though it fluctuates through the country.

ThebnsineBa (P. 11.) " Except that goods are now much cheaper

o* the Hudson \ t e o r

Bay Company and furs much dearer, the fur-trading business of the
mnob the same ^

N?w.^el^- Hudson's Bay Company is conducted at its inland posts
dSiys omince^ on much the same lines that prevailed when the company
"^ was first established."

Section 16. Fish (freshwater) and

Game.

Evidence of J. B. HURLBERT, M.D., LLD.
Fowl pientifrd The Arotio explorers found fowl so plentiful there ^

In Mackenzie

Bay that they say you could not throw a stone without

hitting a goose or duck . ,

179

Evidence of DONALD MolVOR.

"White and grey wavey, crane, swan, geese and Birds,
dnoks in great numbers. Feathers in great quantities
turned out of this district every year by the Hudson Bay
Company.

General Summary of the 1888 Committee.
Of the fresh water fishes of the region Back's F***-**?.^^

«... 1. . 1 i 1 fartherNorth

*' Grayhng are excellent species not prevalent else- theKieatet the

where, seems to be found everywhere in its rivers and even

west of the Becky Mountains, but the staple product of

its lakes and large rivers seems to be white fish of great

weight, and trout often reaching 40 lbs. in weight, and

evidence goes to show that the farther north the greater

the yield of fish till the quantiuy becomes enormous.

From the Hon. d. 8GHULTZ.

. , i . . we have possessed north of the The qnantity
isotherm mentioned perhaps the greatest extent of fresh fresh water
water food fish .... of any country in the Burpassediii
world .... the vast space between the isotherm
mentioned and our Canadian Arctic littoral is unsur-
passed, not only by the quantity but the quality of its
fresh water food fishes, and it will not be to you who
have doubtless made the matter a study, a surprise, to
find ^'hat the quantity increases as we approach the
Arctic Coast.

Canadian Paoiflo Railway Company's Leaflet, 1897.

The Yukon basin is an incomparable game country, a great game
an important factor to the miners in a land were pro- ***'"*"''
visions naturally command high prices. The upper
portion abounds in moose, cariboo, bear and small
game, and the rivers and smaller streams are alive with Game, FiBb
salmon, whitefish, trout and other species. The lower JSSu^Sacfc
country is the breeding ground of innumerable geese,
ducks, swans and other fowl.

the world.

N 2

180

Evidence of Mr. FRANK OLIVER, Editor of the " Edmonton Gazette,"
to Select Committee of 1888.

WfttCTfowi Waterfowl are plentiful beyond oonoeption in the

Tond conoep. northern lakes of the Mackenzie Lake and on the Arctic

coast in the Summer season, and furnish abundance of

food to the Indians while they remain.

Fish abound in all the lakes of running water, and
the fisheries of Lake Athabasca, Lake Slave, and Great
Bear La<ke are at least as valuable as those of the
St. Lawrence Chain, while thousands of smaller lakes,
especially east of the Mackenzie, are stocked with fish
as well, The available fish supply alone is more than
^uf&cient to supply ten times the present population
4>f the Mackenzie region.

■■'»«■ .. •

Section 17* Corn, Vegetables arid

Pasturage.

(See also Section 25.)

Evidence 'of Bishop GLUT.

Com and vege- Wheat, barley, and potatoes, grow well at Fort

trttwnttie™ Simpson, Lat. 62^. Captain Smith, of steamer

Arctic Circle «« Wrigley," states that he saw barley, wheat, and

potatoes, growing as far north as Fort Good Hope,

on the Mackenzie, north of the Arctic Circle.

Evidence of J. B. HURLBERT, M.D., LLD.
ExceUent The entire area (of the Mackenzie valley) is fit for

DMtnrage on ^ *' '

the Mackeaaie. pasturage, as the native grasses grow over the whole
country, even to the shores of the Hudson Bay and
Arctic Ocean and down the Mackenzie to the sea.

181

Dr. DAWSON, 16th August, 1897.

• ■

» • « The Hudson's Bay Company in&ny yeajfs p^tJo"^,„
ago occupied several forts or trading stations in the "'^i^^^^"
Yukon country and ascertained by experiment that mougor the
barley could actually be grown at Fort Yukon within the
Arctic Circle and some distance north of the Klondike.
(Barley and potatoes are also grown at Fort Good Hope
on the Mackenzie).

Professor Bell states in hi& evidence before the 1888 Orowtb of

wbMt and
Committee that wheat ripens well &t Norway House barley beyond

and around Little Playgreen Lake. Barley ripens at
Oxford House, as far north as Fort Providence, . . .
and I have Been excellent wheat ripen at Lake la Biohei
where it is said to be a sure crop every year.

In the country I traversed between the North
Saskatchewan and Lake la Biche the grasses were the
most luxuriant I ever saw, being often six feet high.

Sir J. Bichardson places the northern limit of thd
profitable cultivation of wheat in the Mackenzie Valley
at Fort Liard on the Liard River (lat. 60** 6') while
from trustworthy information obtained by Prof. Macoun
it appears that even at Fort Simpson, on the Mackenzie
Biver in Lat. 61^ 51' wheat succeeds four times out of
five, and barley always ripens from the 12th to the 20th
of August.

In the region of the Peace River Valley there are
about 15,140,000 acres of cultivable land, capable of
producing over 300,000,000 bushels of wheat.

tbfl60<>L»t.

182

Section

VhafaTonrlto
ronte bo far.

Not possible
for beayy
traffic and im-
sassable for

No anchorage
at Dyea. . .
ttae Skagway
the favorite
landing place.

A predpioe to
be SMoended by
topes on tbls
note.

Difficulties of Routes
from the Soutli.

(See also Section 27.)

From th^ Special Correspondent of the " Pall Mall Gazette,"
7th Ootober, 1897.

The favourite route so far has been by the Chilcoot
PasB, from Dyea Inlet, on the arm of the Pacific, known
as the Lynn Canal. Nine miles from the head of canoe
navigation, and 15 miles from salt water, this Pass reaches
a height of 3,600 feet ; the grade of the last six miles
is nearly 550 feet per mile, along a very rough and rocky
road, which is subject to heavy storms from the winds
blowing up from the sea. On the other side the descent
is not so abrupt, though it is steep. Although this Pass
has been the most used up to the present, it cannot be
made into a waggon road for bearing traffic, and is
almost impassable for horses. The miners carry their
outfit and supplies in packs on their backs. At Dyea,
it may be remarked, there is no harbour or anchorage.
Vessels cannot come near the shore, and are exposed to
the violent winds that blow up the inlet. In case of
storms they have to take refuge on the Skagway Eiver,
three miles south, which is, therefore, gaining in favour
as a landing place.

At Skagway there is a wharf and deep water, where
cargo may be discharged at any stage of the tides. From
this point the way lies by the White Pass, which is
thought easier than the Chilcoot, and is 2,600 feet high,
as against 3,600. For six miles along the river flats
there is a waggon road, and then there is a well marked
trail to the summit, ascending by the canyon of the
western fork of the Skagway Biver. Three miles of it
is through a box canyon, with a precipice at the upper
end, which must be ascended with the aid of ropes. The
grade at the latter part of the ascent to the top of the
Pass varies from 150 to 300 feet to the mile. From the
summit the promoters of this route claim that there ia

183

a good road, but this is hardly borne out by the experi-
ences of prospectors. Perhaps the most convincing
evidence of the daiigers of this route is that given by the
experience of Assistant Commissioner M'Ibee, of the
Dominion Mounted Police, who was ordered to lead a
detachment over the Pass to the Klondyke, to assist in
preserving order.

A private letter from one of the Mounted Police now Four miios in

en route to the Yukon says, that it took nine days to pacR horses

make four miles, that the boat building party were all day the pass

more or less sick and very thin, and had sent back for Stor^repaiw.
more medicine, as their stock had run out. They were
wet all the time, and it rained steadily. 74 pack horses
were killed the first day the Pass opened after repairs.

At Bennett Lake the Chilcooi and Skagway routes
unite, but the pioneer is still over 500 miles from the
Klondyke, most of which, however, can be done by canoe
or boat. The adventurer has to carry his craft with him bewlfdowaand
in sections, or hew down trees and build it when he boats buiit.
reaches the lakes, which means a delay of several days,
as suitable timber is not easy to obtain. A small stream
connects Lakes Bennett and Tagish, and the voyagers V

are carried by a strong current down to the head of the
latter very quickly. From Lake Tagish they drift dovra
to another small lake, named Lake Marsh, a long shallow
body of water. After this the real difficulties of the
journey by water begin.

"White Horse Bapids may, however, be avoided by
portage — i. e., by carrying the boat overland till the fall
is passed — but this is naturally a long and toilsome
business, as the rapids are three-quarters of a mile long.
Lake La Barge, which is 85 miles long and 10 wide, is
traversed without difficulty, and is connected by Thirty- sanken
mile Biver with the Hootalinqua, a tributary of the the river
Lewes, which at its junction with the Pelly Eivor forma ^*°*®"'"'*
the Yukon. Thirty-mile Biver is very rapid, and has
sunken boulders that make it dangerous if caution is not The Hoota-
exercised. The Hootalinqua, too, at times, runs a mill- a'i9m-n!o^°*'*

184.

BkUl and
experience

A mnltltnde of
Islands "nd
narrow chan-
nels full of

race, and in one day voyagers have drifted to within foar
miles of Five linger Eapids, a distance of 125 miles.
Five linger Eapids are said to be more dangerous than
Miles Bapids described above, but they may be run by
a practised hand. In running rapids c rerything depends
wanted in run- upon skill and experience. Those without these gifts

ning rapids. ir c o

had better take to the more laborious method of portaging.
After Five Finger Bapids are passed, the voyage offers
no particular difficulty. The Yukon is one of the greatest
rivers on the American conticent. In many places it is
more than five miles in width, and in others narrower,
but deep, and flowing with a strong current. •' You
cannot by any means go to sleep, and let your boat
drift," says the voyager whose experiences were last
quoted.

There are a multitude of islands, sometimes four or
five abreast of each other, and as many channels, some
of which are very deep and clear of drift, while others
are shallow or narrow and full of drift. Such channels
must be avoided. After leaving the lakes, the current
rendero it easy to make a daily run of over 100 miles
until Dawson City is reached. ■-

It is, however, a question whether either the Chilcoot
or White Pass will be open in the Winter. A Zubron
pioneer, with considerable experience in passing to and
fro, says, " 'i'he only possible Winter route is by Dalton's
Trail (Chilkivb Pass), entailing an expense for a year's
supplies of at lea^^j a 1,000 dollars." A great many pack
horses are required for this trail, which probably accounts
for its not being usee' instead of the Chilcoot and White
routes. It is said to be free from heavy ascents and
easy to traverse, but only a few have attempted it, so
that it cannot be said to have borne the test of experi-
ence. The Lynn Canal is left by the Chilkat Inlet, a
long and narrow arm of the sea. At the head of the
inlet there is a small but good harbour, with shelter from
the strong winds prevailing in this mountainous region,
an exceptional advantage on this part of the Pacific
Coast. A mile north of the harbour the tidal flats of the

Dalton's trail
the only
possible
Winter tonte.

185

€hiloat Eiver are encountered, and 20 miles up the
Indian village of Klukwau is reached, where the Klaheela
Eiver enters from the west. The Chilkat and Klaheela
are navigable for canoes, and a pack trail follows the
Klaheela to its source. Thence almost directly north to
Fort Selkirk, where the Pelly and Lewis rivers unite to
form the Yukon ; or if it is desired to take advantage of
water transportation at an earlier stage, the Lewes Biver
may be struck at Five Finger Rapids mentioned above.
Dalton, after whom the trail is named, gives the time
required as "nine days light, twelve to fourteen with a
load ;" but prospectors who have used it more recently
say three weeks. There is an Indian trail from the
Chilkat Pass, traversing the same country a little further
east, but of this little is known.

Mr. STUART D. MULKIN'3 Evidence.

:■ The Pelly Eiver is navigable from Houle Rapids Sord^ttT***
26 miles from Pelly Banks Post to its junction (under ^f;*,S£j^»
the name of the Yukon), with the Porcupine River, ^f^lJa..
1,000 miles without a break ; while on the other hand
the Lewes River, dowia which the miners from the "West
Coast must travel, is broken by numerous rapids and
three lakes, out of which the ice does not move untU
July. ^

« Westminster Gazette," July 27th, 1897. ' '
" The canoe journey up the Stickine (the overland Dangers and

1 » ji rt ii \ . 1 .1-11 , . r«i . . difflCUltleBOl

route from the South) is no child s play The incessant the sttddne
rains keep the river booming, and make the numerous
rapids that it boasts terribly dangerous. In spite of the
fikill of the Indian boatmen many an adventurer has
been drowned in its chilly flood. When the rapids are
^uite impracticable there is nothing for it but to make a
portage. Everything must be unloaded and packed with
infinite toil over the slippery trail."

Boate.

186

Tba nngnit-
ftbleness o( the
Sontbent
Bonte.

" Daily Telegraph," July 2gth, 1897.

" TTnder the most favourable conditions, and sup-
posing that steamboats, canoes, and food supplies were
all ready and available, the journey would take from five
to eight weeks, and the traveller would reach the gold-
diggings just as winter was dosing in and mining was,
to a great extent, stopped."

{See also Section 27.)

Section 19« Canadian sub- Arctic
Travelling in Winter.

Beinde«r feed
on twlRB and
mosses but
food mnst be
canght or
earned fox dogs

Why not
Beindeer for
America In the
Far North as
in Northern
Europe and
if

From the "Westminster Gazette," 27-8-97.

Will the Canadians be content to still straggle on
with dogs and men harnessed as draught animals to the
sledges on which supplies must be distributed in tha^i
barren and desolate region, or will they be wise in time
and make use of the animal which nature has adapted
to the zone of frost and snow exactly as she has adapted
the camel to the torrid wastes of burning sand ? The
tame reindeer has long been the ship of the desert for
the fjelds of Northern Norway, and the tundras of
Siberia. He should become that of the Arctic wastes of
North America. There should be no real difficulty
about it. The wild cariboo of North America is none
other than the reindeer of the Eur-Asiatic Continent.
The countless herds ot cariboo on which the Indians of
the Hudson Bay Territory chiefly rely for a subsistence,
afford proof positive that the country contains abundant
supplies of the reindeer's natural food. • What remains
is to introduce the tame variety of the species, whether
from Lapland or Siberia, and to make use of it for food
and for transport, exactly as is done and has beon
done from time immemorial by the Lapps and by the

187

Samoyecles. The great objection to men and dogs as

draught animaJs Ih not that they do not pull well. The

difficulty is that neither men nor dogs can live on moss

and twigs. Their food must bo hauled for them, or whatdoga

rather they must haul it for themselves. An average

dog requires a pound of meat biscuit or of pemmican a

day, and an average man fully two pounds weight of

equally concentrated food. In a few weeks either tho

one or the ether is bound to consume all that he has

been able to bring with him from the starting-point.

But the reindeer is all right if only he can find lichen ^J^^**°**"

and browse. His native home is in the gi'eat lone land,

where men and dogs alike must starve if they cannot ■

carry with them or kill enough to keep them alive.

That bold explorer Mr. Frederick Jackson was so struck

by the advantages of the reindeer employed by the

Samoyedes when he wintered in the Yalmal peninsular,

that he has taken them with him to Franz-Josef Land.

"Daily News," 30th August, 1897:—
There is a new field also, it seems, for the reindeer. Looo Reindeer

. already In

A writer in the New York Nation states the mteresting Alaska,

° A problem
fact that five hundred have been imported from Siberia soKed.

into the Lower Yukon region, and with them a number
of Lapland families to care for them. Already the
number has been doubled in the natural manner, and an
experiment is being made of using them for transporta-
tion in the mining country. Should these be successful
the future of the dog in these regions will, it is to be
feared, be more or less behind him. Unlike the dog the
reindeer needs no food carried for him. After an eighty
mile drive he can be turned loose to forage for himself
upon the abundant reindeer moss which covers all the
Alaskan fields. ^ When it is necessary to kill him, he
furnishes better meat than the dog and more of it, and
every portion of him is of value. " The reindeer express More fleet than
up the Yukon will be," says the same authority, " almost morenUa^**
as fleet and more sure than the steam-cars could be
daring the inclemency of an Alaskan winter."

188

Dog-TraloA for the Yukon.

"Pall Mall Gazbttb," October 9th, 1897.
From its Special Oorrespondent at Vancouver, 28th September, 1897.

With the dog- trains the Canadian Government hopes

to keep communication open all the Winter between

Dyea and Dawson. The dogs, as we see them here, are

no ordinary animals. They have ^ been bred and trained

for the especial purpose of hauling supplies through a

rough country. They weigh on an average 80 lbs., and

h^^mvbT' b*ve long hair. They are harnessed to a toboggan sleigh

SM^ 60 miieB in single file, usually four to a sleigh. One such team

xoni^ oonntry. will draw a load of 500 lbs. over the roughest country;

and, if conditions are at all favorablej will make 60 miles

a day.

" Evening Standard," 17th October, 1897.

From Sfbolu:i Gobbespondent, Montreal, October

5th, 1897.
The Hon. Clifford Sifton, Canadian Minister of the
Interior, has reached the Pacific Coast on his way to the
Yukon country. He is accompanied by . . . and
Major Walsh commanding a detachment of 20 of the
N.W. Mounted Police. These, with Indian runners and
sledge-drivers with 120 dogs will make the journey from
Lake Tagish to Dawson City (600 miles) along the
frozen lakes and rivers of the route.

High prices for
good

Dog.teama
Blloe over
frojien lakes
drawing heaTy
loads with
surprising
raiddlty.

Prices and Particulars of Dogs. *

** Newcastle Weekly Leader," 4th September, 1897.

Dogs are so much used for transporting supplies to
miners that in Washington and Oregon they have
actually become more valuable than horses. . . .

At Juneau their value is double what it is at Tacoma,
and on the Yukon a good dog brings from £25 to £40.

Up to May, when the ice breaks up, dog-teams slide
over the smooth surface of the frozen lakes with sur-
prising rapidity considering the loads they carry.

189

Their food consists principally of fish caught in the
'Yukon by the natives. An ordinary dog will eat daily
two pounds of dried salmon, which equals seven pounds
of fresh fish.

At Forty-Mile last winter (1896) dried salmon sold
at fron lOd. to 2s. per pound, and bacon, that was only
fit for dogs to eat, sold for Is. 7d. per pound.

■* A good dog weighs between 80 and 90 pounds.

In some of the larger Yukon camps dogs* boarding- Dog's boarding
houses house and feed dogs at from 25s. to £3 per
month according to the season and price of fish.

Buckskin mocassins, after the pattern of a child's ^'^j^.'^ddiS?*
stocking, are often provided to keep the animal's feet for dogs,
from being worn raw by the ice and snow.

Pack-saddles for dogs, so arranged that dogs can
carry from 10 to 20 poimds each as well as draw a sled,
are coming into use.

Dogs will be needed on the Yukon in large numbers
for years to come. , ....

River Travel in Winter.

In thQ Strand Magazine for October, 1897, Mr. Harry
de Windt supplies a photograph of a team of dogs draw-
ing a sleigh along the ice of a frozen river, which
appears very level, with a few inches of snow upon it.
He represents this method as the means by which the
rivers are traversed in Alaska in Winter,

Reindeer Transport.

"Canadian Gazette," October 7th, 1897.

• Secretary Bliss is, says a Washington item, taking Reindeer for
a great deal of interest in different propositions to extend siver. °°
aid to the miners in the Yukon regions who are apt to
Buffer this winter from lack of food. He directed the
Commissioner of Education, on September 21st, to send
instructions to the Teller Eeindeer Station to have all

193

the reindear, which are trained to draw sledges, sent to
St. Michael. Here they will be kept during the winter,
and if occasion should arise they can be utilised to trans-
port provisions to the Klondike. Reindeer will draw
800 pounds of food, and travel from 50 to 100 miles
a day.

Ghearfnl
prospect
orsTelling
along frozen
rivers GO and
10 degrees
below zero.

River Travelling: on the Yukon.

"Tablet," October eth, 1897.

The following extract is taken from a long interview,
in the Baltimore Sun, with the celebrated Father Bamum,
who, for some years, has been engaged in missionary
work in North-West Alaska.

" He was at St. Michael getting his winter supplies
when I arrived, and spoke as cheerfully ot CO and 70
degrees below zero, and travelling by a dog-sledge over
icy rivers from one district to another, as a man who
contemplated some pleasant scene."

Traversing the Mr. Casper Whitney, in his work On Snow-shoes to

the Barren Grounds (p. 803), states that — " Waterways
are the highways in the country for canoes in summer
and for snow-shoes and sledges in winter."

highways of
the N. W.
TenitorleB.

Section 20. Population of the Future.

Dr. DAWSON, 16th August, 1897.

The whole A considerable population will become resident in

soonbeiMgeiy the Yukon district, and railways will be provided to

connect it with the Canadian system. ... It

BaUways from required only the discovery of these rich far northern

goldfields to Induce the miners to investigate the whole

territory, and this will now follow very rapidly.

191 -

Briefly stated, I should say that the placer mining The wboi«
DOW fairly begun on the Klondike is likely to continue flued with
for a number of years, the maximum output being . f'Settiemrat
attained next year or the year after. Meanwhile the permanent

whole country will be filled with prospectors oore^ ot

The very general distribution of fine gold along the rivers ''*"*■ '•^•'
of the whole district, with the geological structure of
the country so far as this is known, go to show that
other rich placer mining districts will undoubtedly be
discovered. Each of these will have a similar history,
but in the meantime quartia will be discovered.

" Financial Guide," 9th August, 1897.

"In a few years time, in all human probability, the Theoonntir
country that is now ice and snow will be transformed snow wui be
by the magic influence of gold. There is no reason to tMnsiomed. '
doubt — nay, it is almost an absolute certainty — that the
history of the past in California, in Australia, and in
South Africa, will be the history of the future in British
Columbia. One difference is sure to be noted, which is
that the Yukon district may be expected to prove far
richer than any goldfield in Califomiai or Australia, or
South Africa."

New Yorl( Gorreepondent of the " Daily Mail," states:—

"Mr. John W. Mackay, the Bonanza King, and The Bonanga
president of the Commercial Cable Company, says : — prophesies the

•*■•'"' rapid opeiilog

' I am sure the Klondike goldfields are enormously rich, np oj the

country.

Capital will fly there and open up the country, and
enable vast fortunes to be made.' "

Evidence of the Hon. WM. CHRISTIE to 1888 Senate Committee.

Question : — I suppose the Peace Eiver country is a Agrioniture oa

. the Peace

^considerable size — in fact there is enough land there to Bivex.
make a new Province ?

Answer: — ^Yes, I sometimes hear the opinion ex-
pressed that our country may ere long become over
jpopulated, but there is not the slightest danger of that.

192

You need not be afraid how many immigrants come inta
the country to settle. You may bring in all the immi-
grants Europe can send you. There is room for all in
the Saskatchewan and Peace Biver country. There is a
A TMte^nt vast extent of splendid country from Prince Albert on
oonntey. the whole north side of the Saskatchewan, going away

up until near Fort Pitt, keeping a little to the north.
Then when you come to the route of Green Lake, there
is two days' journey through a magnificent country,
beautifully timbered, well watered, and supplied with
abundance of fish. As I travelled through it, I remarked
to one of my men, "what a splendid country to settle
in.

•' The "Rush" of '98 to alter the face of the Country.

Mr. de WINDT in the "Strand" of October, 1897.

As to the great Klondike " rush " next spring (1898),
there is no doubt it will alter the face of the entire
region, the climate notwithstanding. Railways and
steamships and telegraphs will soon be established.
Fortunes will be made and the unlucky forced to the
wall. Sensational reports may be expected daily, for
the place is a real Tom Tiddler's ground, honey-combed
by rivers and creeks with sands of gold. There is plenty
of room for all between Klondike and the Cassiar.

New Coiners must go far Afield.

from the "Daily Chronicle" Special Correspondent.

Daily Cheoniolb, 11th October, 1897.

The only way now to share the riches of the Klondike
district is to buy an interest in one of the existing claims
and for this much capital is needed. Prices are enormous,
running from £40 to £100 cash per lineal foot. No man
with less than £5,000 to £10,000 can hope to buy
himself into a good property, and much larger sums
are needed to acquire a substantial share. During the
past year prospecting has been vigorously carried on^

193

but no new strikes of any importance have been made,
though there have been numerous stampedes, and
many claims have been staked out to Hunker, Henderson
and Dominion Creeks.

The only chance for the thousands of new comers who
are now pouring into the country is either to work at the
mines for wages or to prospect in new and unexplored
ground.

Section 21« Present and Prospective
Routes to the Gold Fields.

(See also Sections 10 and 11 .j

J-4,

1. St. Michael's Eoutb.

From Norton Sound at the entrance to Behring

Strait, up the Yukon Eiver.
{See Section 11 for distances).

2. The Chilkoot Pass Eoute v

(identical with the Taiya) See Sections 10 (parts
o m n -D-D E, S, T and V), 18,

8. The Chilkat Pass Eoute . & 27 for description,

4. The Taiya Pass Eoute and Section 11 for

6. The White Pass Eoute

6. Behking Strait to Mouth of Mackenzie Eiver.
This route is only possible during little more than
three months in the Summer, while the sea is
free from ice. It is, at present, only used by
whalers from San Francisco.

{See Section 11 for distances, and Sections 5, 8,
9, 14, 24 and 25 for description, and other par-
ticulars bearing on this route.)

194

7. Thb Maokbuzib BivEB Bouts. ■■v<.t"v:

* -- From the "Ghronioie" 8peoi»i CorrMpondent :—
-„,„... London, Daily Cheoniole, IGth Sept., 1897.

One of the Trails via Edmonton. This is the route
taken by the Hudson Bay Company's men. It follows
the Paace Biver eventually into the Mackenzie and
thenoe there is a carry of about 70 miles to the waters

of the Porcupine Biver The route is

down the Porcupine to its junction with the Yukon.
But this is 300 miles below Dawson, with a stiff current
against one. The intention is to turn to the southward,
and by a trail to be cut of not more than 125 miles, to
strike the. headwaters of the Klondike.

A route via tho
month of the
Haok^ude
Biver.

BoTite broken
by Bapids and
a 80 mile road

Edmonton Route, via the Mackenzie River.

"Evening Standard" October 7th, 1897.
From its Special Correspondent.

Still another route, which is claimed to be easier,
though it is a long way round, is from the Canadian
Pacific Bailroad station at Edmonton, in the North-
West Territories, by way of the Mackenzie Biver and
Fort Macpherson. Bishop Clut, of Mackenzie Biver,
strongly recommends it. '*It may take longer," he
says, •' but the difficulties the prospectors will have to
overcome will be certainly very much less than in going
through the Passes from Dyea on the Pacific coast."
The McDougall Pass, by which the mountains are
crossed, ib only twelve hundred feet high, and almost
the whole of the rest of the distance can be done by
canoe. The half-breeds of St. Albert have formed an
association of competent guides, and several prospectors
have taken this route, in view of the high prices charged
for transportation of supplies over the passes from Dyea
inlet. From Edmonton the adventurers travel ninety
miles by waggon-road to Athabasca Landing, then by
canoe down the Athabasca Biver to Grand Bapids, one
hundred and forty-five miles. Several small rapids
which are encountered in succession are easily portaged,
and Fort MoMurray, on Athabasca Lake, is reached

195

^thout difficulty. Erom there they proceed down the
Great Slb7e Biver to Smith's Landing, where there is &
portage of fourteen miles by oz-cart to Fort Smith.
The south-west shore of Great Slave Lake is sku-ted
for some one hundred and twenty miles, which will
bring the party to the Mackenzie Biver, and on down to
Fort Macpherson. The distance from Foxi; Smith to
Fort Macpherson ia one thousand two hundred and
eighty miles, all down stream. From Fort Macpherson seTetaipoi-
the adventurers proceed down the Peel Eiver, fiftesn ^^
miles to Bat Biver, where a succession of portages will
be made with the aid of Indian guides. The Foicupine
Biver is then descended to the Yukon Eiver, three
hundred miles from Fort Macpherson. They then
ascen.i the Yukon two hundred and sixty miles to Diatanoa from
Dawson (Ji^y; the distance traversed from Edmonton p^ifloBi2fiw°r
is two thousand four hundred and fifty-eight miles, two 8°4w nSSS*"*
thousand one hundred and eighty-two of which is down
stream. The Government are surveying this route, but
there seems no doubt of its practicability. It has been
frequently used by hunters and traders, and Mr. Ogilvie,
of the Dominion Survey, who knows more of the
Klondyke than any other man, travelled by it some
years ago. • ■'.: ■: ..T:».;-;r-i ■' o;^/« '^.r^'.'^*^^^

{See Section 11 for distances, and Sections 10, 12,
14, 19 and 22 for description and other par-
ticulars. See also Eoute No. 14 further on.)

Note. — It is more than likely that some of the
large rivers running into the Mackenzie from
the West, notably the Peace, Liard and, par-
ticularly, the Cacajou, will be utilised as
waterways into the goldbearing regions of the
Far North "West in the near future.

8. The Peace BivKR Eoute.

{See Section 11 for distances, and Section 10,
part M, for particulars). ^. . ,> .^ ~

9. The Liard BivEB Eoute. -^v- m-v"' iiu-* u ui.;.,j i

{See Section 11 for distances on the Pelly after
leaving the Liard Eiver, and Section 10, part K,

196

'"' for description and distances on the Liard,

■*.n<^ •>-, jijg^jjQQg Lg^j^Q j^jj^^ Overfand to the Pelly).

10. Thb Stikine Eivbe Eoute via Teslin Lake.

(See Section 11 for distances after leaving Teslin
Lake, and Section 10, part N. for distances on
Lower Stikine, and descriptive particulars.)

11. The Taku Eiveb Eoute via Teslin Lake.

{See Section 11 for distances from Teslin Lake,-
and Section 10, part W, for distances from Inlet
to Lake, and other particulars.)

12. Bound's Overland Eoute.

Across Chilkat Pass to the Lewes Eiver at Five
Finger Eapids. It is to the east of Dalton's
trail, and about 180 miles from Pass to Eapids.
This trail is, also, said to extend to Link Eapids,
on the Yukon. It is reported to be an easy
route for horses in the Summer season.

13. Dalton's Overland Eoute.

From Chilkat Pass to the mouth of the Norden-
skiold Eiver on the Lewes ; distance about 170
, . miles. Though this distance is token from the
Pass, Dalton's actual trail begins at Chilkat
Inlet, passes to the west of Chilkat Pass, and
while occasionally touching the river at the
point above-mentioned, it passes at no great
distance from the Lewes right on to Fort
Selkirk. Dalton will not permit anyone to
accompany him on this route.

14. The Edmonton Eoutes.

There are at least three routes proposed from
Edmonton to which place there is a branch of
the Canadian Pacific Eailway. They are —

(a) The route mentioned in this Section, 1st
paragraph under the heading — *' Mackenzie
Eiver Eoute," Eoute 7. ...

*■ ' (6) A proposed Branch of the Canadian Pacific
Eailway from Edmonton to the Athabasca

197

Biver, thence by Athabasoa Lake and
Slave Eiver to the Great Slave Lake.
(There are 14 miles of broken water on the
Slave Eiver, and 70 miles on the Athabasca.
Mr. McConnell and Bishop Glut 1888
;:,,.., Report). From these Lakes the Mackenzie
Biver and its Tributaries offer means
referred to elsewhere, under sections 10, 11,
12, 19 and 22, of getting across the moun-
tains into the Upper Yukon Country. (See
part headed-—" The most likely Boute from
Edmonton to the Yukon.")

Of all the routes from the Mackenzie,
those from near its mouth down the Feel or
Porcupine Bivers appear to be the easiesti
best known, and least expensive, for about
three or four months in the year.

(c) The third route from Edmonton may be
termed rather "a large order." for a
railway at this stage of the development
of the Far North West, but it has the
merit of being an easy though long route
overland.

The following evidence by Stuart D. Mulkins, Esq.,
to the Select Committee of the Senate of the
Dominion in 1888, describes this route, and
supplies distances : —

Fort Saskatchewan, 27th February, 1888.
Having seen by the public prints that you intend
during the present session of Parliament to call
for a Committee of the Senate to take evidence
and obtain information with regard to the
extreme North West, and the best mode of
obtaining access thereto, I take the liberty of
sending you some information collected from
persons who have travelled through the Eocky
Mountain region, and also a suggestion as to a
cheap and serviceable route. The recent dis-
coveries of gold on the headwaters of the Yukon

198

' Biver have added importance to that oornitry^

«. T* ■« 5

and if Canada intends to enjoy the benefit to be
derived from them, an easy route must be
devised whioh will enable the miners to enter
with sufiGioient supplies to enable them to work
('oring at least two seasons, and such route
■ Jaust commence and run through our territory.

' ' A waggon road starting from here or Edmonton

i:;:-:.:: to the Head of Pelly Eiver, the main branch

"' -^ " of the Yukon, would fiU the biU and bring

under 800 miles in length, of which 180 miles

•-' is already completed, and 200 miles may be

■:'ii:i L classed as light prairie, and the balance (360)

light timber — that is, openings and bluffs.

,. ; ... This route would run to the Athabasca Landing

, ^ (90 miles of road built), thence to Lesser Slave

Lake post (160 miles), thence to Peace Eiver

(90 miles of road built), thence to Fort HaJkett,

on the Liard Eiver (200 miles), thence to the

head of Pelly Eiver (200 miles). The distance

sounds long, but from the information I have

obtained it seems that in no peirt of the whole

distance is the timber heavy, muskegs are few

and short, and all agree that the road is quite

practicable.

The advantages of such a route are obvious.
When it crossed the Peace Eiver and Liard
Eiver it would give command of those rivers,
and in fact the whole of the Mackenzie Eiver
basin, without having to pass the dangerous
rapids on the Athabasca Eiver, and the long
traverse across the Great Slave Lake.

It would also be the cheapest route to the miner
. . going to the Yukon or the Gassier mines ; in
fact, valuable mines exist on the Liard that
have been worked more or less ever since 1873.
The miner going to the Yukon would be able
to reach the mining ground a month earlier
than he possibly could by the Pacific Coast
route.

19y

Other routes from Edmonton axQ referred to by the
Hon. G. H. Mackintosh, Lieut.-Goyernor of the N.W.
Territories, when interviewed by a correspondent of the
Pall Mall Gazette. He stated — , ,

y"= "Pall Mall Gazette," Sept. 16,1897.

"The other route (after mentioning that of the
Stikine), also through British Territory, and for most of
its length a waterway, starts from Edmonton. Thence
you strike N.W. until you come to Dun vegan on the
Peace Biver, which will carry you into the Mackenzie.
Effecting, at times, a portage at Fort Macpherson, you
will find yourself in the Porcupine River, which will take
you into the Yukon, dose to Fort Yukon. ?> '^i^

V ......

"As an alternative, you can follow Mr. Moberly'a
route from Edmonton. You first make T£te Jeune
Cache, where you light on the North Western water
stretches. After negotiating Giscome Portage, the
Parsnip Biver helps you on a bit, when Lake Francis
becomes your objective. Then you get on to the Pelly
Biver, a tributary of the Yukon. The distance is,
approximately, 1,590 miles, a shorter route, but one
which seems to involve a good deal of cross-country
work. Still, the Hudson Bay Co.'s people have travelled
up and down these lines for a good many years. So you
see it is quite possible to reach the Klondike without
either a journey of 6,000 miles via St. Michael, or a
troublesome bit of work over the Chilkoot Pass."

All-Canadian Routes.

"Canadian Gazette," October 7th, 1897.

Mr. John A. Grose, of the Dominion Burglary Guar-
antee Company, leaves Montreal about December 1st for
Klondike, travelling overland from Edmonton. He will
not, however, follow the Mackenzie Biver. He will do
his travelling by sledge, and will use either dogs or overtond."''* ^
ponies. The route followed will be : from Edmonton to roiite*£M only*
Peace Biver Crossing, 260 miles; down the Peace Biver to SSid^bwak.

200

Nelson Porks, 240 miles ; from Nelson Forks to the Liard
Biver, 120 miles ; along the Liard to the Dease River,
160 miles ; from the Dease Eiver to the Pelly Eiver, 170
miles ; down the Pelly to the junction with the Lewes,
220 miles, and from there to the Klondike, 200 miles,
making a total distance of 1,370 miles. This route is
considerably shorter than by way of the Mackenzie Eiver.

Ha^»cfenz!e Another Canadian party, of Hamilton, of which Mr.

»«*0M"» A. H. H. Heming, artist, is at the head, leaves Hamilton
early in April. The trip will be, from Edmonton, 2,453
miles to the goldfields, of which 2,182 miles are down
stream. It will take just two months from the time of
starting to reach the goldfields, and this will leave the
members of the expedition two months, or, at the least,
a month and a-half to prepare themselves for the hard-
ships of the winter. The cost will, it is claimed, be just
about half of the ordinary expense. The number is
limited to 100.

The most likely Route from Edmonton to the Yukon.

Mr. Eoger Pooock contributes the following to
Lloyds' Weekly of 14th November, 1897: — A party of
Mounted Police, under Inspector Moodie, has been sent
with horses to examine an overland route, still largely
unexplored, from Edmonton to the Pelly River, which
enters the Yukon 172 miles above Dawson City. By the
courtesy of the Mounted Police Department I am able to
reproduce here the hitherto unpublished information
collected for Inspector Moodie from all sources available.
Should his report be favourable the Canadian Government
\vill open the route for travel :« —

MILES.

Edmonton to Old Fort Assiniboine (abandoned),
on Athabasca River by old cart trail. Cross
Athabasca Eiver 76

I'ort Assiniboine to West end Lesser Slave Lake
by old Hudson's Bay Company's trail ; when
last heard of in very bad condition and often
very swampy 136

201

Lesser Slave Lake to Peace Eiver at the mouth of

Smoky; cart road. Cross Peace River ... 65

By fairly good trail, in part already passable for

carts, to Fort St. John, up the Peace Rivar 146

Fort St. John on Peace River in a N.W. direction.
No trail practicable for loaded animals. From •
Mr. Ogilvie's report classified — for difi&culty
of road construction — as medium, to mouth
of Nelson River on the Liard 270

Cross Nelson River, say 10 miles above mouth ;
Nelson River up Liard, crossing Toad River
easy (to advanced basis of supplies per water

f(jllu6] ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• ••• *w

Cross Liard River and follow the bank of Grand

Canyon (over 1,000 feet climb) difficult ... 20

Grand Canyon, following north bank of Liard,
crossing Deer, Smith, Coal, and Macpherson .
Rivers, 100 miles medium, 30 miles easy to
mouth of Dease River, which flows in from
the Cassiar mining country to the S. W. ... 135

Dease River northward up east bank of Liard, and

the Francis tributary to latitude 60° 30' N. 40

Thence northward, medium 20

Thence northward to lower end of Frances Lake,
one of the higher sources of the Liard,
crossing one river, easy 25

Cross Frances River at lower end of Fiances Lake
and up west side of lake, and strike Finlayson
Pwiver above its Canyon. Medium 20 miles,
difficult 5 miles. Crossing the divide between
the Yukon and Mackenzie River systems ... 25

Along Finlayson Eiver and Lake, &c., to Pelly
Eiver, following on bank, say 30 miles easy,
12 miles medium 42

Cross Pelly River and follow down on bank to

Hoole Canyon easy 30

Hoole Canyon is the highest point to which Pelly
River might be navigated by steamers of light
draught and good power at favourable stages
of water, to site of Fort Selkirk, where there

202

MILBS.

7 is a trading posfc, and where the confluence

t'' of Felly and Lewes Bivers forms the Yukon,

! 270 miles following bends of river. Following

' the bank of Felly by trail striking across to

Macmillan valley from the detour, striking

/ that river 20 miles above its mouth, Boss and

' Macmillan Bivers must be crossed. A few

miles here and there would be difficult. Other

I long stretches easy — classed medium ... 175

Fort Selkirk down the Yukon to Dawson Oity ... 172

Edmonton to Dawson 1,414

As a means of reaching the Klondike this long, over-
land trail of 1,067 miles from the plains is not so good
as the short portage of 150 miles from the Stiokeen to
Lake Teslin, with its equally short run by boat down the
Yukon; but as a way for sending in cattle Inspector
Moodie's route will probably afford better feed than the
Dalton. Dawson City is not, however, the main objective
for most travellers. The objective is gold, and that is not
to be found in an overcrowded camp like the Klondike.

(See also under Boute 7.) . . .

16. The Chxtbohill Boutb fbom Hudson's Bat.

This route is by a railway which The Chartered
Hudson's Bay and Facific Bailway Go. proposes
to build from Churchill Harbor. It is proposed
to divide the line into three sections : —

a. From Fort Churchill to Sea Falls, 350 miles,

where it would be joined by the line at
present under construction from Winnipeg.

b. Section two, from Sea Falls to Frince Albert,

about 300 miles.
e. From Frince Albert via Battlef ord to Edmonton
about 350 miles ; this would connect with
the Canadian Facific Company's line.

The value of this line, so far as the Yukon gold-
fields are concerned, lies in its connection at
Edmonton with the routes to the Yukon Valley
and Mackenzie Biver proposed from that place.

203

-ai jjj jjIjq event of a route being constructed from
Edmonton to the Yukon, thia Churchill lino
would prove an easy and very direct means o!
reaching the Far North West from England.
The distance from Liverpool to Churchill Harbor
is only 2,926 miles, whereas from Liverpool to
New York it is 3,040 miles, and to Montreal
2,990. But it is also necessary to note that
^ ^ from Winnipeg to Liverpool via Montreal it is

X; 570 more by land than by this proposed
Churchill routo.

16. The Old Hudson Bay Eoutb from York
Factory at the Mouth op the Nelson, Hudson Bay,
TO THE Mackenzie Eiver. ^ j, ,,-!■.

Evidence of the Hon. \Vm. CHRISTIE, late Inspecting Chief Factor
' of the Hudson Bay Co., to the 1888 Committee. ..>

Supplies were shipped from England to York AndWronie

T^ , T-r 1 T* r»,i . » ,1 Via Hudson's

Factory, on Hudson Bay. The route from there was up Bay.
Hayes and Hill Bivers, and through the lakes up to
Norway House, at the north end of Lake Winnipeg,
on Jack Biver. Then through Lake Winnipeg, up the
Saskatchewan, past the Grand Bapid, on to Portage La
Loche, on to the head of Navigation.

U«S. American v. British Territory routes to tfie Yukon

goldflelds.

" Manchester Courier," August 4th, 1897.

It (the establishment of routes through American Present Pacifio
Territories to the Yukon goldfields) seems to establish a baok-aoor^ '
back-door entrance for the special convenience of our oar American
American cousins. There is certainly scope in the ''°°"*°'"
district for the energies of both Britisher and Yankee,
and there is no desire on the part of this country to
" play a Yukon for a Behring." All the same, the back*
door arrangement must be regarded as unsatisfactory in
view of the possibility of making a front-door which would

204

A preterabie
tonte, via the
Mackeneie
Blver.

thi route via
Hudson's Bay,
the Great
81avc Lake nnd
Mackenzie
fiirer.

The Klondike
gold deposits
traced to the
Kooky
Mountains
between the
Yukon and
the Mackenzie.

be at least 2,000 miles nearer England than the ciroaitous
route by way of Vancouver Island and Juneau. This
possibility has been indicated in a memorial from the
people of Winnipeg, drawing attention to the advantages
for direct water communication with Klondyke which
are offered by the great chain of lakes and rivers
extending all the way from Manitoba to the mouth of the
Mackenzie Biver, which, although it falls into the Arctio
Ocean, is within comparatively easy hail of the more
easterly districts into which the gold discoveries are
rapidly being extended. Lake Athabasca, Slave Eiver,
Great Slave Lake, and the Mackenzie Biver are
navigable during at least four months of the year, and in
order to reach the chain from England it would not be
necessary to proceed to Winnipeg in the first instance.
Thirteen years ago the commander of the naval expedi-
tion, which was despatched by the British Government
to ascertain the feasibility of establishing regular steam-
ship communication between this country and the western
shores of Hudson's Bay, reported that the straits are
perfectly free of ice, every year, from the beginning of
June to the end of October. He also called attention to
the suggestive fact that the distance between England
and Fort Churchill, on this coast, is actually less than the
distance between Liverpool and New York. There
seems to be every probability that the whole of the 1,300
miles' length of the Eocky Mountain range, which extends
northwards through British America, will prove to be
quite as rich in minerals as the United States portion.
It has been tapped at both ends with dazzling results.
The quartz reefs to which the Klondyke deposits are
being traced prove to be even richer than the mines of
British Columbia. Before the great intermediate portion
of the range can be explored, advantage will certainly
have to be taken of the means of water carriage offered
by the great chain of rivers and lakes which is such a
conspicuous feature in the map of the North-West
Territories. The country traversed by it has a much
milder climate than that of Alaska, and is abundantly
fertile in parts. Wheat is said to grow well in the valley

2C5

of the Maokenzio Bivor, oven as far north as the neigh-
bourhood of the Arotio Circle, and many other crops can
be brought to maturity during the brief but hot summer
of that littlo-known region. Thus one of the chief f Brituh

" front-door to

difficulties experienced at Klondyke would be solved by *''*' "•y.
the opening of a British front-door to that region, at the by » roate
same time that the development of the whole of the acroHathe
North-Wost Territories would receive the stimulus that Territories,
is alone needed to bring its immense natural resources
within the range of British enterprise, and thus open up
new markets for British trade.

17, The Chesterfield Inlet and Mackenzie
BivEB Route. — This proposed route is the most
attractive to English commercial interests.
(Sec Section 22, next page.)

Another Route from Mackenzie River to the
Stewart Headwaters.

The Calgary Herald of 16th September, 1897, con-
tains the following paragraph concerning an important
expedition that has left for the Yukon. " Messrs. B.
Filon, J. Lamoreaux, Louis Lamoreaux, E. St. Jean and
M. Verrault, of Fort Saskatchewan, left Edmonton about
July 15th. They built a boat at Athabasca Landing,
and got away from there about August 1st. Mr. Pilon
had gone to the Yukon, by the Mackenzie route some
years before.

On this occasion he intended to reach a river which ^J^l^^ ''°"

the Stewart

comes into the Mackenzie from the mountains near Fort "<>*'*,T*«'" '"

. Fort Wrigloy

WrisleV. on the

° •' Mackenzie.

During his former trip he had heard from Indians
who had come down that river, that they had been west
of the mountains to a river where the white men were
mining gold. This he supposed to be the Stewart Elver.
He proposed to winter as far up the tributary of the
Mackenzie as possible, and make across to the river west
of the mountains either during the winter or in spring.
If this was found impracticable he would take the Peel
Eiver route to the Yukon.

Several parties had already started down the Mac- Apopniarronto

•' from Calgary is

Kenzie to traverse the Peel Eiver route. flown the Mac-

_ kenzie and Feel

L 2 . Bivers.

206

Section 22. The Chesterfield Inlet

,.,.,'. -r ..v-r u vi..>„,.: Route. "■■•.'-■''' -'■-■ ••■

It is proposed to build a railway from the river at
the head of this Inlet to Great Slave Lake, a distance
of 175 miles (this distance is covered for a considerable
distance, if not all the way, by navigable waterways),
through fairly easy country. The Mackenzie River,
navigable for steamers drawing 6 ft. to 6 ft. from four
to five months in the year, would then be available.
This scheme also allows for a 50 mile railway line from
the mouth of the Mackenzie to the Porcupine Eiver,
a navigable tributary of the Yukon.

The Financial News of July 30th and August 28th
refers to this route rather favourably, as also does the
Financial Times of August 16th. Its advantages are
many and should appeal strongly to English views.

a. It would bring the Yukon Territory within nearly
■ ' two weeks' distance from Liverpool.

b. The time in reaching the Territory from England

by this proposed route would be shorter than
than that of the shortest route from Vancouver.

c. As almost all the route would be by deep navi-

gable waters and railway, passengers and goods
from England would reach the North West
Territory quicker and cheaper than by any
routes proposed from the West Coast.

d. It would open up the highly mineralised but

undeveloped (for want of railways) country of
the Mackenzie Basin, especially the vast salt,
ooal and petroleum areas which are known to
be immense. ,,.,.. ■-■.- ,.

"': «. It would develop the fisheries of the Arctic Coast,
y, especially in whaling and sealing, and also the
.. > highly lucrative salmon and cod industries.

207

/. It would open up the great fur countries of the
North West Territories and wide areas of good
*;6 pasture country in the South.

g. The Great Barren North Lands of the North

West Territory of Canada are full of rich possi'

bilities in minerals, furs and fisheries, of which

. _ . explorers speak so highly, and this route would

.^^. . open them up. . ;^ ■•; . "::

The Shortest route from Europe to the Yukon
Country.

• '. The "Leeds Mercury," 3l8t July, 1897.

The opening up of the Alaskan goldfields, like those Xo*,*go,a
of California, Australia, and every other great gold-bear- ^^J opgQ^ap,
ing country, may, or will almost certainly, be followed
by consequences much more important and far reaching
than the additipn to the world's stock of the precious
metal, which is certain to accrue even upon the most
moderate estimates of the richness of the Yukon Valley
placers. A glance at the map of the Dominion will
illustrate our meaning ; here we have a country equal
in area to the Continent of Europe — of untold capacity Here we have
to support human life ; containing geological formations untold
which have been proved to be an untapped storehouse *^*'"'° ^'
of all the useful metals and minerals, with dense forests
of the noblest species of pine, and immense tracts of land
capable of cultivation, with the widest hunting-grounds
for fur-bearing animals on the face of the globe, and an
inexhaustible food supply of fish and flesh capable of
feeding the present population of the empire — all broken
up by extensive seas, lakes, and rivers navigable for
many months of the year for thousands and thousands
of miles. The Dominion Government, long cognisant
of the potentialities of the North- Western Territories,
but handicapped with an already comple'ed railway
system more than half the mileage of which is still
unproductive, and all of which is capitalised much above
its value, has considered many projects for constructing

208

Bsilwa^ links
to Join the
lakes and
navigable
rivers between
Hndson Bay
and the
Mackenzie.

The shoitest
ronte from
Europe.

the railway links required to join the lakes and the
navigable rivers between Hudson's Bay and the lordly
Mackenzie; but until now the time has never seemed
opportune, nor has the public mind been awakened to
the advantage. A glance at the map shows that the two
routes to Klondike, specified in the Emigration Office
oiroular, though the only onef^^ now feasible, are by no
means the only ones possible ; the shortest route from
the United Kingdom to Alaska would be, when the
northern seas are open to navigation in summer, from
Liverpool to Hudson's Strait and Hudson Bay, up Chester-
field Inlet, across country some 200 miles to the Great
Slave Lake, and then down the Mackenzie and Porcupine
rivers to the Yukon — a highway for commerce aligned
by the distribution of land and water that may be of
imperial import in the future.

Part of an old
scheme for
opening np the
Morth-West
Territories.

Dawson City
brought within
fourteen days
(A London.

Main area of
Hudson's Bay
open all the
year.

London to Klondyke in a fortnight.

" Fina.ncial News," 28th August, 1897.

A writer in the Toronto Globe explains the position
in respect to the project for opening up a transit route
from the Canadian Pacific Railroad at the nearest point
in Ontario to Hudson Bay, and thence to the Mackenzie
and Yukon Basins {via Chesterfield Inlet). This scheme,
joined to the better steamer service between Canada and
Great Britain, might not impossibly bring Dawson City
within fourteen days of London. As regards the route
within the limits of Ontario The demon-
stration at Spithead Jubilee Naval display ....
showing a speed of 82f knots, or over 35 miles . . .
accomplished by the use of what were termed turbine
propellers. What a revolution would this effect if placed
on the route between Ontario's seaport and the western
end of Chesterfield Inlet I Those 300 miles would then
require forty hours of transit time. And hei*e it may be
well to remark that the main area of Hudson Bay is
navigable at all seasons of the year. The obstructions of
winter ice are confined to near-shore localities. The
open season on the Moose Eiver is similar in duration to

209

that on the St. Mary's Eiver through which most of the
commerce of Lake Superior passes. That at Chester-
field Inlet is, of course, shorter ; but how far ice-breaking ^''^'ualfj^f^
appliances will aid in lengthening the season there is yet ^^^p.'^| j«
to be tested. No reasonable mind, looking back on the iniet open,
improvements which we have witnessed in transit -
matters in our generation can treat these new ideas as
certainly impracticable in advance of actual tests. They
should all have a chance for trial, and may evolve
valuable results. The best electrical specialists consider
50 miles an hour a proper speed for an electrical line. •

By a calculation founded upon the foregoing estimates of '
the same, in connection with possible marine speed, it
would appear that the transit time over the new route
from Missanabie to the Yukon goldfields would require
but ten hours by rail and 140 hours by water, or about
seven (' ^s from Toronto. This would certainly enable
us to compete with the Pacific coast for the trade of that
mining district, and render the intermediate sections on
the route tributary CO us beyond any competition. Leaving
the question of quicker transit time out of account, the
fact that, owing to the longer reaches of water transit,
freight can be conveyed cheaper from Ontario to those
north-western regions than by any other route stamps
this new avenue of trade for Toronto and for Central This new route

oners an oppor-

and Eastern Canada as offering an opportunity for tunUyfor
business enlargement on a broader basis than ever before sion far broader

° than nefore

obtainable. This being the case, will it not be welcomed obtainable.
by all, and party distinctions and business rivalries be
subordinated to the attaining of the magnificent pos-
sibilities now apparently within our reach?

*' Finally : Never was there a case like this in the
industrial and commercial history of Ontario, where
time is such an element of success or failure. The con-
firmation of the rumors of the wealth to be found in the
mines along the Yukon Valley which has been heralded
through the press during the last few weeks has electrified :
the entire civilised world, and the question of the best
means of transit to that region is uppermost in all minds.

210

The geo-
graphical
mtuation of
Intense interest
to Cinadians.

One-f onrth the
cost is an
important
feature.

The geographical situation is one of intense interest to
Canadians, because of the fact that the western ocean
frontage, parallel to the entire Yukon Valley, is in the
territory and under the jurisdiction of another nation,
whose citizens have as yet received at least nine-tenths
of the Yukon mining prizes hitherto distributed. Already
the people of British Columbia are agitating the question of
building over 500 miles of railway through a mountainous
district to connect the upper waters of the Yukon with a
British port of entry on the Pacific ; whereas half that
length, and probably one-fourth the cost, would connect
the same river with the waters which wash the shores of
Ontario (in other words, by the opening up of this
Chesterfield Inlet route). That the grandest business
prize in our country now waits upon the action of these
two provinces is too evident to need argument. ' First
come first served ' is a rule applicable in this case, and
the question of how soon communication can be opened
with Ontario must decide the direction of millions of
commercial value in the near future."

The first link
from the
Canadian
Pacific
Railway to
the Sonth End
of Hudson's
Bay.

HUDSON'S BAY TO KLONDIKE SCHEME.

New Scheme, supported by Toronto Influence, for a
connection with the Canadian Pacific.

" Financial News," London, July 30th, 1897.

The greatest interest is taken at Toronto in the
ambitious project of establishing rail and water com-
munication between the main line of the Canadian Pacific
Railway North of Sault Ste. Marie and tie mining
regions on the Yukon Eiver. The first link in the pro-
posed route is a railway line northward from Sault Ste.
Marie, crossing the Canadian Pacific at Missanabie, reach-
ing James Bay (the southern extension of Hudson's Bay),
at the mouth of Moose Eiver, the distance being about
400 miles. Along Hudson Bay, in a north-westerly
direction, the stretch of open salt water to Chesterfield
Inlet is 1,300 miles. From the head of navigable water
on Chesterfield Inlet, it is estimated by the Government

211

maps that *175 miles of railway will connect with the
Great Slave Lake. Along that lake and down the Mac-
kenzie Eiver to the delta, at its mouth in the Arctic
Ocean, there is a stretch of navigable waterf 1,400 miles
in length. J Fifty miles of railway would connect the
Mackenzie Delta with the Porcupine Eiver, a tributary
of the Yukon. Down these confluent rivers there are
1,500 miles of navigable water to Behring Sea. This is
a route about 4,825 miles in length — 4,200 miles of
navigable water, and 625 miles of railway. With the
additional navigable section of the Yukon reached, there
would be an available stretch of transportation facilities
about 6,500 miles in length. "If thought advisable,"
the Toronto Olobe says, "connection could be made witli J^^9^®1*^"

•' ' field Inlet

Athabasca Lake and River by the construction of a few route to open

•' up all the

miles of railway, thus connecting about 1,200 miles more f *Ji^i"^^^*'

of navigable water. This is, of course, independent of

the Atlantic route to Liverpool by way of Hudson Bay,

a feature considered by the promoters. The intention

of the promoters is to conunence with the section between

Missanabie, on the Canadian Pacific Eailway, and Hudson

Bay, the route along the valley of the Moose River being

240 miles. This, it is claimed, will bring the fishing Theflsbing,

trade of Hudson Bay, and the mineral and timber wealth mineral^"

along the route, into direct communication with the
markets of Ontario."

industries.

The link between Sault Ste. Marie and Missanabie —
160 miles — will perfect this part of the system. The
connection with older Ontario and the fish and other
trade of the Hudson Bay region are regarded as more
available for profitable development than the British Sarlfctg.
grain trade contemplated in the earlier projected route
between Winnipeg and Fort Churchill.

*A large bttt "inexplored river covers the greater part, afid
jperhaps the wJiole of this distance.

t This distance is iticorrect; it should be 1,280 miles.

\ In summer this distance can be covered by boats the whole
way, excepting an easy half-mile portage in McDougalVs Pass.

[E. J. D.]

p 2

212

TRADE ROUTES FROM THE EAST TO YUKON.

"Financial Times," 16th August, 1897.

In a pamphlet recently issued by the Canadian

Department of the Interior regarding the Yukon district,

of which there has been so much talk lately, occurs this

succinct statement, laid down as a sort of first principle : —

«' Diflscnity of "The great obstacle to the development of the district is

access to the ° '^

Yukon Gold- the difficulty of access." . . . Yet that the country

fields the great . , , f -, , . ^ , ■, , , ,

obstecie." IS far from maccessible is shown by the fact that nearly
60 years ago it was not unknown to Hudson's Bay
Company's servants, while the brigades of boats of that
Company penetrated every season the waterways of the
"barren lands" to the east of the Yukon district, a region
enterpriM^"^"^ quite as forbidding as the new goldfields. Some of the
complete books of the late E. M. Ballantyne, who was once in the

Kudso^Bay employ of the Hudson's Bay Company, give a vivid
commenced so picture of life in the far North-West in the early days,
and of the manner in which the great continuous water-
ways were utilised for trade purposes. Indeed, the
Hudson's Bay Company had a well-established trading
post at the junction of the Yukon and Porcupine Elvers
as early as 1847, which must have been regularly com-
municated with by way of the Mackenzie Eiver, since
all supplies were brought from the headquarters of the
Company on Hudson's Bay. If, therefore, the Hudson's
Bay men could take in supplies and bring out furs from
T'he aifiference as far West as Fort Yukon in the early days, when they

between those <i j ' j

days and these, had to be guided by the reports of roving Indians, and
had to give a name to every stream they traversed, the
difficulty of establishing well-defined trade routes and
using them in this day of maps, surveys and exhaustive
reports, should not be insuperable The one

Snpo^an*"' all-important question is: Is the game worth the candle?

anawered)^^"*'^ And that qucstion has not yet been satisfactorily answered ^
though it doubtless will be before long. The country
appears, from pretty reliable reports, to be rich both in
alluvial and quartz gold ; and if this prove to be true, it
will C3rtainly afford a valuable new market for British
goods, and a profitable field for the efforts of British
traders, since it can produce little but minerals. This

213

"we know, that twc American trading companies have,

up to the present, found it sufficiently profitable to enable

them to run ocean steamers 3,000 miles, connecting with

river steamers running a further 1,600 miles. It there- What British

fore behoves British traders and capitalists to look into capitaiiBts

the matter of trade routes for themselves. ....

Much alluvial gold has undoubtedly been found in the

Yukon district, and it is an undoubted fact that there is

c[uartz gold there. It may prove to be the richest gold

field the world has ever seen, bub it has not yet been

proved so. The whole area between Hudson's Bay and The territory

the Eocky Mountains may prove to be rich in mineral ; BonTsaysm^

coal has been discovered in some parts of it ; but little *^® Yukon.

is known about it yet. We also know that Mr. J. B.

Tyrrell, of the Canadian Geological Survey, in exploring the

shore of Hudson's Bay, discovered at Chesterfield Inlet gofd^torm^on

a similar geological formation to that which has proved ohesterfieid

rich in gold in the Rainy River and Lake of the Woods' ^'^'s'

district of the Province of Ontario. Gold has not been

found there yet, however. A line of railway from

Manitoba to Hudson's Bay has also been projected, and

this would give a short outlet to salt water for Manitoba

wheat, and furnish a very useful source of revenue to a

line of vessels also engaged in the Yukon trade. . . .

The Canadian Pacific Railway is considering the advis- The route

ability of getting into the field by prolonging its Edmonton Edmonton,

line 50 miles to the Athabasca River, whence by Athabasca

Lake and Slave River it may reach Great Slave Lake.

The Hudson's Bay Company has shown that the country

may be entered from the east by two different routes, Two different
"' 1 1 - m routes from

and we learn that a number of Toronto gentlemen have t^e east.

secured a charter for one of these, though they openly

confess that they have no present intention of using it,

being more keenly interested in a line northward from

Sault Ste. Marie, in the Province of Ontario, to Hudson's

Bay. They have, however, secured a charter, as we a chatter ai-

Baid, for a route by way of Chesterfield Inlet, navigable, Jo^i^rmfto bj

we believe, for ocean steamers, thence, by a line of rail- aeS li^e^!'*"*

way 175 miles long,* to Great Slave Lake, from the

* It is qu,ite probable that most of this distance, if not the wJwle
of it, is covered by the great but unexplored river flowing from the
iVest into Aberdeen Lake at the Head of Chesterfield Inlet. [E. J. D.]

214

Fid tbe Mno-
kcDzie and
Porcupine
Birera.

FiatheLiard
BiTer.

A direct ronte
from Liverpool
to tbe Taken
nearly all by
- water ; l,aoo
miles by river
down Bteeam.

head of which steamers can go right to the delta of the-
Great Mackenzie. Another short railway line (50 miles)
over the height of land is said, by explorers, to be
practicable, when a further great stretch of navigable
water on the Porcupine is reached. But after reaching
the Mackenzie there is a shorter route which Mr. Ogilvie
reports practicable, namely, up the Liard Eivar, a tribu-
tary, and the Dease, also navigable for small steamers, to
Lake Teslin, thus striking both the Yukon and northern
British Columbia goldfieids. The Hudson's Bay people
used the Liard, which passes through a break in the
Bockies, and the Upper Pelly, but on the latter river
there are dangerous rapids which cannot be passed by
steamers. At the other end of the route, from Chestev-
field Inlet, direct connection may be had,'during summer,
with Liverpool, which is about 2,800 miles away. Thus
by sea, rail and river, a route might be had direct from
England to the Klondyke, just about equal in length
to that from San Francisco by way of Fort St. Michael
and the Yukon Biver. It should also be a quicker
route, a fact which, joined with the advantage in tariff
rates enjoyed by the British trader, should give him a
strong advantage.

A magniflcent
sobeme.

Tbe Gbester-
field Inlet
ronte a profit-
able Tentore.

This last scheme is an ambitious— even a magni-
ficent one, but we are quite willing that anyone who

oares to take it up should benefit by our idea

If the Yukon field do not peter out the establishment of
the rail and water line we have mentioned might be a
very profitable venture, even if gold or coal were not
found East of the Eockies, or the Manitoba wheat traffic
tapped immediately ; but it all rests on the future of the

Yukon district as a gold field However,

we may say that we think two or three hundred pounds
invested in a trading company, in whose promoters a
reasonable amount of confidence may be placed, is likely
to give quite as good returns as if invested in a ticket to
Klondyke, a miner's kit and a "giub-stake," with infinitely
less discomfort to the investor. - -^. . ,„

216

Section 23. To Chesterfield Inlet
from Atiiabasca Lake.

:,, By J. W. TYRRELL, CE., D.LS.

After traversing the shore of this gieat icy lake Tcfa^w'

(Lake Doobaunt, August, 1893), our river (the Telzoa) Jfcw'^l^^"™

was again discovered. It was not obstructed by ice, but, nav£»w*'* ***

as before, its clear, cold waters rushed on to the north- ^."^SF^ ** l?'i4

' ' of Chesterfield

ward. Inlet-

About 6 miles further on the river widened into a
little lake, and further down the river, on the evening of
August 19th, as our little Heet glided down with the
strong, swift stream, we sighted an Esquimaux camp.

Soon after leaving the Esquimaux camp we dis- y^^eaves
covered a lake, 20 milas long, which has been honoured

by the name of Whiteaves "We found the outlet

at the base of a very remarkable mountain of white
quartzite. Lady Marjorie Lake was next met with, a remarkable
The course of the river from this lake appeared to be whit^**'^"'
westerly and north-westerly, and this being the opposite ^°"*^'«'
direction to that which we were desirous of travelling,
we followed it somewhat reluctantly. The whole appear-
ance of the river was different from what it had been
higher up. It was now a noble stream, broad, deep and ^ noble
swift, with a well-defined channel and high banks of strcMn, broad
rock or sand. On and on we were borne in a general
north-westerly direction, until we began to doubt the
Esquimaux's report regarding the river flowing to Hudson
Bay. We had already passed the latitude of Chesterfield
Inlet and Baker Lake, and were beading from them
straight for the Great Fish Kiver (flowing into Great The Great Fish
Slave liake), which was now distant only two days' days-joumey
travel (something about 65 miles). • , west. ■

On the evening of August 25th a change took place
in the character of our surroundings. The river banks
became low and composed of soft coarse-grained sand-

216

A most iin>
portant river
probably
couuecting
(*re it Slave
Lake with
Chesterfield
Inlet by
navigable
wittera.

Lake Aberdeen
a (treat lake.

Bchnltz Lake

Only two
rapids between
Aberdeen Lake
and the Inlet;
easily navi-
gated even by
canoes.

Camps of
Esqulmaox.

Tents of the
^ery valuable
musk-oz
Bkins.

Baker Lake.

stone The surprising and most delightful feature

of the locality was that upon the shores there was strewn
an abundance of driftwood. f

At first sight its occurrence was unaccountable, but
the mystery was readily solved however by finding that
we liad reached the confluence of mwther large river
flowing in from the west. Much of the driftwood was of
large size, and judging from the slightly battered
condition one would infer that it had come no very great
distance, or at any rate through very few rapids.

Prom the confluence, the course of the river bore
to the north and then to the eastward and ere long
brought us to the entrance of a great lake— Lake Aberdeen
50 miles in length. (Mr. Tyrrell mentions himself
and companions as the first white men who had ever
been on this lake.) On the morning of August 29th we
entered the river leading into Schultz Lake, or a few
miles distant, lat. 64'' 45' .

The river leading from Lake Schultz is wellformed
and deep. Two rapids were met with but they were
not difficult and were easily run. The current was
strong and we sped along at the rate of 8 miles an hour.
The river continued deep and flowing in a south-easterly
direction.

Shortly before the river empties into Baker Lake, we
came upon another Esquimo camp, and about ten miles
further on we came upon another large camp. One of tVie
first objects that attracted my attention was a " topick "
tent (or "wigwam") constructed of no less than the
most beautiful musk-ox robes. At first I foit almost
inclined to doubt my own eyes. It seemed such h waste

of luxury Next my attetition was drawn

to a pile of skins lying on the rocks, which with the
exception of a few white wolf and fox skins consisted of
musk-ox robes. .... We soon found that we
(this Esquimaux camp) were at the mouth of our great
river and we passed into the broad delta and gazed over
the blue limitless waters ... of Baker Lake, aboat
70 miles long and perhaps 30 wide.

217

From Black Lake at the head of Lake Athabasca
to this (Baker) Lake, we had travelled a distance of 810
miles through an entirely unknown country.

From this camp at the head of Baker Lake we were Baker Lake to
to begin a new stage of our journey. According to our chesterfleia
maps we were still about 250 miles from the mouth of ^^e^'^somiieB.
Chesterfield Inlet. The river from Baker Lake to the
" big sea waters " of the Inlet is described by Tyrrell as
being more a, fiord than river and easily navigable.

(The sum of Mr. Tyrrell's journey appears to be that
a river route from Athabasca Lake to Chesterfield Inlet
is impossible, but that the large but unexplored river
entering Aberdeen Lake from the west brings the
navigable waters of Chesterfield Inlet very close to those
of the Great Slave Lake and probably unites them.)

Section 24. The Sub-Arctic Terpitory
of North Canada.

Evidence of Prof. J, B. HURLBERT, M.D., LLD. (1838 Committee).

The barren grounds are to the West of Hudson Bay Prof. Huibett
— from the 60th to 61st parallel to the extremity of the flora and fauns
continent (Arctic Ocean). . . . Sir John Eichardson ° s region,
describes even these barren grounds as covered with a
dense carpet of the comecularis, tristis and many other
plants, a dozen at least, to the shores of the ocean.
There are stumps of trees solitary and grouped, the size
not named, and clumps of living trees on sheltered banks
of rivers. On the sea coast even there is a good growth
of grasses, twelve varieties are named, such as elymus
mollis, campacta and several poae, varieties of our June
grasses and the Kentucky blue grass. Hearne in his
two expeditions, 1769-70, to discover Coppermine Eiver,
records fine weather from the 6th to the 9th November,
and again in December 11th and 12th. He found deer

218

plentiful ; swans, geese and partridges ; killed three
musk oxen. He gives the following list of animals west
of Hudson Bay in the barren grounds : — Foxes plentiful,
of various colours which prey upon rabbits, mice and
partridges ; lynx, polar bear, black and grizzly bear and
wolverine as far north as Coppermine Eiver. Otters
plentiful to latitude 62, north of Churchill. Jackash,
the lesser otter; common marten, ermine or stole,
muskrat, porcupine, hares, numerous to latitude 72,
Heame names rabbits in another place. Squirrel plen-
tiful in wooded parts. Ground squirrels plentiful to
latitude 71, and large as the American grey squirrel.
Mice, frogs and insects in great plenty. In Hudson and
Arctic Sea are walrus or sea horse ; the whole coast of
the Hudson Bay being alive wLn them. Seals more to
the north, sea unicorns in the straits. Black whale,
white whale and salmon numerous, some seasons, and
kepling, shell fish ; birds numerous. Eagles, several
kinds, hawks of various sizes and plumage : owls, white,,
grey and mottled, ravens, American crows. Wood-
peckeis, grouse, buffalo grouse, sharp tailed grouse,
wood partridge, willow partridge, rock partridge, red
breasted thrush, grosbeak, snow bunting, lapland finch,,
larks, titmouse, Hudson Bay black cap, swallows and
martens, whooping crane, brown crane, bitterns, curlews,
to latitude 72, jacksnipes, red godwits, spotted godwits,
sandpipers, plovers, hawk eye, sea pigeons, northern
divers, black throated divers, white, grey and black gulls,
black heads (gulls), pelicans, goosanders, shell ducks,
swans, geese (ten varieties), horned wavies, laughing
geese, eider ducks, dunter goose and ducks of various
kinds.

Vegetables. — Gooseberries, cranberries, heath berries^
currants, red and black, juniper berries, strawberries,
eye berries, blueberries, partridge berries. Mosses,
grasses of several kinds, Trees : pine, juniper, poplar,
creeping birch, willow (dwarf) ; birch plentiful ; pines,
larch and poplar. Birch grow to great size further
westward. Alder. Sir John Biohardsou says stumps

219

of large trees are found and he saw large forests in the J^'nr^^^'
distance, but could not at that late season turn aside to ^™,Jij55Smer!
examine them. The committee can judge from these
statements whether the name " barren ground" is not a
misnomer. It should at least be qualii^cd. I know of
no region of equal extent in any part of the globe simi-
larly situated which is such a land of desolation as that
part of the Dominion has been represented.

Interview by the Correspondent of the " Palt Mall Gazette" with

the Hon. C. H. MACKINTOSH, Lieut.-Qovernor of the

N.W. Territories.

"Pall Mall Gazette," 15th September, 1897.

. , . It is a big subject, the North West Terri- ^J^^^^^g ^^e
tories — a million and a half square miles. But one thing treaBure-houBa

^ , — . of the Empire.

I can say about the country is, that the TexTitories are
an undeveloped treasure-house of the Empire, and when
it has been exploited, well I the rest of the world will •
rub its eyes and wish it had a share in it. . . . Give
us a year — or, perhaps, two — and we will astonish the
dear old mother countiy, and make the nations outside
the Empire green with envy.

An Important Un-Mapped River.

Mr. JAMES ANDERSON'S Evidence. Quoting his Father, the
Explorer, before the 1888 Committee.
The Big Hula Dessi, or Inconnu River, rises near
Great Bear Lake, and flows into the Arctic Ocean, one inguptheFar
branch into Liverpool Bay and the other a little to the meansof water-
Eastward of Esquimaux Bay. Several rivers fall into it. AreSo ocean.*
Where it divides to form the two branches it is as broad the Territory.
as the Mackenzie, at Fort Simpson. The waters are
very clear and deep, and it is navigable from the source
to the mouth. Birch and pine of good size at the forks.
On the banks of the river marten, otter, foxes, bear,
wolves and wolverines abound; also moose, reindeer,
musk oxen, the latter all over the country. Fish abound
in the river and adjacent lakes. . -.

220

The ice is said to break on this river earlier even
than the Mackenzie. Enters the sea about Long. 120° ;
Lat. of its source about 64 or 65. Tar and sulphur
springs abound. Veins of fine white earth at the forks
and along the river. , „ .

Important
notes from the
diary of 6 ~
explore'-.

Extracts from the Explorer Anderson's Diary.

Evidence of Mr. JAMES ANDERSON, speaking chiefly from the

Diary of his Father, who was appointed by the Home Government

in 1855 l> ^0 in search of Sir John Franklin.

This diary mentions gooseberry trees in blossom
and strawberry plants in flower at Great Slave Lake
during the first week in June.

Potatoes, barley and turnips — potatoes as good as
any in Canada — grown at Port Simpson, lat. 62°.

Ice left the Mackenzie Eiver between Fort Good
Hope and Great Slave Lake about the middle of May.

The severity of the climate is not worse than at
St. Petersburg, which is on Lat 60°.

The diary mentions Mr. Anderson, Sen., finding
large pieces of coal on the Mackenzie Eiver, and seeing
plumbago from the Yulion.

The Hudson's Bay Company had cows and oxen at
Fort Simpson.

In winter, there are only two or three hours of day-
light at Fort Simpson, but in summer one can scarcely
tell the difference between night and day.

Produce is grown all along the Churchill Eiver.

Bingnlar fer-
tility ot the
N. W. Terrl-
tories.

Agriculture on the verge of the Barren Grounds.

Evidence of MALCOLM McLEOD, Esq., Q.C, Ex-Judge, to 1888

Senate Committee.

There was plenty of good open ground for cul-
tivation at Norway House, but everyone was so busy at
more urgent work that no one even tried it. At Oxford
House, nearly 160 miles further east, and colder on the
height of land — the summit of the Laurentian Eange —

221

there was a fine garden, growing potatoes abundantly,
and whereof, en passant, I did eat. Here in 1832 forty
head of cattle were kept, and a large gang of men
supplied from the place while making a winter road
between Norway House and York Factory. At York
Factory, on a shore we may call Arctic, I saw nice Uttle
gardens with turnips, radishes and flowers, many and
beautiful. My old friend, Peter "Warren Dease, of Arctio
fame, and whose son-in-law Bell was for many years in
charge of the most northerly Mackenzie Eiver coasts,
used to tell me of his (the old gentleman's) fine and
successful gardening in the far north. He had a taste
in that way, as shown in his ever well trimmed and
highly cultivated grounds. To him, as a perfectly
reliable authority, I owe much if not "most of my very
strong conceptions as to the singular fertility of the
Mackenzie Eiver Valley.

The Chesterfield Inlet Country.

Mr. "Warburton Pike mentions in his work, "The a iari?e but oa-
Barren Grounds of Northern Canada " (p. 204), that ™*^'i'^'
when he arrived at Artillery Lake, on the Lockart Eiver,
he met an Indian named " Pierre the Fool " (one of the
most intelligent Indians in the territory), who gave a
great deal of information about the territory East of
Clinton Golden Lake, and said that three days' travel
East of the Lake there was a large river running in a ^ ^^^^^ ,o„ta
Southerly direction, and once when he had pushed ae'id'inL^t^to'
out further than usual Eastward, he came upon an Lftke'systom!*
Esquimaux camp. The Esquimaux had been cutting up
pine wood for their sleighs. Mr. Pke states that—
" from the fact of his having seen the pine trees, which
are said not to extend far from the salt water of Hudson's
Bay, he must have been within a short distance of the
(Hudson's Bay) Coast."

1 1

223

tbem^nthof
the Mackenzie
and its Terri-
tory to the
White Bea and
the country
about Arch>
angel.

Dr. Dawson's
scheme to
make the
mouth of the
Macl-enzio
serve the N. \V.
Territories as
the Whit J Sea
serves North
Bassia.

Exports and
I'roducts of
RnsHia about
the ^Vhite Bca.

Section 25. important Comparison
with Nortli Russia.

Evidence of G. M. DAWSON, Director of the Geological Survey of
Canada to 1888 Senate Committee.

I have a few notes here worth considering while we
are dealing with the question of this Northern country,
particularly the Yukon. I looked up the circumstances
of the Northern Provinces of Eussia, and I found, taking
the Province of Eussia, which seemed to compare most
nearly with that shown on this map, both its relation in
Eussia to the Atlantic corresponding to the relation of
this Country with the Pacific and its latitude, that is the
Province of Vologda. That Province has a total area of
155,498 square miles, and it is chiefly drained to the
North, like the countrj^ shown here. It lies between
Lat. 68 and 65. It is about 750 miles in greatest
length, and 300 miles greatest v/idth. It is drained by
the Dwina Eiver chiefly. Its products are carried by
this river to Archangel, and exported thence in vessels
by the White Sea, in the same way that we hope this
Northern country of ours may be served by the Mac-
kenzie and the Arctic Sea. The mouth of the Dwina is
iu Lat. 65°, only a little South of tbe latitude of the
mouth of the Mackenzie. The climate of the two
countries is very similar. The winters are severe and the
summers warm. There is no very heavy rainfall, such
as we find near the Western coasts bordering on the
Atlantic and on the Pacific. The exports from that
Province of Vologda are oats, rye, barley, hemp, flax
and pulse. The mineral products are salt, copper, iron
and marble. Horses and cattle are reared, and the
ski 08 of various wild animals, pitch and turpentine are
exported. This Province supports a population of
1,161,000 inhabitants.

Some Particulars of Archangel.

Position of " Archangel is on the White Sea, about Lat. 64° 30"

corresponding corresponding with that of the Klondyke Eiver. The
Klondike. harbouT Is Only free from ice from July to September*

If-

223

yet it is a thriving and rising city, with a population of

about 25,000. The British Consul's Eeport for 1898

states that over 25,000 people are engaged in fishing in

the district, and 4,500 men employed in tlie saw-mills.

This year, 1896 (the Consul states). Archangel will

probably be in telegraphic communication with the

whole of the White Sea country or the Lapland Coast

of Norway, while the railway from Vologda to Arch- Railways of

angel, with a length of 136 miles, will most probablj ba

finished.

In 1895, 172 steam and 151 sailing vessels entered i"f«?8e of

' ° shlppmR in the

Archangel. Of the steamers 127 were British. The ^VluteBea.
Consular Eeport states that the White Sea shipping is
fast developing, the number for 1896 being 418 foreign
and 309 Eussian, exclusive of 1,132 coasters. Imports
are also increasing.

There are 1,946 miles of railways already con-
structed in Finland.

Populous towns in Sub-Arctic Europe and Asia.

"Birmingham Gazette," 3l8t August, 1897.

Although Klondyke is called a desolate region, it
must not be assumed that it is quite as hopeless ad some
of the papers paint it. As a matter of fact, the climate
of the Yulcon Valley is much the same as that of the
Eussian province, in Europe, of Vologva, which has a
population of a million and a-half, and enormous mining
and smelting industries, and also grows a great deal of
rye. There are great towns, like Archangel, Kem, i.argepopnions
Mezen, and Yakutsk, which flourish, although their food further north
and means of transport are no better than those of *" « y •
Dawson City will be a couple of years hence. It is also
a fact apparently unknown in England that the gold-
mines south-west of Lake Baikal, are worked under
conditions similar to those that prevail in Klondyke, but
in a far more severe climate. From these mines the
Czar receives an income of two and a-half millions a

224

year. There is, however, an amazing degree of ignorance
in this country concerning Eussia and the East. For
instance, as late as three years ago one of the leading
papers had never heard of the Trans-Siberian Eailway,
and confounded it with the Trans-Caspian Eailway.

The possibilities of tlie Maclcenzie— Yulcon Country.

"British Review," July 3l8t, 1897.

An example ol
what might be

In the palmy days of the narwhal fishery, the

Mteb^inga Arctic port of " Smeerenburg" on the Spitzbergen coast

whaling station at times contained a floating population of ten thousand

of the souls. Here, rough streets of wooden huts gave the

Mackenzie. ' o o

hardy followers of the right whale indifferent shelter from
the icy blasts, the vilest of spirits to drink, and even the
refined society of a large number of ladies from the pur-
lieus of the Dutch and Scandinavian seaports. In these
matters the whalers were better off than the fur-tradeis
who have held their little out-posts for commerce in the
northern solitudes for three centuries. Starting in the
comparative civilisation of Manitoba and "Winnipeg, the
chain of Hudson Bay Company's forts has extended right
up the Mackenzie Eiver to within a short distance of the
Polar Ocean and that "North- West Passage " which was
not worth discovering. In these isolated block-houses a
few hardy Scotch factors contrived to support existence
even at a time when it took three years and a-half for
goods and letters to reach them from England. But the
fur-traders were not settlers or colonists. They were
simply sentries or vedettes thrown out by the army of
commerce, with instructions to fall back upon the main
body when their work was done. The North to them
was only the hunting ground for pelts, and the land very
much as the sea on which the whalers chased the narwhal
to his death. ,. •

The Ynkor
Gold

discoverieH
may open up
the Arctio
North to great
possibilities. .

But the gold discoveries of the Yukon region, of
which so much has been heard during the last few days,
may open another chapter in the history of the sub-Polar
world. If the deposits are as rich, or only half or a

225

quarter as rich as they are represented to be, there will
speedily be a great population in the neighbourhood of
the Klondike and Dawson City. If that happens, we
shall be in face of an interesting, though it may be a
rather painful, experiment. For the first time almost in
its recorded history, mankind will have tried to hive a
large population of civilised human beings under conditions
so extraordinarily difficult and trying as those to be found
in the glacial regions.

There are, of course, tovms as far north as the new Large towna
camps of the Yukon. Many a cheap tripper from Aber- imlhcr r^rth
deen or Newcastle has been a good deal nearer the Pole,
so far as actual latitude is concerned ; for the Norwegian
towns, Hammerfest, Tromso, and Vardo, are in fact
further north than Klondike. . . .- ,-? ^

(The large city of Archangel on the White Sea is on
the same latitude as Dawson City.)

than Klondike.

Section 23« Hudson's Bay and its

Territory.

Extent and Resources of the Territory,

From the Pamphlet of the Chartsred Hudson's Bay and Paoifio
Railway Company. Prepared by Col. J. HARRIS, F.R.G.S.

■ The country at present under local government N.w.Terri-

"'.^, ." tories under

comprises the Provnice of Manitoba, covermg an area of locai goyern-
64,000 square miles, with Winnipeg as its capital, and
the three territories of Assiniboia, Saskatchewan, and
Alberta, covering an area of 303,000 square miles, with
Eegina as their capital. The whole of this vast region,
extending from about twenty-five miles West from Lake

226

Are* of th«)
Hudson liny
agrtonlturui
territory.

Superior to the Rocky Mountains, a distance of 1,850
tniles, and from the forty-ninth parallel of latitude North,
to the water-shed of the Saskatchewan Eiver, an average
distance of 350 miles, embraces an area of 462,500
square miles, or 269,000,000 acres, two-thirds of which
has been proved to be capable of producing the finest
wheat, and the rest admirably adapted for stock raising
and dairy farming. The whole of this region, including
a great portion of the States of Minnesota and North
Dakota, in t)ie United Slates, is drained by the lakes and
tributary streams of the Nelson River, into Hudson's
Bay, in latitude 53 North. It comprises the richest and
most extensive undeveloped wheat-producing lands in the
world, and access to which, from the United Kingdom,
by ordinary steamers via Hudson's Bay can be reached
within eight days.

Agrlcnltoral
return B

Toine of live-
stock, grain,
and dairy
produce in
Canatla.

Acreagft.

Bushels.

Average yield.

.1,140,276 ...

31,775,038

... 27-8 bushels

. 482,658 ...

22,555,733

... 46-7 ,,

. 153,839 ...

5,645,036

... 36-7 „

. 16,716 ..

4,042,562

...243-5 „

• m-f

28,2-29

. 82,668 ...

1,281,354

• ■"" •••

81,082

.. '■'■-.

Territory

uudor

cultivation.

■i Dominion Government Returns of 1895 give these
figures for the Province of Manitoba : —

Product.

Wheat
Oats
' Barley
Potatoes
Pease
Flax
Rye

During 1892 there was imported into the United
Kingdom from Canada 101,426 heads of cattle, besides a
large number of horses and sheep, and, incluiling grain
and dairy produce, was valued at 10,000,000 sterling.
The shipment of cattle bred on the ranches of Alberta to
Great Britain continues to increase, and the superior
quality of these animals has excited the most favourable
comments of buyers in England, and more than two-
thirds of the total increase in the shipiijent of live stock
took place from the North- West Territories.

" During 1891 there were under cultivation in the
Province of Manitoba, and the three territories of

227

Assiniboia, Saskatchewan, and Alborta, 1,300,000 acres,
•which produced twenty-five million bushels of wheat and
thirty million bushels of barley and oats, whilst the
number of cattle was estimated at about 600,000 head."

:^-y..i^-- '" \*

f^ •; THE HUDSON'S BAY SEA ROUTE. <i

Exports and Cost of Transport.

Tha present cost of transporting wheat to the seaports ' ^^f'ifjp^^^i
fit Montreal, Boston, or New York, from the centre of exportation ;

fiivvlDg by tk

this region is about thirty-five cents per bushel, whilst Hudson Bay
the same charge per mile to Port Churchill would not
exceed fifteen cents, and to the ports further north in , ^

the Bay — Chesterfield Inlet for example — the charge
would be proportionately less, and the saving in the
carriage of live stock, as stated by Admiral Markham, ,
would be fully equal to £3 per Lead.

One of the most important questions of the day is the Exports at
importation of live stock into the United Kingdom. ^trict«d\^
Here is a country capable of raising millions of heads of ^istttnce.
cattle, absolutely free from every kind of disease, owing
to the remarkable healthfulness of the climate ; but the
present export is prohibited, owing to their having to
pass for more than 1,000 miles through the Eastern
portion of Canada to a port of shipment. The opening
of a Hudson's Bay route would remedy all this, and
would enable the cattle to be shipped in prime condition
at half the present cost by way of Montreal.

Hudson Bay.

Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society, October, 1881, on the

Commercial Importance of Hudson's Bay, with Remarke on

Recent Surveys and investigations, by ROBERT BELL, M.D., F.Q.S..

Assistant Direclor of ti>e Geological Survey of Canada.

I beg leave to offer to the Eoyal Geographical Society Dr. BeU'a
a few remarks on the great Mediterranean Sea of North HnSIon « Bay.
America, in regard to which there appears to be a general
want of correct information. Before proceeding to do
80, it may be proper for me to state that I have con-

Q 2

228

Biderable personal knowledge uf Hudson Bay and the
surrounding regions. As an officer of the Geological
Sui'vey of Canada, I have spent six seasons since 1869
in explorations around the bay itself or in its vicinity,
while the remaining summers of this interval have been
devoted mostly to surveying and exploring portions of
the Hudson's Bay territory at greater or less distances

inland In the popular mind, Hudson's

Bay is apt to be associated with the Polar Begions, yet
no part of it comes within the Arctic circle, and the
Southern extremity is Soulh of the latitude of London.

Including its Southern prolongation of James' Bay,
it (Hudson's Bay) measures about 1 ,000 miles in length,
and it is more than 600 miles in width at its Northern
part.

Hadann'a Bay
and Htraita
remarkably
free from
obstmctioni.

The Bay

uniform in
depth and
affording good
anchorages
near shore.

Navigation
of rivers
flowiug into
Hudson's Bay.

Navigation of tlie Bay.

.... Both the bay and straits are remarkably
free from rocks and shoals which might interfere with their
free navigation. The groups of islands near the east side
of the bay ai-e surrounded by deep water, and a wide
channel leads up the centre of James's Bay. Fortunately
the main body of the bay, which is the portion likely to
be hereafter frequented by shipping, is entirely without
shoals, reefs, or islands. The depth is very uniform over
most of the bay, and nowhere does it present any great
irregularities. It averages about 70 fathoms throughout,
deepening to 100 and upwards in approaching the outlet
of Hudson's Strait ; while in the strait itself the sound-
ings along the centre vary from, about 150 to upwards of
300 fathoms. The bottom appears to consist almost
everywhere of boulder clay and mud. Near the shores
a stifif clay, affording good holding ground for anchors,,
is almost invariably met with on both sides.

Few of the rivers of Hudson's Bay afford uninter-
rupted navigation for large vessels to any great distance
from the coast. During the season of high water,
shallow-draft steamers might ascend the Moose river
and two of its branches for upwards of 100 miles. Hayes

229

river and two of its branches might apparently be
navigated by such craft in the spring to points about 140
miles inland, and the Albany for nearly 250 miles ; while
large steamers might ascend the Nelson for seventy or
eighty miles from the open sea. The Churchill, which
is the second largest river of Hudson's Bay, is a beautiful
clear-water stream, somewhat larger than the Ehine. It
is remarkable for having at its mouth a splendid harbour
with deep water and every natural convenience for the
purposes of modem commerce. {See part Y, section 10,
for further references to these rivers, and to the Chesterfield
Inlet.)

Resources of the Hudson's Bay Territory.

!3<

■son

The resources of Hudson's Bay and the country Theteionrc«*
immediately around it are varied and numerous, although ftayandTlrri.
as yet few of them ure at all developed. The fur trade n*im(w!MS?
is the principal and best known business which has
hitherto been carried on in these regions, but a large
amount of oil, derived from the larger whales, the
porpoises, walruses, white bears, and the various species
of seals which frequent the northern parts of the bay,
has been carried to New England, and small quantities,
principally of porpoise and seal oil, have from time to
time been brought to London by the Hudson's Bay
Company. The other exports from the bay have been as Bcrfdes ofl and
yet but trifling. They embrace whalebone, feathersi ^^^^^^
quills, castorum, lead ore, sawn lumber, ivory, tallow, fe»therB,^oU^
isinglass, and skins of seals and porpoises. The fisheries ore, sa^n
proper, speaking of Hudson's Bay, have not yet been taiiow,i'«ingiM«
investigated. Both the Indians and Eskimo find a besides sioted
variety of fish for their own use, and fine salmon abound
in the rivers of Hudson's Strait ; and from one or two of
them a considerable number of barrels, in a salted condi*
tion, are exported every year. Waterfowl are very
numerous on both sides of the bay, and larger game on
the " barren grounds " in the northern parts, so that the
natives, with prudence, may always have a plentiful ^^ ^

aupply of food.

230

The most im-
portant) of the
■iKleveloped
resonrcea are
itfl Hoil, timber
•nil mineralB.

No obataoles
to the con-
striirtion of <\
rsQway.

But perhaps the most important of the undeveloped
resources of the country around the bay are its soil»
timber, and minerals. To the south and west of James's
Bay, in the latitude of Devonshire and Cornwall, there is
a large tract, in which much of the land is good and the
olimate sufficiently favourable for the successful prosecu*
tion of stock and dairy farming. A strip of country
along the east side of James's Bay may also prove avail-
able for these purposes. To the south-west of the wide
pare of the bay the country is well wooded, and although
little or no rock comes to the surface over an immense
area, still neither the soil nor the climate is suitable for
carrying on agriculture as a principal occupation until
we have passed over more than half the distance to Lake
Winnipeg. This region, however, offers no engineering
difficulties to the construction of a railway from the sea-
coast to the better country beyond, and this, at present,
is the most important point in reference to it. Some of
the timber found in the country which sends its waters
into James's Bay may prove to be of value for export.
Among the kinds which it produces may be mentioned
white, red, and pitch pine, black and white spruce,
balsam, larch, white cedar, and white birch. Tha
numerous rivers converging towards the head of James's
Bay offer facUities of "driving" timber to points at
which it may be shipped by sea-going vessels.

Minerals In the Hudson's Bay Territory.

Mineral to be Minerals may, however, become in the future the

reKmrce8*ofthe greatest of the resources of Hudson's Bay. Little direct

Bay in future, ggg^j-^jj j^g^g as yet been made for the valuable minerals of

these regions. I have, however, found a large deposit of

rich ironstone on the Mottagami river, inexhaustible

supplies of good manganiferous iron ore on the islands

near the Eastmain coast, and promising quantities of

galena around Eichmond Gulf and also near Little "Whale

Eiver, where a small amount had previously been known

to exist. I have likewise noted traces of gold, silver,

UrtSuSSeraia. molybdenum, and copper. Lignite is met with on the

2B1

Missinabe, gjrpsum on the Moose, vni petroleum-bearing
limestone ou the Abittibi river. Small quantities of
anthracite, and various ornamental stones, and rare
minerals, have been met with in the course of my
explorations. Soapstone is abundant not far from
Mosquito Bay, on the east side, and iron pyrites between
Churchill and Marble Island, on the west. Good
building stones, clays, and limestones exist on both
sides of the bay. A cargo of mica is said to have been
taken from Chesterfield Inlet to New York, and valuable
deposits of plumbago are reported to occur on the north
side of Hudson's Strait. Some capitalists have applied
to the Canadian Government for mining rights in the
latter region.

The New Importance of Hudson's Bay«

Situated in the heart of North America, and possess-
ing a seaport in the very centre of the continent, 1,600 ko°v b^Kius to
miles nearer than Quebec to the fertile lands of the Fntornst"'?*. .
North-West Territories, Hudson's Bay now begins to waybeuveen '
possess a new interest, not only to the Canadians, but No^rth^vvLt
also to the people of Great Britain, from the fact that "■"** E«opo
the future highway between the great North-West of the
Dominion and Europe may pass through it. The possi-
bility of this route being adopted for trade is not a new
idea, and it has frequently been suggested by far-seeing
men in past years, and occasionally referred to in the '

newspapers. (The discovery of the extensive and enor-
mously rich Goldfields in the Yukon basin adds a new
and important interest to Hudson Bay as providing an
almost direct route from England to the far North-west.
E. J. D.)

Sir J. H. Lefroy, t*resident of the Geographical ••TheArchangei
Section of the British Association, in the able address
which he delivered at the Swansea meeting (1880), said :
" Hudson Bay itself cannot fail at no distant day to
challenge more attention. York Factory, which is
nearer Liverpool than New York, has been happily called
by Professor H. Y. Hind the Archangel of the West."

of the West.'

232

The Cnnadlan
Noith-W.^ht
cKpKble of
bocouiln,-; ilio
KreatHHt wheat-
flcld In tho
woild.

The city of
Wlunlpcs 800
luileB uem ei'
Llyorpool vli\,
Hudson's Day
than by the
St. Lawrence.

Agricultural Possibilities.

It has been shown that tho Canadian North- West
Territories, embracing hundreds of millions of acres of
line land, are capable of becoming the greatest wheatfield
in tho world. Tho centre of this immense agricultural
region lies to the north of the Saskatchov.an. If wo
look at the map of the northern hemisphere we shall seo
at a glance that the shortest route between these
territories and England is through Hudson's Bay. Mr.
Lindsay Eussell, the Surveyor- General of Canada, 1 aS
recently made a close calculation of relative distances,
and found that even the city of Winnipeg, which is near
the south-eastern extremity of these territories, is at
least 800 miles nearer to Liverpool by the Hudson's Bay
route than by the St. Lawrence, while the difference in
favour of the former will be increased continually as w©
advance northward into the interior.

A groat and
important
Favinr; to be
effected by a
UudBou Bay
route.

A Hadson Bay
route to open
up the fanning
Uuids of the
N.W.Twrl-
torles.

Advantage In Distance of the Hudson's Bay Route.

The route from the North - West Territories to
England, via Hudson's Bay, saves the whole distance
between Winnipeg and Montreal. The distance to
Liverpool by way of New York is still greater. The
advantages of this short route over all others are so
numerous that only a few of them can be referred to in
this short paper. The great saving in distance represents
an important economy in time and money, or in freight
and passenger rates. If the grain, cattle, and other pro-
ductions of the North- West Territories could reach an
European market, only through Ontario and Quebec, or
by way of New York, a large proportion of their value
would necessarily be consumed by the long land carriage ;
whereas, if they find an outlet at Churchill, there will be
an average saving of 1,291 miles as compared with
Montreal, and of upwards of 1,700 miles as compared
with New York, and this without any increase in the
length of the sea voyage. In effect, this will place a
great part of the farming lands of our North -West
Territories in as good a position in regard to a seaport as

233

arc those of Ontario, west of Toronto ; and consequently . j

will greatly increase the value of every description of

faim produce, and, therefore, of the farms themselves.

Some kinds, which could not he sent out of the country

at all by the longer land route, maybe profitably exported

by the shorter one. For the transportation of both grain

and fresh meat, as Colonel Dennis has pointed out, the

northern route, besides the shortening of the distance,

would have great advantages over all those to the south,

owing to its cooler and more uniform temperature.

Heavy or bulky goods of all kinds would, of course, be

imported into the North-West by the shortest land route.

In regard to the export and import of live stock, this

independent route will possess a great importance to

these terrirtories. Hitherto, cattle, horses, hogs, and

sheep have there enjoyed an immunity from almost all Freedom from

forms of contagious diseases, and, owing to the healthy alnonR^at

nature of the climate for these animals, it is hoped this ?" w^Terei^*

state of things will continue. The domestic animals in fmpOTiantad-

the United States and the older Canadian provinces being expo?f trod^*

occasionally afflicted with contagious diseases, it becomes

necessary for European countries to impose restrictions

on their importation. In the event of an epidemic of

this nature existing in some part of these regions, but

not in the North- West Teri*itories, there need be no

objection to exporting live stock from the latter by way

of Hudson's Bay.

A Passenger Route of National Importance.

As a route for emigrants from Europe, that by An au-BritUh
Hudson's Bay possesses not only the advantage of the route,
short land journey, but the still more important one to
us, of entirely avoiding the United States and the
populous parts of Canada, in both of which, it is well
known, a very serious percentage of the immigrants
destined for our North-West lands are every year enticed
away to settle in the great republic. An inlet by
Hudson's Bay is the only thoroughly independent
iihannel which can ever be established between the

234

British Islands and our great and valuable territories in
the interior of North America ; and it is very desirable^
on national grounds, that it should be opened up.

The idea of ice
destmctiTe to
the naTigation
of Hudson's
Bay destined
to prove
ohimerioai.

Hudson's Bay
oiien all the
year.

The advantage
of « Hadson
Bay sea-port
over the St.
Lawrence.

No Obstructions to Navigation.

An impression has long prevailed that Hudson's
Bay and Strait could not be navigated for the ordinary
purposes of commerce on account of ice, but this idea is
probably destined to prove chimerical. The occasion for
testing the point has not hitherto arisen, and the fact
that these waters have been successfully navigated by
ordinary sailing vessels for 200 years, in order to secure
"what little trade the country afforded, indicates what
may be expected from properly equipped steamships, so
soon as the larger business of the future may require their
services in this direction. The conditions of the sea-borne
commerce of the North West, in relation to Hudson's
Bay, will probably turn out to be similar to those of the
rest of Canada with reference to the Gulf of St. Lawrence.
In both cases, everything must be done during the
«ummer. Yet Hudson's Bay is, of course, open all the
year round. No one would be likely to suppose that a
sea of such extent, in the latitude of the British Islands,
would ever freeze across. The Lower St. Lawrence is
also partly open even in the middle of winter. But the
difficulty in both cases is the impossibility of getting into
harbours. A harbour such as that of Churchill on
Hudson's Bay would have the advantage over Quebec or
Montreal of communicating directly with the open sea,
and hence in the autumn vessels would not be liable
to be frozen in, as occasionally happens in the
St. Lawrence.

Hndaen's Bay
ports open to
Bavigation
from middle of
Jane to end of
October every
year.

Period of Open Navigation in tlie Bay and Rivers.

There has been some discussion as to the length of
time during which Hudson's Strait and Bay might be
navigated each year, but there does not seem to be much
evidence that the strait, any more than the bay, is closed

235

at any season. Its great width, depth, and strength of
the tides probably keep it open all winter. My own
experience and that of many others lead me to believe
that the climate generally of Hudson's Bay is much
bc-ter than some writers have represented it to be. From
all that I could learn or observe, it appears that the
strait and bay may be navigated and the land approached
by steamers during an average of four and a half montha
each year, or from the middle of June to the end of
October. The strait and bay could probably be navigated
by steam vessels earlier than the middle of June, but
nothing would be gained, except perhaps by whalers, in
going in before an open harbour can be reached.

I have a record of the principal phenomena of the Over so years*

■^ 1 fii T records el the

seasons at Martm s Falls, on the Albany, extending open na^i^"*-
through a period of fifty years, and from it I find that some of the
the river is open there on an average for six months of Rivers,
the year. I have also a record of dates of the opening
and closing of Hayes Eiver at York Factory, extending
over more than fifty years, from which it appears to
enjoy an average of fully six months of open water. The
Nelson Eiver is open for a longer period. I think, with
these facts before us, we need not despair of successfully
navigating Hudson's Bay, as far as the length of the
season is concerned. Even were the time of open
navigation shorter than it is known to be, the very great
benefits which the North- West and Canada generally
would derive from possessing an outlet in that direction
are sufiicient to make it well worth an effort to open it.

Economic Advantages of this Route to Europe.

The freedom of Hudson's Strait and Bay from rocks, Navigation of

. . , .,, HucIhou'b Bay

shoals, and other impediments to navigation will exempt exempt from
vessels in that quarter of the globe from the heavy houses aud
expenses for pilots, lighthouses, &c., which burden
shipping by the St. Lawrence, aud are even more onerous
in some other parts of the world. The delays from
drifting ice in the strait, which have occasionally
occurred to sailing vessels, would not be experienced by
steamships.

236

The Increase in
land TalneB in
the N.W. Terrl.
tories by the
shorter route
to Europe for

£roclacts Tla
[adson'a Bay.

We have seen that in proportion as we decrease the
cost of transportation to a foreign market, we increase
the home value of all kinds of farm produce, and conse-
quently of the farm itself. Now, considering the vast
extent of fine land to be affected by the opening of the
route above referred to, if the value of each acre of it
were enhanced in this way by only a few shillings, the
aggregate increase would amount to more than a hundred
million of dollars. Such a gain as this, together with
the various other great advantages which, as we have
seen, may be derived from the opening of this new ocean
route, will, I think, sufficiently illustrate the commercial
importance of Hudson's Bay. --

HndBon's Bay
Co. have been
naTigating the
Bay for 147
years.

A marrelloas
record I

Record off Wrecks In Hudson's Bay;
Only One in 374 Years.

Dr. Eobert Bell obtained fiom the Company's offices,
in London, a record, which, printed in his report, shows
the date of arriving and sailing of their vessels at York
Factory for 93 years, and at Moose Fort for 147 years.
These lists show that in some years several vessels were
sent in charge of British men-of-war, and there have
been almost every year during the past two centuries
ships of various classes and sizes, navigating the strait
without loss, and it seems almost incredible that such a
number of voyages could be made, extending over 874
years, without the loss of over one, or, as is claimed by
some writers, two small sailing vessels.

■ Important Evidence of the Bay's Navigation.

Extracts from the Hudson Bay Committee's Report of 1884. "

No evidence has been given that goes to prove that
Hudson's Strait and Bay proper ever freeze over, or that
the ice met with in those waters is sufficient to prevent
navigation at any time of the year.

That, consequently, the period of navigation is
defined by the time dmring which the ports, harbours, or
roadsteads on the shores of the bay can be entered by
vessels of a suitable description for such navigation.

237

That, from the evidence adduced, it appears that hMbounfof"*

such ports or harbours are open, on an average, from ^en*2f°'^^^

four and a half to five months in each year to ordinary 6 months every
, •' •' year.

vessels.

That Hudson's Bay and Strait appear, from all
evidence taken, to be singularly free from obstruction to
navigation in the shape of shoals or reefs ; and, during
the period of open water, from utorms or fogs.

Section 27« Dangers of the Chilkat,
Taiya Chi!koot, and White Passes.

W. OGILVIE, 1896.

It is said by those familiar with the locality that the Terrific atorms
storms, which rage in the upper altitudes of the coast J^j^n^o^lheBe
range during the greater part ox the time, from October Pm««».
to March are terrific. A man caught in one of them
runs the risk of losing his life, unless he can reach shelter
in a short time. During the summer there is nearly
always a wind blowing from the sea up Chatham Strait
and Lynn Canal, which lie in almost a straight line with
each other, and at the head of Lynn Canal are Chilkat
and Chilkoot inlets. The distance from the coast down
these channels to the open sea is about 380 mUes. The
mountains on each side of the water confine the currents
of air, and deflect inclined currents in the direction of the
axis of the channel, so that there is nearly always a
strong wind blowing up the channel. Coming from the
sea, this wind is heavily charged with moisture which
is precipitated when the air current strikes the mountains
-and the fall of rain and snow is consequently very heavy.

238

In chittat Inlet Jq Chilkat Inlet there is not much shelter from the

there is IHtle

^iteri south wind, which renders it unsafe for ships calling

there. Captain Hunter told me that he would rather
visit any other part of the coast than Chilkat.

17"

««,]

In the summer months there is nearly always a wind
blowing in from the coast; it blows down the lakes
(Lindeman, Bennett, etc.,) and produces quite a heavy
swell.

The Chllkoot
Pass

condemned
by Mr. de
Windt, the
explorer.

Mr. de Windt's
opinion o{ the
Takn route is
not shared by
Mr. Ogilvie-
8ee Section 9,
PartW.

Extracts from Mr. H. de WINDT'S Letter in the "Times" of

28rd July, 1897.

•' The Ohilkoot Pass is difficult, even dangerous, to
those not possessed of steady nerves. Towards the
summit there is a sheer ascent of 1,000 feet, where a
slip would certainly be fatal. At this point a dense mist
Overtook us, but we reached Lake Lindemann — the first
of a series of five lakes —in safety after a fatiguing tramp
of fourteen consecutive hours through half-melted snow.
Here we had to build our own boat, first felling the
timber for the purpose. The journey down the lakes
occupied ten days, four of which were passed in camp
on Lake Bennett during a voilent storm which raised a
heavy sea. The rapids followed. One of these latter,
* The Grand Caiion,' is a mile long, and dashes through
walls of rock from 50 feet to 100 feet high ; six miles
below are the * White Horse Eapids,' a name which
many fatal accidents have converted into the ' Miner's
Grave.' But snags and rocks are everywhere a fruitful
source of danger on this river, and from this rapid,
downward, scarcely a day passed that one did not see
some cairn or wooden cross marking the last rest resting-
place of some drowned pilgrim to the land of gold. . ,

" There is, however, a brighter side to this gloomy
picture, for there are fortunately other approaches to
the Yukon Valley besides the dreaded Chilkoot. The
chain of mountains of which the latter forms a part is
cut by three other passes — The Taku, the Chilkat, and

239

the White Pass. Of these the two former ziiay bo dis-
missed as being, on account of their length and other
difficulties, almost as impracticable as the Chilkoot, over
which it would be quite impossible to lay a bridle path ;
but the White Pass offers no serious obstacles to the
construction of a railway. The White Pass is at least
1,000 feet lower than the Chilkoot, and, unlike the
latter, is timbered the entira length. The salt water
terminus of this pass is in Skayway Bay, 85 miles from
Juneau. Here ocean steamers can run up at all times
to a wharf w iich has been constructed in a sheltered
position, and there is an excellent town site with pro-
tection from storms. The pass lies through a box canon
surrounded by high granite peaks and is comparatively
easy. It has already been used by miners who report
very favourably upon the trail, and when it is con-
sidered that the adoption of this route obviates the
dangers and expenses of the Chilkoot, avoids Lakes
Lindemann and Bennett (the stormiest and most
perilous of the whole chain), shortens and greatly
diminishes the expense of the journey to the Yukon
Valley, and, above all, can be used throughout the year
(the interior of Alaska is now completely cut off from Mr.aeWindt

^ , r J prefers the

the world for nine months in the year), there can be ^^■hite I'ass.
little reasonable doubt that the White Pass is the best
and most practicable route to the Yukon goldfields."

Interview with Mr. HARRY DE WINDT, "Strand Magazine,"

October, 1897.

" The tramp from Dyea to Sheep Camp, at the foot
of the pass, can be avoided by riding, but the trail is
terribly rough. At Sheep Camp we stopped four days,
the Indians having struck for higher wages, which we
were compelled to give them. Here we passed three parties
of miners who were returning to Juneau, having failed
through lack of provisions to reach the Lakes. A stiff
climb of two hours from Sheep Camp brought us to
Stone House, the limit of the tree line ; and from here
the hard work commenced in grim earnest. For the first

; 240

few hours, the way lay over a succession of snowy
' plateaus,' which, broken away beneath by numberlesa
water-courses, formed a kind of crust 15 feet to 20 feet
above the ground. The travelling here was extremely
dangerous. There was absolutely no path or trail to
guide one ; and huge crevasses, where the snow had
faUen in upon some roaring torrent, appeared here and
there. There are seven or eight of these ' plateaus,'
which increased in steepness until, midway up the last
one, we were scrambling painfully up the slippery ice-
slope on our hands and knees. Here a dense mist
overtook us, and we lay shivering (at a very uncom-
fortable angle) for three hours, until it cleared away and
disclosed the rocky precipitous peak of the Chilkoot
towering another thousand feei above us. The cold waft
intense, and we were not sorry to resume our journey.-
The last part of the ascent was terribly hard — in places \,
literally perpendicular. There is no path of any kind,
nor would it be possible to make one, for the rocks are
loose and insecure, and the passage of a man will often
dislodge a huge boulder, and send it crashing down, to
the deadly peril of those below. The ascent of the
peak occupied nearly three hours. There were two or
three places where a slip must have meant certain death,
notably one about thirty yards from thd summit, which
we reached at about 5 a.m.

♦* I have roughed it," said the explorer to me, "for
the past fifteen years in Siberia, in Borneo, and in
Chinese Tartary, but I can safely describe that climb
over the Chilcoot as the severest physical experience of
my life. A blinding snowstorm barred our way for
nearly an hour, and we then descended a steep ice-slope
of about 600 feet, which brought us to Crater Lake.
From here, at 7 a.m., began an exhausting tramp
through deep snow-drifts, gradually thawing to half-
frozen slush, knee-deep, as we gained the lower ground.
A rocky ridge of hills and three small streams were then
crossed. One of the latter, swollen by recent rains,
carried one of our pm-ty off his feet, but he. ^as, with

2-il

some difficulty, escued. From 10 a.m. till midday,
heavy and incessant rain fell, but by 2 p.m, we stood
dead-beat, bleeding and exhausted (but safe), on the
shores of Lake Lindemann, the journey having occupied
nearly fifteen hours. Then we had to wait ten hours
longer, drenched with rain and perspiration, and sick
with hunger, until the Indians came up with provisions."

The head of Lake Lindemann, the first of a chain
of five lakes, is about nine miles from the summit of the
pass. If you think that, having regard to what you
have already endured, all will now be plain sailing, you
are greviously mistaken. You must build a boat here,
capable of carrying yourself aud your stores hundreds of
miles across lakes and through rapids. It doesn't matter
if you know nothing of boat-building; you must build
some sort of boat or raft, or else turn back ever the
awful Chilcoot. "Where is the wood?" you ask, in
dismay. You have to fell the trees for it — aye, and
travel miles to find a tree, so disafforested has this spot
been by hundreds of eager gold-seekers. In your bag-
gage should be not merely the tools for tree-felling and
plank-sawing, but even the very pitch which is to caulk
the seams of your cra?:y craft.

Leaving the Lakes on June 26th, we entered tho
"Lewes Eiver, and next day reached the Grand Canon
Eapid, which is nearly a mile long, and dashes through
perpendicular walls of rock from 50 feet to 100 feet high.
The fall is 100 feet wide, and so swift, that the stream is
4 feet higher in the centre than at the sides I

" Next we dashed down a perfect mill-race for six
miles to the White Horse Eapids — a place so fatal as to
have received the name of the ' Miner's Grave.' Not a
day passed that we did pot see a cairn, or a rude wooden
cross, marking the last resting-place of some drowned
pilgrim to the land of gold. At Fort Selkirk, the Lewes
Biver down which we journeyed from the Lakes unites
■with the Pelly, and the two together form the giant
Yukon, which iias a course of 2,014 miles.

i»

242

" On the twenty-fifth day out from Juneau we
reached Forty Mile City."

Section 2il8« General.

Extract from the Summary of the Committee appointed to enquira
into the resources for the Great Mackenzie Basin.

Idttle more
Imown of this
territory than
of Central Aus-
tralia and
Africa.

Your Committee (of the Senate of the Dominion),
desiring to refer briefly to the evidence upon which they
have based these conclusions, may explain that very
early in their investigations they became convinced that
very little more was known of the Northern and
Eastern portion of area committed to them for investi-
gation than was known of the interior of Africa and
Austiralia.

A Yukon Outfit.

Feom Luqbin's Publication issued fkom the Offiqb
OF THE Agent-Genbeal fou. B.C., London.

8 Sacks Mouz
l^'O ibs. Bacon
15Q lbs. Split Peas
100 lbs. Beans

25 lbs. Evaporated Apples

25 lbs. Evaporated Feachea

25 lbs. Apricots

25 lbs. Butter
109 lbs. Granulated Sugar

1^ dcz. Condensed Milk

■» ■'■ lbs. Ooffea

.-J lbs. Tea

1 lb. Pepper
10 lbs. Salt

S-lbs. Baking Powder
40 lbs. Boiled Oats or Oatmeal

2 doz. Yeast Cakes

^ doz. i oz. Beef Extract

5 bars Castile Soap

6 bars Tar Soap
1 tin Maiiohes

1 gal. Vinegar
1 box Candles
25 lbs. Evaporated Potatoes

343

25 lbs. Rice

25 Canvas Sacks <

1 Wash Basin

1 Medicine Chest

1 Eubber Sheet

1 set Pack Straps

1 Pick

1 Handle

1 Drift Pioi

1 Handle

1 Shovel

1 Gold Pan

1 Axe

1 Whip Saw

1 Hand Saw

1 Jack Plane

1 Brace

4 Bits, assorted, 3/16 to 1 in.

1 8-in. Mill File

1 6-in. Mill Pile

1 Broad Hatchet

1 2-qt. Galv'd CoSee Pol

1 Fry Pan

1 Package Pivets

1 Draw Knife

3 CoY'dPails,4,6, 8-qt. Granite

1 Pie Plate - , •.„,.

1 Knife and Fork

1 Granite Cup

1 each Tea and Table Spoon

1 14-in. Granite Spoon

1 Tape Measure

1 !J-in. Chisel
10 lbs. Oftkum
10 lbs. Pitch

5 lbs. 20d. Nails . --.^\

5 lbs. lOd. Nails

6 lbs. 6d. Nails
300 feet |-in. Rope

1 Single Block

1 Solder Outfit

1 Pair Rowlocks

1 14-qt. Galvanized Pail

1 Granite Saucepan

3 lbs. Candle Wick

1 Compass

1 Candle Stick

6 Towels

1 Axe Handle

1 Axe Stone

1 Emery Stone

1 Sheet-Iron Stov«

Some of the foregoing articles are omitted by some
miners, but the Dealers of Victoria or Vancouver may be
safely trusted to advise iniending travellers in the matter
of ouifits in all cases.

Joe Ladue's food outfit for 12 months.

Mr. Joe Ladue (the pioneer and founder of Dawson
City) states in McClure's Magazine for September,
1897:—

"A year's supply of 'grub,' which can be bought SSS?°2"
as cheaply in Juneau as anywhere, I think, is : 100 sacks aSywhex^"
ct flour, 15Qlbs. sugar, 100 lbs. bacon, 30 lbs. coffes,

R 2

244

10 lbs. tea, 100 lbs. beans, 50 lbs. oatmeal, 100 lbs. mixed
froitB, 25 lbs. salt, about 10 dollars worth of spicea and
kniok-knaoks, and some quinine to break up oolds.

" The total cost of this outfit is about 200 dollars,

No man sboold
IP to the

leaslhan^ioo but no man should start with lebs than 500 dollars, and
Si.ooo.'^'*" ** * twice that is ten times as good."

■i- ti.T ..■■••■

Klondike Market Prices, July, 1897.

gammer prices
on the
Elondyke
daring the
sammexof
1697.

Here is a list of pnces w
just now : —

Elour, per 100 lb.

bich obtam at iil<
£2 10s. to £24

Beef, per lb. ...

4s. to 8s,

Bacon, per lb.

3s. 3d.

Moose Hams, each

£6.

Moose Hams, per lb.

88.

-i

Bice, per lb. ...

«•

38.

Tea, per lb.

12s.

Coffee, per lb. ...

• •<

9s.

Butter, per lb.

• •«

lOs.

" ' Eggs, per lb. ...

• •«

128.

Potatoes, per lb.

lOs.

Tobacco, per lb.

• • <

8s.

Canned fruit, per can

9s.

Coal oil, per gallon

10s.

.) ■

Lemons, each

• *«

Is-

Oranges, each

• 14

28.

Liquors, per drink

• •1

• 2s.

Miners' picks, each

• • «

£18s.

Shovels, each

£3 8s. to £3 12s.

Shoes, per pair

£1 to £1 12s.

Eubber boots, per pair

£2 8

s. to £3 12s.

246

Another Table of Prices.

Here is another table which shows what it will cost costof ontat.
to reach tlie cold fields from New York : — expensoB.

" time and

Fare from New York to Seattle via Northern Pacific, frSmThe"" ***'••

n%ci a- United StetM

tit) D3. to the

, Klondylw.

Fee for Pullman sleeper, £4 2p..

Feo for tourist sleeper, run only west of St. Paul, £1.

Meals served in dining oar for entire trip, £3 4s.

Meals are served at stations along the route a
la carte.

Distance from New York to Seattle, 3,290 miles.

Days required to make the journey, about six. .

Fare for steamer from Seattle to Juneau, including
cabin and meals, £7

Days, Seattle to Juneau, about five.

Number of miles from Seattle to Juneau, 725.

Cost of living in Juneau, abont 128. per day.

Distance up Lynn Canal to Healey's Store, steam-
boat, 76 miles.

Number of days New York to Healey's Store, 12.

Cost of complete outfit for overland journey, about
£30.

Cost of provisions for one year, about £40.

Cost of dogs, sledge, and outfit, about £30.

Stcamor leaves Seattle once a week.

Best time ^j s^. -rt is early in the spring.

Total cost of trip, New York to BLlondyke, about
£133 2s.

Number of days required for journey. New York to
Klondyke, 36 to 40.

Totnl distance, via Juneau, to the mines at ElondykOf
4,650 miles.

246

An old
plonMt'aontflt

mliiw's oatfll

"" " A Light Weight Outfit.
From "The Review of Reviews," 15th September, 1897.

Joaquin Mi'ler, who may be regarded as an expert
oapable of reduoiug his impedimenta to an irreducible
minimum, carried with him the following kit : —

"I have twenty pounds of bacon, twelve pounds of
hard tack, half pound of tea. I have a heavy pair of
blankets, the heaviest ; socks, underclothing, boots, a
rubber blanket, a macintosh, a pound of assorted nails,
one hundred feet of small rope, a sail and an axe. My
pack is forty pounds all told. T have a pocket-knife and
an iron cup, a thermometer and about 100 dollars.

"I hope to build a raft, carry my otwn pack over all
the places, and travel hastily on ahead and alone. You
see, I have spent years alone in the mountains, and have
been in almost all the < stampedes ' for the last forty
years, and know what I am about."

If that be the minimum equipment for a forced
march, here is what may be regarded as adequate
provision for a well-to-do miner for twelve months in
Elondyke. It is an interesting table of the needs of the
civilised human when encamped on the run of the Arctic
Circle. The total cost of the outfit only comes to £44 : —

A twelve months' Outfit.

Fbovisions. — 75 pounds granulated sugar, 1 dozen
packages of beef extract, 10 pounds evaporated onions,
50 pounds evaporated potatoes, 50 pounds evaporated
peaches, 10 pounds evaporated currants, 25 pounds salt,
25 pounds rolled oats, 50 pounds commeal, 200 pounds
breakfast bacon, 50 pounds rice, 1 pound cayenne pepper,
1 pound black pepper, 1 case condensed milk, 10 sacks
flour, 1 bottle vinegar, 15 pounds dried beef, 1 case
baking powder, 1 pound mustard, 1 box candles, 1 can
matches, 20 bars soap, crackers, Castile soap, 1 dozen
small cheeses, 25 pounds spaghetti, 15 pounds coffee, 3
pounds tea, 100 pounds beans, 25 poimds of pitted plums.
Total cost of provisions at Seattle, £21,

247

Clothing. — Thrco suits underwear, one undershirt,
one Yukon blanket, one summer blanket, one dozen
pairs socks, two pairs mittens, one cap, one bag, two
overshirts, one jumper, one pair gum boot socks, two
pairs rubber boots, two pairs leather shoes, hobnailed.
Total £15 6s. 4d.

Tools and Cooking Utensils. — 40 pounds wire
nails, 5 pounds pitch (for caulking boat), 1 whip saw, 1
caulking chisel, 2 pounds tallow (for caulking boat),
2 wedges, 1 handsaw, 250 feet |-inch manilla ropej
1 compass, 1 knife and sheath, 1 pack strap, 1 brace, 1
shovel, 1 pick and handle, 3 buckets, 1 cofifeo-pot, hooka
and lines, 1 stove, 1 piece sheet-iron, 1 revolver, belt and
cartridges, 1 gold pan. Total £Q 6s.

Besides these supplies each traveller has a case of
medicine that costs 38s.

To get to Klondyke with supplies for a year it is
estimated the miner should have a capital of from
£200 to £250.

Fares and Time, Uverpool to the Klondyke.

Time. — Liverpool to Montreal, about 10 days, Mon-
treal to Victoria, 5 days.

Fares. — Liverpool to Victoria (steam and rail),
1st, £24 12s. 7d. ; 2nd, £17 18s. 9d. ; 3rd, £15 18s. 9d.

The Canadian Pacific Navigation Company, book
passengers from Victoria (B.C.) right through to the
gold-fields, via St. Michael's, for £30 16s. 6d. Total
cost, cheapest fare from Liverpool to Dawson City,
£46 15s. 3d.

Next year, 1898, fares from Victoria to the gold-
fields will probably bo much cheaper.

The time from Victoria (B.C.) to the Yukon varies
according to circumstances, 2 to 6 weeks. If by
St. Michael's and the Yukon, according to delays at portq
and on the river, and obstructions on the latter ; if over*
land and by the Lewes River, according to luok and the
individual. {See Sections 10, 18 and 27.)

248

How to obtaiu
a clear title to
a claim on the
Kloudyke.

How a Miner "peg's out" on the Yukon.

Mr. Joe Ladue states in McClure's Magazine iot
September, 1897 : —

This is how a miner is enabled to " read his title
clear ' ' to the patch of auriferous soil which he wishes to
claim : —

Claims have to be ■'taked out, of course, according
to the Canadian laws, which I think are clear and fair.
The only fault I find with them is that they recognise no
agreements that are not in writing. . . .AH you have
to do is to find gold, to which you must swear, then mark
off about five hundred feet along the bed of the creek
where no one has laid a claim, and stick up your stakes
with your n;.rae on them, one at each corner of your
land. Across the ends you blaze the trees. This done,
you go to the registrar of claims, pay fifteen dollars, and,
after a while, the surveyor will come along and make it
exact.

Dyea and
Bkagway,
British or
American ?

Anglo-BtiBsian
oon-entlon of

The British Columbia Boundary Question.

Capitalist, 2l8t October, 1897.

It is contended on the British side that the head of
the canal and the ports of Dyea and Skagway are in
British territory, and this is stoutly denied by the Wash-
ington Government. The United States purchased Alaska
from Russia in 1867, and the purchase, amongst other
things, was subject to the provisions of a boundary con-
vention between Great Britain and Eussia rjade in 1825.
The boundary between British and Eussian territory was
then described as follows : Whenever the summits of the
mountains, which extends parallel with the coast from
56 deg. N. latitude to the point of intersection of 141 deg.
W. longitude, shall prove to be at a distance of more
than ten ma:: ne loag'ies from the ocean, the limit between
the British possessions and the lino of coast which is to
belong to Bussia shall be formed by a line parallel to the
T^findings of the coast, and which shall never exceed ten
marine leagues therefrom.

249

Tho interpretation of this clause is *^"! nut to be
-cracked between the two Governments se\ two years
after the treaty was made. The Lynn chaniAoi is said to
commence at least twenty leagues from the ocean. The
United States claim the inlet to be the ocean, as it is boXriog npon
tidal salt water accessible without hindrance from the orcoaSt?"^'"*
sea. In pursuance of this contention the States have
established custom houses at Dyea and Skagway, which
on the other side are claimed to be in British territory
because the Lynn channel cannot be considered as ocean
at all. The United States have scvsured possession, which
is held to be equal to nine points of the law, and from the
point of view of to-day there is the prospect of a haggling
for compromise.

Important, concerning Outfits.

Mr. Eoger Pocock, in writing from Victoria (B.C.),
to Lloyd's Weekly of 7th November, 1897, states : —

I do know something, at least, about outfitting for
Alaska, British Columbia, and the Territories, having
travelled for years in these regions, gaining experience
which may be useful to next year's crop of victims.

If you are going to the Yukon do not outfit in Lon-
don. A few things you may get there which will be
useful: —

Pocket medicine case full of concentrated drugs and
instruments of minor surgery.

" The Ship Captain's Medical Guide."

Three-cornered needles — *' surgeon's," " glover's,"
** sailmaker's " ; sheath knife, flexible with wooden handle,
patent buttons, wax end, wax, thread, &c., underclothes,
and toilet-gear.

For salmon — a gafif head.

For trout— common tackle. Western fish despise
fancy flies.

For meat — a rifle, '45 calibre.

Weapons are not carried on the Klondike. .

250

It is in Canada, and the Mounted Police run that
department.

Winter clothes get in Winnipeg.

Gloves are dangerous. Use mitts, and have a pair
or two of guantlet wrists flexible to sew on to them.
Mitts and foot gear should be of ample size, and the supply
generous.

Snow goggles are ne>-essary in spring.

A fur coat should have an eight-inch collar, and not
reach below the knee. The -parka of the Esquimaux and
the fur trowsers might be got in London, and are both ex-
cellent. A fur cap and a large light fur robe for bedding
will be useful. All very expensive. Fur boots are the
best foot gear, but take also Canadian mocassins and shoe-
packs.

Snowshoes should be narrow — Pacific coast or Arctic
pattern.

Summer gear.— The English oilskin suit and sou'-
wester — seaman's pattern — is best ; do not get officers'
oilskin coats, which are too long.

For the rest the dealers in Victoria, B.C., are old
miners of large experience, and their advice is worth
taking.

Long-legged rubber boots are for river work, but be-
ware of those with linings, which are useless. In wearing
them put on dry socks after every meal, which will save
your feet from getting tender. Hang tba boots by the
tops at night to dry. I prefer myselt a long-legged
leather boot, well oiled, because it does not wear out in
a week at the ankles. The tops should be o'. rather light
leather, narrow at the ankles, close up the leg, the sole
broad with nails, the heel very low and large, the counter
built up stiff, and fitting exactly over the heel. The
Russian national boot is best of all ; the English makes
are useless, and pitifully bad ; the American fair. The
English hobnailed highlow is good for mountain work,
but bad in the wet climate of the Upper Yukon.

251

The best clothes are American duck overalls, but a
Buit of Mackinaw, as used by lumbermen, should be taken
also.

The hat should shelter the eyes.

Take the best mosquito netting, and plenty of it,
also long-wristed gloves. The Yukon and Lapland are
the worst mosquito countries known.

Get large grey double blankets and a waterproof
sheet to roll them in; an oil canvas sack for clothes.
Leave all linen and fine apparel behind.

Weight from 100 lbs. ; cost, without furs, from £20.

Camp outfit for a party, buy in Canada.

An "A" tent, waterproof and strong, but light, col-
lapsible sheet-iron stove, with telescope pipe, frying pans,
camp kettles, buckets, &c., table ware of galvanised iron.

Weight from 30 lbs. ; cost from £5.

Mining Outfit. — Canadian axe, with spare helves,
long-handled shovel, pick, and steel gold pan.

Boat Building Outfit. — Five pound 2-in. and 4-in.
wire nails, 5 lb. pitch,31b. oakum, two large files, hammer,
brace and bit, large whipsaw, 50 ft. f-in rope, draw
knife, chisel, sail canvas, sail needles, wax-end, a block
or two.

Total weight, 70 lb. ; cost £10.

Provisions, — Under current conditions no man is
allowed to enter the country without a supply for one
year. Add 1 lb. citric acid as a light substitute for lime
juice (five grains dissolved in water makes a most refresh-
ing drink), and 100 lb. dried fruit and vegetables. Scurvy
is prevalent from bad living. Matches should be in tin
with waterproof wrapping.

All perishable goods should be in oilskin sacks. Bags
are easier to handle than boxes.

Weight of year's supply, 1,5001b. ; cost in Canada,
£30.

orn

Hints to the Mining Novice.

Here — says the Calgary Herald of September 16th
(1897) — are a few hints for the tenderfoot who does not
know dolomite from a mule tract, and who may go
prospecting in the Yukon. This practical advice will
be valuable to some and interesting to many.

The great majority of the men rushing to the
Clondike are tenderfeet. They have never seen a gold
mine, and their comprehension of what is a gold mine is
derived from a perusal of the flotsam and jetsam of the
daily press, says the Vancouver World, Few of them go
prepared to buy claims already opened, and must locate
claims for themselves. Brainladen with absurd ideas as
to the origin of the gold, and ignorant of the natural
laws of its distribiition, confronted in the country with
the severest physical conditions under which gold mining
is followed anywhere, it is impossible but that there
should be many disappointments before a sufficient
number of successes shall have come to accumulate the
needed experience.

On the ground, and presuming all of the possible
ground of the Clondike placers already appropriated,
the attention of the miner should be first given to
unproven possible ground in the valleys of streams
adjacent to those in which gold has already been found
and to the valleys and streams which head in the same
hills or mountains as do those known gold-bearing
streams. It is possible for the lode system which has
enriched one stream to have been cut by the drainage
basin of another, so that it has enriched them as well.

In the Yukon, as elsewhere, the mountain uplifts
have resulted in forming fissured and fractured zones in
rocks which have filled with gold ores. These, if on one
side of a mountain, are apt to be duplicated on the other,
and, though neither can be seen, both can be inferred
from the discovery of gold on one side of the drainage.
It is justified to look on the other side as well.

253

As an additional guide, the gravel rock fragments in
the gold-bearing stream should be compared with that
being prospected. If the two contain identical rocks,
and particularly if they both contain quartz, diorite,
diabase or porphyry pebbles, it is worth the chance to
extend the prospecting even if the first efforts disclose no
gold. When gold is found in several claims in the same
valley, the direction of the line of deposit should be
noted and the first prospecting should be done in that
line as being the most probable one for the placer.

The gold produced by the several claims going up
stream should be compared, both in total quantity and
size of grains. With the data of this comparison it is
possible to reason out the locus of the richest ground,
and also to know when the lode source of the gold is
being approached. Coarse gold, gold with attached
quartz fragments and rough gold, all indicate iihat the
source is comparatively close at hand — that a point is
being reached beyond which there will be no placer.
The Russians, in their mining of the Siberian placers,
failed generally to recognise the lode source of the gold,
and in many instances carried their prospecting for
placers miles up stream beyond the lodes from which
the gold came. There is no reason for Canadian miners
making the same mistake.

Another indication of nearness to lodes is the
presence of rough fragments of pyrite, chalcopyrite or
galena. Even if these last do not lead to gold bearing
lodes, they may lead to valuable lodes of copper or lead.
Generally, anything heavy that is found in the mining
should be determined. Silver, quicksilver, tin and nick'
ores and platinum are all worth consitlering, even in the
Yukon. The possibility of their occurrence should not
be lost sight of, the more particularly as the discovery is
only to be m&de by following up the stream indications.

The covering of snow over the surface for seven
months of the year, the covering of moss for the other

•

254

five months, precludes the possibility of prospecting by
the ordinary surface methods. Where it is necessary to
prospect without the guide of discoveries ah-eady made
adjacent, almost total dependence must be made on the
character of the pebbles in the gravels uncovered in
prospecting. If much quartz be found, even though no
gold at first, it is advisable to cover the possible ground for
a placer pretty thoroughly before abandoning it finally.

As a general proposition, it will prove very advan-
tageous for a dozen or more miners to co-operate in
making a systematic exploration of unknown ground.
"Work can be done cheaper, faster and surer than by the
same men acting independently. Go-operation admits of
increasing the tool outfit by a blacksmith shop and drill
outfit. Powder can be used and the prospect holes sunk
through the frozen ground much faster than by fire.
Prospecting can be spread over a much larger area by
co-operation than by the same men acting each for
himself. Co-operating, once the gold is found, the whole
company are in a position to intelligently secure a
valuable claim for each member and to get the claims
so connected that they can be economically exploited as
one property.

It must be remembered that the present cumbersome
method of exploitation will soon be replaced by quicker
and better ones, admitting of the profitable working of
the ground now left unworked, and distinctly advan»
tageous to large claims, compared with small ones.

Condensed Poods for the Far N.W. Territories.

Now, what is wanted — says the Calgary Eeraid, o!
September 16th (1897) — is food in such a condensed
form that the equivalent in nourishment to 1,800 pounds
in bulk may be so reduced in weight that a man can
carry it on his back.

255

Science has done a great deal towards accomplishing
this. The armies of the United States, England, France,
and Germany, in their •' emergency rations," have
accomplished marvels in the matter of condensation.
The U. S. War Department has proved it possible to
condense a loaf of bread into a space no larger than a
pack of fire crackers, a pound of beef into a hard chunk
an inch or so square, a cup of coffee into a cough lozenge
and a quart of soup into an oblong package of about two
cubic inches. The food is all there, all its nutritive
elements preserved.

Here is a partial list of things that might interest
the Glondiker, and which Calgary merchants should
carry in stock : —

Saccharine, a coal tar product put up in tiny tabletsi
200 times as sweet as sugar.

Femmican, a mixture of dried beef, fat and salt
half a pound of which goes a long way.

Dried mixed vegetables, a French preparation of
cabbages, turnips, beets and other things. One-tenth
the original weight.

Dessicated beef blocks, one ounce equal to five
ounces of fresh beef.

Dessicated soup, three ounces solid to a quart of
water, with salt included.

Beef tablets, two ounce size, contaming most of the
valuable elements of a pound of beef.

Coffee lozenges, a half cup each, sugar included;
tea ditto.

Kola put up with chocolate in cakes is stimulating
rather than nourishing.

Malted nuts, a highly concentrated form of food,
made digestible or said to be.

256

Lemon and Lime tablets, one, vest button size, to a-
glass of water. Fruit tablets of various other sorts less
valuable to the miner.

Celery tablets, an appetizer a man who digs for gold
will hardly take except as a luxury.

,. ^ Strawberry tablets, useful mainly for flavouring.

Dessicated apples, peaches, pears, potatoes, turnips,
onions, and other things — generally about one-tenth
weight.

Olives, stoned and dessicated, very nutritious, a
recent Californian arrangement.

Peanut meal, very light and nutritive, useful as a
soup ingredient.

Bean and pea soup packages, a compressed form of
the most nutritive vegetables known, combined with
soup stock. , . .. , .

There are milk tablets which can be used, generally
designed for convalescent diet, but available for general
purposes, — the lactopeptines, or milk and pepsin in
combination ; and the melted milk tablets which are
already used as condensed luncheons by a few New
York men — gold miners in the Wall Street canyon. A
tin can about two and a half inches high and two inches
and a quarter across contains the equivalent of several
meals, if allowed to dissolve on the tongue slowly.

The British sailor is called a " Lime-juicer," because
lime juice is served out to him on long cruises to prevent
scurvy. This disease is the bane of Arctic explorers
and the bugbear of Arctic miners. The Clondike man
wants plenty of lime and lemon tablets.

The Clondike man will do well to cultivate a sweet
tooth, if he has it not, Sugar is one of the most conden-
sible of foods, and is almost entirely a fuel, food and
cheater of the cold. He wants oil also. He may think
he doesn't, but he does. Just at this season oil doesn't
appeal to a jaded palate, but the Clondike has a Bussian

257

olimate, and in Bussian towns poor people used to shin
up the lamp posts and drink all the oil designed for
lighting the streets, until the discovery of petroleum
enabled hard-hearted municipalities to substitute a
brand of illuminating fluid less favoured by connoisseurs
as a beverage. Nowadays, poor Eussians with long
memories look wistfully up at the gas lamps, shake their
■heads, sigh, and curse the Government,

The miner who wants to ca:-ry his own pack will
have to live on nourishing soups and savoury stews a
good deal of the time after reaching the Clondike. Most
concentrated foods lose their fibre. There is nothing to
chew on. Almost everything comes m a powder or a
paste, and needs nothing but boiling water and an appetite
to make a meal. ^

One way to get along in the Clondike region with
less food is to keep warm. This is generally managed
by building one's cabin right over his claim, and digging
down through the frozen ground underneath. Here, in
Hi great pit, sheltered from the wind, the miner works in
a degree of discomfort, perhaps not greater than that of
the Canadian lumberman out of doors. It is a useful
pointer that the lumberman's favorite diet is pork and
beans, and that pea soup comes next in flavour.

The Table off a Year'5 Food.

The accompanying table of a year's food, which may
be carried into Clondike on a man's back, is based partly
on Prof, W. 0. Atwater's tables of food values and food
needs, and upon the supposed strength of the various
tablets and extracts. It is based also, in part, upon the
U. S. Army Ration and other standard dietaries. It is
not "guaranteed to give satisfaction," but it includes
nothing that is not easily possible, and nothing which
will not be one of the commonplaces of modern life
within a few years. Its total weight equivalent in
ordinary food is only a little over 600 lbs., but the
ingredients are carefully chosen to avoid waste.

258
The Clondlke Food Pack.

A Year's Provisions to be carried on Owner's back.

ARTICLE. ■ EQUIVALENT IN ORDINARY FOOD.

Weight lbs. lbs. '

War Bread .. .. ,. .. 12 Bread 100

Bean and Pea Tablets .. .. 14 \ D^ed Beans and Peas.. .. 25

I Moat Soup Stock, &c 20

Beef, Dessioated 14 Neok of Beef, Bonelees .,80

Potatoes and Mixed Vegetables ) .^

Dessicated and Condensed ) *" Fresh Vegetables .. ..100

Saccharmo J gug^^ ^

Milk Tablets 2 i Not an exact equivalent or- | ^

I dinary canned Milk.. )

Coffee Tablets and Saccharine . . 1 Coffee 10

Tea Tablets with Saccharine ,. 1 rp^j^ ^

Pre88ed01ives,stoneless, dessicated 8 Ordinary Olive 20

Lemon and Lime Tablets, almost 1 »

pure acid J Lemons and Juice in bottles.. 50

Malted Nuts and Nut Meal .. 2 Ordinary Nut Meats ., ..10

Celery Tablets 1 Celery 16

Dessioated Fruits 6 Canned Fruits 26

Bait, included in most of the | „

Pood Tablets .. .. ( ^ • •• 7

Total ..69} Total », 618

These tablets with the new silk rubber suit of clothing, invented
by a man in Kokomo, Ind., which is as light as air and warm as buflfalo
robes, simplify the problem of the argonauts. This new garment is
said to be quite impervious to wind and water ; to be so firm of texture
that it will never wear out ; and to render the conventional suit of
clothes necessary only as a concession to established custom.

Termination of the Hudson Bay Company's Cliarter.

Thus the Company's privileges (the Hudson Bay Company)
remained unchallenged till the year 1859, when the monopoly was
declared illegal. But there still remained certain rights, or at least
claims and vested interests, which, however, were all surrendered in
1869 to the newly constituted Dominion of Canada.

On this occasion a very profitable arrangement was made, by
which the company gave up all its shadowy privileges in return for
an indemnity of about £300,000, and an absolute grant of 7,000,000
acres in the most fertile part of the territory-. It was also agreed that
they should retain possession of all their •' forts," or trading stations,
with a space of 60 acres round each enclosure. By these negotiations
all danger of future litigation was avoided, while hundreds of millions
of acres of magnilicent arable land (Manitoba, Assiniboia, &c.) were
immediately thrown open for free trade and settlement, and are now
traversed by the Canadian Pacific trunk line of railway. (The Early
Chartered Companies, by Causton & Keane, p. 190.)

«.-,, .. .r..., r . ... .- / , .-; ., ,,,,,V A

-APPENDIX.

» M J.Kl ..»

The 1896 (the 6th) Report of the Ontario Bureau " '^'

of Mines. '*^» ■ '"^

Ab tho London Market is said to be preparing for a Canadian "' .
boom in the Spring, a short reference to this report should not be
inappropriate.

The most prominent feature in the matter of statistics is that
which illustrates the progress which gold-mining is making in
the Province.

The statistics for the past five years are as follows : —

Schedule.

1892.

1893.

1894.

1895.

1896.

Mines worked . . . .

!Men above ground . .

112

126

158

Men under ground , •

111

Ore Treated (tons) . .

3,710

5.560

2,428

6,500

13,292

Gold product (oz.) . .

• •

1,695

2,022

3,030

7,164

Gold value (ft) . . . .

36,900

32,960

32,776

50.781

121,848

Wages paid for labour (8

I) 22,760

49,027

88,032

56,234

91,210

A curious feature of the above table (the " Financial News "
points out) is that with 48 additional men employed in 1896 the
gold output considerably more than doubled in value. At the same
time, 237 men in 1896 cost in wages $91,210, although 189 in 1895
only cost $56,234 — which appears to indicate that wages are on an
ascending scale. The average product of the ore was $9.16 per ton,
as much " lean " ore was treated, owing to lack of development
work. The Mikado, of Shoal Lake, is stated to have given the best
results yet obtained in the lake of the Woods region, being au
average of 3.26 oz., or $48.94 per ton from a run of 297 tons treated
at the reduction works at Bat Portage. This is a very handsome
yield, but the report does not state whether the ore was picked or
sent at random. The total number of stamps in operation last
year was 45, but with new mills in course of construction puQ
additions to one or two of the old ones, it was believed that 130
stamps would be dropping before the end of 1897.

The foregoing table takes no account of development work
going on at mines which are not yet at the crushing stage ; but it
appears that much capital and labour have been expended on this
proving and developing of gold properties.

Until recently very few companies had been organized in the
Province of Ontario to carry on mining operations. Some were
working under foreign charters, but of these the number actually

s 2

260

• ■ • • •.- ••■ .i:'!:*r*v' .•■'<«;jf* >■'■>■ ,-:0'.>i- -■:

engaged in tKo industry did not exceed half-a-dozen. In 1894 — the
first year which mining corporations were empowered to sell stock
at any fixed price above or below par (issuing shares at a discount
in this country is illegal) — only five charters were granted under
the Ontario Joint-Stock Companies Acts, and the aggregate o their
authorised Capital was only 92,170,000. Under the saine Act, in
1896 the number formed was 22, with an authorised capital of
912,776,000 and the charters to 12 of these, representing an
aggregate capital of 99,475,000 were granted during the months of
November and December. In the first quarter of 1897 however,
the record of 1896 has been far surpassed, 83 mining companies
having been organised and chartered, with a total authorised
capital of 922,665,000. These facts furnish clear evidence of the
advance that has been made in the mining affairs of the province
and of preparation for greater activity in the near future.

Digest off that portion referring to Mineral Wealtii of
tlie iStli Annual Report (1896-97) of the British
Columbia Board of Trade.

Though the Yukon Gold discoveries have diverted attention
from the Mines of British Columbia, the factd brought forward in
this report prove that those who ignore the mining prospects of
this Province for those wider afield and less certain will doubtless
have occasion to remember the imprudence of forsalring the
substance for the shadow. Take, for instance, tho great and
increasing value of the mineral production since 1890, carefully
prepared by the very competent Mineralogist of this richly-
endowed province : —

1890 92,608,608

1891 93,646,702

1892 93,071,971

1893 93,588,413

1894 94,226,717

1895 95,666,802

1896 97.146,425

The output of the mines in Kootenay during 1896 nearly
doubled that of the previous year. In the Trail sub-division over
175 claims are being worked, and five have developed into mines
from which regular shipments of ore are made. Some fifty mines
are also in constant operation in the Slocan district, these yielding
a galena containing on the average 117 ounces of silver per ton,
and 52 per cent, of lead. The mines, it is computed, yielded the
owners a nst profit in 1896 of 975 per ton.

In the districts of Bossland, Kootenay, and Cariboo large
sums are being expended in mining works, principally hydraulic ;
but though these districts furnish evideroe of great mineral
wealth, the veins carrying either silver-galena or copper-gcld ores,
the great cost of transportation, sixty or more miles by waggon,
has ratarded their development.

261

It does not appear that British Columbia is rich in alluvial
, gold, the locations being invariably metallic lodes with smelting
ores, in which gold is associated with copper and silver with lead.
Great efforts, however, are being made to reach the bottom of deep
channels of creeks, the surface of which were worked some thirty
years since. The bottoms are now being reached by shafts and
timnels. Bedrock in the channel is ascertained to be 100 ft. from
the surface of the ground, but in order to reach it it has been
found necessary to sink and run about 1,50U ft. of shafts and
tunnels* A theory has lately been evolved that the earlier
waterways of Cariboo were different from those which now exist.
This has led to prospecting in what are believed to be dry beds
of former rivers and creeks, and it is reported that immense
quantities of gold-bearing gravel have been located.

Immediately north of Cariboo is the district of Cassiar, an
immense country, very little prospected. Several of the water-
ways have afforded rich placer diggings. The Columbian Board of
Trade also calls attention to the great value of the iron deposits of
British Columbia. The output of coal during 1896 was 846,335
tons; 1,665 tons of coke were produced additional.

Another New Qold-fleld in British Columbia.

" The Standard " (London) of January 1st, this year, contains
a lengthy report of a remarkably rich and extensive discovery of
gold-bearing country in the Omenioa district in the extreme north-
west of the Province. The discovery was made by Mr. G. D.
Wells, Mining Recorder for the Omenioa division of the Cassiar
district, along with two companions, Messrs. May and liyon. " The
Standard" Correspondent obtained the news directly from Mr.
Wells, who states that Omenica will surpass the great placers of
the Yukon. At present the returns run from 91 to 91^ to the
pan. There is a depth of 8 ft. of loose gravel, which pays about 920
a day per man. The gold is very coarse, nuggets going in many
cases as high as $20 in value. Mr. Wells says that the dirt will
yield H^ dollars per cubic yard.

"There is gold everywhere," Mr. Wells said to "The Standard"
Correspondent. '* We found traces of it in every creek along every
gully and hollow. It runs in a broad belt all the way from the
Kootenays in the South, right through British Columbia, the
Mackenzie and Yukon Basins, to the Arctic Ocean. Besides the rich
placer I have found a rich lode of free milling quartz. At
Kisangas, Omenica, several enormously rich strikes have been made,
some running as high as 9120 to the ton; every creek in the
country bears gold in paying quantities, some that will yield rich
fortunes to the lucky miners. Over on Vital Creek last summer,

262

a Chinese Company took out §10,000 worth of pure gold by the
most primitive methods of washing (Chinese are debarred by law
in the Dominion from operating in undergroimd workings). Vital
Creek is only 135 miles from Hazelton, on the Bkeena Biver, a port
of call for all steamers from Victoria."

Mr. Wells produced rich samples of gold-studded quartz, and
also samples of asbestos, of which, he stated, the country is very
rich.

The Omeuica is a wild, rugged, forbidding region — a sea of
mountains. Travelling is extremely difficult, owing to the dense
forests and roughness of the mountain ranges. The climate is sub*
arctic, in winter registering 60 to 60 degrees below zero.

The routes to the district are along the Skeena, or up the
Fraser (on to the Parsnip) Rivers from the west coast or along the
Peace Biver from Edmonton in the south-east. The Omenica
district is on the headwaters of the Peace Biver.

Customs Restrictions.

The Board of Trade (B.C.) has issued a report containing
information upon outfitting for the Yukon. Attention is called to
the fact that goods purchased in any country than in Canada must
pay an average of 35 per cent. Customs duty when entering the
British-Yukon.

On the other hand it must be pointed out that the Deputy-
Collector of Customs at Skagway and Dyea has ruled that goods
purchased in Canada and brought through these United States
ports, must either pay duty or $6 a day to an official to accompany
travellers to the international (?) boundary.

Projected Railway Routes to tlie Vulcon.

From "Canadian Gazette," November 23rd, 1897.

It is interesting to note the nvimber of railways that have
been projected to reach the Klondike, or, at any rate, to facilitate
travel in that direction. How many and which of them will be
actually constructed is another question. Here is the list : —

Skf^fway and White Pass to Lake Bennett, 50 miles.
Chilkafc Pass, Lynn Canal to Lake Arkell, 150 miles.
Taku Inlet to Lake Teslin, 162 miles.
Chilkoot Pass, from Dyea, Railway and Tramway, 16 miles.
Alaska Central Bailway, Copper Biver to Klondike, 400 miles.
Stikeen Biver, Telegraph Creek to Luke Teslin, 135 miles.
North- Western Transportation Company's projected road over
part of the Edmonton Boute, 100 miles.

268

Short cut to the Yukon.

AK ALTBRNATIVB STIKINfi ROUTE.

" Fintnoial News," 8rd Januery, 1898.

It is stated that the all-Canadian route vi& the Stiokeen lUver,
has, by a recent discovery, been considerably shortened. It has
been proved that instead of following the Dease Lake (or the old
Cassiar) trail, a out-otf can be made by proceeding up the Telegraph
Greek trail to the Hootalinqua and following that river to the
Hudson's Bay post at Agnell's Mountain, thence along the Shesli
Biver on the ice to the main Taku Biver. Continuing along the
Taku north, a branch of the Nahlin Biver is reached.

From this point five miles land travel is all that intervenes
between the headwaters of the Teslin Lake, which, of course, is
practically the headwaters of the Yukon Biver. Thib route reduces
the total distance from Telegraph Creek to Teslin Lake to ISO
miles, as follows: —

Telegraph Creek to Hudson's Bay Post . . . . 40

Hudson's Bay Post to Shesli Biver 60

Taku to Nahlin Biver 96

Portage • .. 5

Total 180

This is mostly ice travel, and it is claimed that it will be found
to be the best available winter route.

Yukon amended Mining Regulations.

Through Reuter's Agency, Ottawa, January 17th, 1898.

The Gk>vemment has adopted amended regulations regarding
placer mining in the Yukon district. Every miner and the employ6
of every miner, must take out a miner's certificate, the fee for
which will be 10 dols., and In the case of a company 50 or 100 dols.,
according to the amount of capital stock. Q'^he miner's license con-
fers the right to mine, fish, hunt and cut timber. The general
size of mining claims is 250 feat, and of discoverer's claims 500 feet.
Every alternate ten claims are reserved by the Government.

Subaqueous mining leases w^ be issued in five mile sections,
at a fee of 100 dols. per mile per annum, and the usual royalty. The
fee for recording and renewing mining claims is 15 dols. Five
miners working more than 100 miles distant from the office of the
recorder may appoint a recorder to record the claims. A royalty
of 10 per cent, on the gold mined will be collected by the Govern-
ment, but provision will be made for the exemption on the annual
product of any mining claim up to 2,600 dols., so that claims which
do not produce more than 3,600 dols. a year will not be liable for
royalty. . <

264

Provisions will be made to prevent speculation in claims hy
throwing a claim open to entry which has not been worked for a
certain number of days, unless treasonable cause be shown to
acootmt for it. •

*Eictract« from Report5 by U.S. Mining and Oeological

Experts.

Prt>fesBor N. S. Shaler, who is the best living American
authority on geology has been telling his classes at Harvard for the
liist twenty years that the coming great discoveries of gold on this
continent would be in Alaska and the North-West. He explained
that in the great extension of the Rocky Mountain system to the
North doubtless lay the mother vein, which sooner or later would
come io light. Professor Shaler's prophecy, based on scieptifio
deductions, has ccme true, and other scientists agree with him that
the Alaskan country contains limitless possibilities for the discovery
of gold.

Dr. 'V{, H. Pael, of the Smithsonian Institution at Washington,
who has iQV years been regarded as the highest authority on the
Alasl»n country,, and .who is a geologist of note, says he has no
doubt of the truth of the stories told of the richness of the Yukon
soil. " The gold-bearing belt of North- Western America," he says,
" contains all the gold fields extending into British Columbia and
yrhtA is known as the North-West Territories and Alaska. The
Yukon really runs along in that belt for five hundred or six hundred
milctd. The bed of the main river is in the valley. The yellow
metal is not found in paying quantities in the main river, but in the
small streams which out through the mountains on either side."

George Frederick Wright, professor of geology at Oberlin
College, thinks that the '< mother lode " may be looked for success-
fully in Alaska. In his opinion it exists somewhere up the streams
on which the plexser iiiines are found. The source of the Klondyke
gold, he auyp,, is from the south, and the gold was doubtless
trSfUBported by glacier action. The Klondyke region is on the north
side of the St. Elias Alps, and the glaciers flowed both north and
south from these summits. "Placer mines," says Professor
Wrighti "originate in the disintegration of gold-bearing quarts
veins, or mass like that at Jur.eau. Under sub-aerial agencies
these become dissolved. Then the glaciers transport the material
as far as they go, when the floois of water carry it on still further,
Qold, t/eing heavier than the other materials associated with it,
lodges in the orc^ces or in the rough places at the bottom of the
Btreams. So to speak, nature has stamped and ' panned ' the
grareli first and prepared the way for man to finish th(« work. Th9

* I am indebted to Mr. Ironmonger Sola for these extraots.

:<*ai/>>bv

265

amount of gold found ia the placer mines isevidenoe not so much,
perhaps, of a very rich vein as of the disintegration of a very hurge
vein, What the prospectors have found points to more. The un-
explored region is immense. The mountaios to the south are
young, having heen elevated very much since the climax of the
glacial period. With these discoveries and the success in introdu-
cing reindeer, Alaska bids fair to support a population eventually of
several miUions."

William Van Slooten, an eminent mining engineer and
metallurgist, sees in the reports from the Klondyke indications of a
more eztiaordinary deposit of gold than that of Galifomiai He
says : — " No such specifically large amounts of gold were taken out
by individuals during any similar period of Galifomia gold hunting.
Two months of work in the water has realized more than any six
months heretofore known in the history of gold mining. We, had
long been aware that there was gold in the Yukon basin, but the
total output for the last ten years before the Klondyke developments
amounted to not more than a million dollars' worth at the utmost.
Now, within two months, five millions have been taken out of the
Klondyke regions. It took the first eight months of work in
California to pan out that amount under infinitely more favourable
-conditions of climate and weather. That is a straw worth noting."

The latest and therefore the most important official inventiga*
tion of the gold fields is that conducted under the auspices of the
United States Geological Survey in 1896 by J. Edwaid Spurr,
accompanied by two geologic assistants. The expedition was sent
out in accordance with an appropriation by Gongress of 96,000 for
the investigation of the coal and gold resources of Alaska. A like
appropriation for the year before resulted in the expedition headed
by Dr. George F. Becker, which investigated the gold fields of
Southern Alaska. Mr. Spurr's party crossed the Chilkoot Pass
about the middle of June, and passed down the Yukon in a siinall,
roughly.built boat to the crossing of Forty Mile Greek. A summary
of his report was submitted to Congress by the director of the
Qeological Survey through the Secretary of the Interior, February
2nd, 1897. Mr. Spurr's party and Dr. Becker's both took numerous
photographs along the routes they traversed. It appears from
Mr. Spurr's report that the gold belt is likely to be found running
in a direction a little west of north-west.

Running in a direction a little west of north-west through the
territory examined is a broad, continuous belt of highly altexed
rooks. To the east this belt is known to be continuous fotr one
hundred miles or inore in British territory. The rooks constituting
this belt are mostly crystalline schists associated with marbles and
sheared quartzites, indicating a sedimentary origin for a large part

266

of th« series. In the upper part a few plant remains were found,
which floggest that this portion is probably of Devonian age.
These altered sedimentary rooks have been shattered by volcanic
action, and they are pierced by many dikes af eruptive rock.
Besides the minof volcanic disturbances, there have been others on
a large scale, which have resulted in the formation of continuous
ridges or mountain ranges. In this process of mountain building
the sedimentary rooks have been subjected to such pressure and to
such alteration from attendant forces that they have been squeezed
into the condition of schist, and often partly or wholly crystallized,
so that their original pharcter has in some cases entirely disappeared.
In summarizing, it may be said that the rocks of the gold belt of
Alaska consist largely of sedimentary beds older than the carbon-
iferous period ; that these beds have undergone extensive alteration,
and have been elevated into mountain ranges and cut tlirough by a
variety of igneous rooks.

Throughout these altered rocks there are found veins of quartz
often carrying pyrite and gold. It appears that these quartz veins
were formed during the disturbance attending the uplift and
alteration of the beds. Many of the veins have been cut, sheared
and torn into fragments by the force that has transformed the
sedimentary rocks into crystalline schist; but there are others,
containing gold, silver and copper, that have not been very much
disturbed or broken. These more continuous ore-bearing zones
have not the character of ordinary quarts veins, although they
contain much silica. Instead of the usual white quartz veins, the
ore occurs in a sheared and altered zone of rock and gradually runs
out on both sides. So far as yet known, these continuous zones of
ore arc of relatively low grade. Concerning the veins of white
quarts first mentioned, it is certain that most of them which
contain gold carry it only in small quantity, and yet some few
are known to be very rich in places, and it is extremely probable
that there are many in which the whole of the ore is of com-
parativoljf high grade.

No quartz or vein mining of any kind has yet l>een attempted
in the Yukon district, mainly on account of the difficulty with
which supplies, machinery and labour can be obtained ; yet it i»
certain that there is a vast quantity of gold in these rooks, much
of which could be profitably extracted under favourable conditions.
The general character of the rooks and of the ore deposits is
extremely like that of the gold-bearing formations along the
southern coast of Alaska, in which the Treadwell and other mines*
are situated, and it is probable that the richness of the Yukon rooks
is approximately equal to that of the coast bolt. It may be added
that the resources of the coast belt have been only partially
explored.

267

Beddes the gold foiind in the rooka of the Yukon district theie
is reason to exp«ot paying quantities of other mi&erals. Deposits
of silver bearing lead have been found in a number of looalities, and
ooppcr is also a constituent of many of the ores.

Since the formation of the veins and other deposits of the rocks
of the gold belt an enormous length of time has elapsed. During
that time the forces of erosion have stripped off the overlying rocks
and exposed the metalliferous veins at the surface for long periods,
and the rocks of the gold belt, with the veins which they include,
have crumbled and been carried away by the streams, to be
deposited in widely different places as gravels, or sands, or muds.
As gold is the heaviest of all materials found in rock, it is con-
centrated in detritus which has been worked over by stream action ;
and the richness of the placers depends upon the available gold
supply, the amount of available detritus, and the character of the
streams which carry this detritus away. In Alaska the streams
have been carrying away the gold from the metalliferous belt for a
very long period, so that particles of the precious metal are found
in nearly all parts of the Territory. It is only in the immediate
vicinity of the gold-bearing belt, however, that the particles of gold
are lai^e and plentiful enough to repay working, under present
conditions. Where a stream heads in the gold belt, the richest
diggings are likely to be near its extreme upper part.

In this upper part the current is so swift that the lighter
material and the finer gold are carried away, leaving in many
places a rich deposit of coarse gold overlain by coarse gravel, the
pebbles being so large as to hinder rapid transportation by water.
It is under such conditions that the diggings wliich are now being
worked are found, with some unimportant exceptions. The rich
gulches of the Forty Mile district and of the Birch Creek district,
as well as other fields of less importance, all head in the gold-bearing
formation.

A short distance below the heads of these gulches the stream
Talley broadens and the gravels contain finer gold more widely
distributed. Along certain parts of the stream this finer gold is
concentrated by favourable currents and is often profitably washed,
this kind of depo&it coming under the head of " bar diggings." The
gold in these more extensive gravels is often present in sufficient
quantity to encourage the hope of successful extraction at some
future time, when the work can be done more cheaply and vrith
suitable machinery. The extent of these gravels which are of
possible value is very great. As the field of observation is extended
farther tatd farther from the gold-bearing belt, the gold occurs in
finer and finer condition, until it is found only in extremely small
flakes, so light that they can be carried long distances by the
current.

• 268

• It tOMj b«' steted, tKeMtoN, m a general role, that the profit*
able graveU ws fonnd in the vicinity of the gold-bearing roolc.

The gold-bearing belt' forms, a range of low mountains, and
on the flanks of these mountains, to the north-east and to the
sottth-vfest, lie various younger rocks which range in age frqm
oarboniierous to very recent tertiary, and are made mp mostly- of
oonglomerates, sandstones and shales, with some voloanio material.
These rooks were formed subsequent to the ore disposiiion, and
therefore do not contain metalliferous veins. They have been
partly derii«d, however, from detritus worn from the gold-bearing
belt during the long period that it has been exposed to erosion, and
some of them contain gold derived from the more ancient rocks and
concentrated in the same way as is the gold in the present^ver
gravels. In one or two places it is certain that these oonglomerates
are really fossil placers, and this source of supply may eventually
turn out to be very important.

In the .younger rooks which overlie the gold-bearing series
there are beds of black, hard, glossy, very pure lignitic coaJ. An
area of these ooal-bearing strata lies very close to the gold-bearing
district, in the uorthem paH of the region examined, and as the
beds of coal ebre often of considerable thickness and the coal in
some of them leaves very little ash and contains volatile
constituents in considerable amount, it is probable that the coal
deposits will become an important factor in the development of
the country.

•• "#■■